Skip to main content

Full text of "Catalogue of the State Teachers College at Indiana, Pennsylvania"

See other formats


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2009  with  funding  from 

Lyrasis  IVIembers  and  Sloan  Foundation 


http://www.archive.org/details/catalogueofstate1953indi 


£  CO' 30.1 


TEACHERS  COLLEGE 
BULLETIN 

Volume  59  FEBRUARY,  1953  Number  1 


STATE  TEACHERS  COLLEGE 

INDIANA,  PENNSYLVANIA 


Catalogue  Number 


1953-1954 


THIS  COLLEGE  IS  ACCREDITED  BY  THE  AMERICAN  ASSOCIAnON  OF 

COLLEGES   FOR   TEACHER   EDUCATION   and   THE  MIDDLE    STATES 

ASSOCIATION  OF  COLLEGES  AND  SECONDARY   SCHOOLS. 


Issued  Quarterly  in  February,  May,  August  and  November  by  the 
Trustees  of  the  State  Teachers  College,  Indiana,  Pennsylvania. 
Entered  as  eecond-class  matter,  June  30,  1913,  at  the  Post  Office 
in   Indiana,   Pennsylvania,  under  Act  of  Congress,   August  24,  1912. 


COLLEGE  CALENDAR 
1953-1954 

THE  SUMMER  SESSIONS 

Pre-Session 

Classes  Begin Wednesday,  June  10 

Session  Ends Friday,  June  26 

Main  Session 

Classes  Begin Monday,  June  29 

Session  Ends Friday,  August  7 

Post  Session 

Classes  Begin Monday,  August  10 

Session  Ends Wednesday,  August  26 


FIRST  SEMESTER  1953-1954 

Registration  and  Orientation  of  Freshmen 

(Details  will  be  mailed)  Tuesday,  Wednesday,  September  8,  9 

Registration  of  Upperclassmen Thursday,  September  10 

*Classes  Begin  with  First  Period Friday,  September  11 

Thanksgiving  Recess  Begins 

at  the  Close  of  Classes Tuesday,  November  24 

Thanksgiving  Recess  Ends  at  8:00  a.m. Monday,  November  30 

Christmas  Recess  Begins 

at  the  Close  of  Classes Wednesday,  December  16 

Christmas  Recess  Ends  at  8:00  a.m. Monday,  January  4 

**First  Semester  Ends  at  the  Close 

of  Final  Examinations Thursday,  January  21 

Last  Meeting  of  Saturday  Campus  Classes Saturday,  January  23 


SECOND  SEMESTER  1953-1954 

Registration Monday,  January  25 

*Classes  Begin  at  8:00  a.m. Tuesday,  January  26 

Easter  Recess  Begins  at  the 

Close  of  Classes Tuesday,  April  13 

Easter  Recess  Ends  at  8:00  a.m. Tuesday,  April  20 

Alumni  Day Saturday,  May  22 

Baccalaureate  Services Sunday,  May  23 

**Commencement Monday,  May  24 


*  Student  Teachers  begin  prior  to  this  date,  depending  upon 
the  Center  to  which  assigned. 

**  Ending  date  for  student  teachers  may  vary,  depending  upon 
the  school  calendar  at  various  Teaching  Centers. 


COMMONWEALTH     OF     PENNSYLVANIA 
DEPARTMENT  OF  PUBLIC  INSTRUCTION 

Francis  B.  Haas,  Superintendent  of  Public  Instruction 

BUREAU  OF  TEACHER  EDUCATION  AND  CERTIFICATION 

Henry  Klonow^r,  Director 

John  K.  Trayer,  Assistant  Director 
Stanley  A.  Wengert,  Assistant  Director 

STATE  COUNCIL  OF  EDUCATION 

President  and  Chief  Executive  Officer,  FRANCIS  B.  Haas 

W.  Floyd  Clinger Warren 

Elsie  M.  Heckman Allentown 

Donald  L.  Helfferich Collegeville 

Miles  Horst Lebanon 

Robert  C.  Shaw Camp  Hill 

G.  Morris  Smith  Selinsgrove 

Herbert  J.  Stockton Johnstown 

JopiN  J.  Sullivan Philadelphia 

BOARD  OF  TRUSTEES 

Harry  F.  Carson,  President Saltsburg 

Mrs.  Mabel  Waller  Mack,  Vice-President Indiana 

Cyrus  W.  Davis,  Secretary Conemaugh 

Steele  Clark Cherry  Tree 

John  W.  Neff Indiana 

A.  R.  Pechan Ford  City 

Mrs.  Edna  Bell  Pierce Indiana 

William  M.  Ruddock Indiana 

Joseph  H.  Sheriff Windber 

John  St.  Clair,  Treasurer  of  the  Board Indiana 


ADMINISTRATIVE  ORGANIZATION 
OF  THE  COLLEGE 

Willis  E.  Pratt  President 

Ralph  E.  Heiges Dean  of  Instruction 

John  E.  Davis  Director  of  Student  Teaching, 

Laboratory  School,  and  Placement 

W.  M.  Whitmyrb  Dean  of  Men 

Martha  C.  Faust  Dean  of  Women 

Leroy  H.  Schnell  Director  of  Student  Aid, 

Veterans'  Counselor 

Joseph  K.  Hall Librarian 

Arthur  F.  Nicholson  Director  of  Public  Relations 


William  Schuster  Business  Manager 

Clifford  M.  Buterbaugh  Ass't  to  Business  Manager 

Mary  L.  Esch  Registrar 

John  Lingenfelter  Treasurer  of  Co-operative  Association 

and  Manager  of  the  Book  Store 


W.  W.  Eicher  Supt.  of  Maintenance  and  Construction 

Olive  K.  Folger  Dietitian 

Marguerite  Sutton House  Director 


W.  B.  Eastment  Physician 

Harry  B,  Neal,  Jr Assistant  Physician 

Hazel  Ober  Nurse 

Phyllis  Goetchius  Nurse 


DIRECTORS  OF  DIVISIONS 

Irene  Russell  Elementary  Education 

Joy  Mahachek  Secondary  Education 


DIRECTORS  OF  SPECIAL  DEPARTMENTS 

ORVAL  Kipp Art  Education 

G.  G.  Hill  Business  Education 

Opal  T.  Rhodes  Home  Economics  Education 

Clel  T.  Silvey  Music  Education 


HEADS  OF  DEPARTMENTS 

Ralph  B.  Beard  Education 

Rhodes  R.  Stabley  English  and  Speech 

Edward  W.  Bieghler Foreign  Languages 

L.  C.  Davis  Geography 

George  P.  Miller Health  Education 

Joy  Mahachek  Mathematics 

Dw^ight  Sollberger Science 

W.  M.  Whitmyre  Social  Studies 


SPECIAL  CLINICS 

S.  Trevor  Hadley  Psycho-Education  Bureau 

Donald  A.  Hess  Speech  Clinic 

Stanley  W.  Lore  Reading  Clinic 


PRINCIPAL   COLLEGE   COMMITTEES 

Administrative  Council,  Admissions  and  Professional  Standards, 
Alumni,  Athletic  Policy,  College  Lodge,  Commencement,  Convocations, 
Cooperative  Association-Finance,  Cultural  Life,  Dining  Room,  Educa- 
tional Council,  Student  Council,  Faculty  Council,  Library  and  Instruc- 
tional Materials,  Professional  Study,  Religious  Life,  ROTC  Selection, 
Scholarship  and  Loan,  Social  Life,  Student  Personnel  and  Guidance 
Coordinating,   Student  Teaching  and   Placement. 


THE  FACULTY 

Willis  E.  Pratt  President 

A.B.,   Allegheny   College;    A.M.,    Ph.D.,    University   of    Pittsburgh; 
LL.D.,  Westminster  College 

Lois  V.  Anderson  Keith  School 

A,  B.,  Muskingum  College;  B,  S.,  State  Teachers  College,  Indiana, 
Pennsylvania;  Ed.M.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 

Ralph  B.  Beard  Education,  Assistant  to  Dean  of  Instruction 

B.S.,  Bucknell  University;   A.M.,  Columbia  University 

Lola  A.  Beelar  Music  Education 

B.S.,  Columbia  University;  A.M.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 

Willis  H.  Bell  Biology 

B.S.,  Grove  City  College;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Chicago 

Galen  S.  Besco  English 

B.S.,  Wilmington  College;  A.M.,  Ph.D.,  Ohio  State  University 

Edward  W.  Bieghler  Foreign  Languages 

B.A.,  M.A.,  University  of  Oregon;  Ph.D.,  Ohio  State  University 

Lois  C.  Blair  Keith  Schooi 

A.B.,  Grove  City  College;   Ed.M.,  Pennsylvania  State  College 

Abigail  C,  Boardman  Speech 

B.L.L,  Emerson  College;  A.B.,  M.A.,  Colorado  College  of  Education; 
Ph.D.,  University  of  Wisconsin 

Aagot  M.  K.  Borge  Music  Education 

B.M.,  A.M.,  University  of  Wisconsin 

Agnes  Marie  Bothne  Music  Education 

AjB.,  University  of  Minnesota;  M.Mus.,  Northwestern  University 

Robert  W.  Burggrap  Music  Education 

B.S.,  Columbia  University;  A.M.,  University  of  Kentucky 

Catherine  C.  Carl  Music  Education 

Mus.B.,  Oberlin  Conservatory  of  Music;  A.M.,  Indiana  University 

Edward  F.  Carr  English 

A.B.,  Duquesne  University;  A.M.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 

Ralph  W.  Cordier  Social  Studies 

A.B.,  Manchester  College;  A.M.,  Ph.D.,  Ohio  State  University 

Charles  A.  Davis  Music  Education 

B.S.,   State  Teachers   College,  Indiana,  Pennsylvania;    A.M.,   New 
York  University 

John  E.  Davis  Director  of  Keith  Schoo 

A.B.,  Pennsylvania  State  College;  A.M.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 

Lawrence  C.  Davis  Geography 

B.S.,  North   Dakota   State  Teachers  College;    M.S.,   University   of 
Chicago 

Albert  E.  Drum  heller  MuMc  Education 

B.S.,  State  Teachers   College,  Indiana,   Pennsylvania;   Ed.M.,   Uni- 
versity of  Pittsburgh 

Gladys  Dunkelberger  Music  Education 

B.M.,  Bethany  College,  Lindsborg,  Kansas;  Mus.M.,  Northwestern 

University 

Lena  Ellenberger  Health  and  Physical  Education 

B.S.,   State   Teachers   College,   Emporia,   Kansas;    A.M.,    Columbia 
University 

Wilber  Emmert  Visual  Education 

A.B.,  Peru,  Nebraska,  State  Teachers  College;  A.M.,  University  of 
Chicago 


Teachkrs   College  Bulletin 


Robert  W.  Ensley  Speech 

A.B.,  Ohio  Wesleyan  University;  A.M.,  Columbia  University 

Martha  C.  Faust  Dean  of  Women 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College;  A.M.,  Syracuse  University 

Clinton  M.  File  Business  Education 

B.S.,    James    Millikin    University;    A.M.,    University    of    Chicago; 
Ed.D.,   New  York   University 

AlMA  MUNSON  Gasslander  Art  Education 

Ph.B.,   Hamline   University;  A.M.,   Columbia  University 

Anna  M.  Gorman  Home  Economics 

B.S.,  Illinois  State  Normal  University,  Normal,  Illinois;  M.S.,  Uni- 
versity of  Wisconsin 

James  R.  Green  English 

B.S.,  Lafayette  College;  A.M.,  Columbia  University 

S.  Trevor  Hadley  Education 

B.S.,  State  Teachers  College,  Indiana,  Pennsylvania;  Ed.M.,  Ed.D., 
University  of  Pittsburgh 

Joseph  K.  Hall  Librarian 

A.B.,  University  of  Kentucky;  B.S.  in  L.S.,  Columbia  University 

Malinda  Hamblen  Health  and  Physical  Education 

A.B.,  Cornell  University;  A.M.,  New  York  University 

Leola  T.  Hayes  Home  Economics 

B.S.,  M.S.  in  Ed.,  Temple  University 

Edna  Hays  English 

A.B.,  Kentucky  Wesleyan  College;  A.M.,  Ph.D.,  Columbia  University 

Ralph  E.  Heiges  Dean  of  Instruction 

A.B.,  Ursinus  College;  A.M.,  Ph.D.,  Columbia  University 

Donald  A.  Hess  Speech 

B.S.,  State  Teachers  College,  Clarion,  Pennsylvania;  Ed.M.,  Penn- 
sylvania State  College 

G.  G.  Hill  Director  of  Business  Education  Department 

A.B.,  Western  Maryland  College;  M.C.Ed.,  Susquehanna  University; 
A.M.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 

Earl  Samuel  Hoenstine  Assistant  Director,  Student  Teaching, 

Placement,  Keith  School 

B.S.,  State  Teachers  College,  Indiana,  Pennsylvania;  Ed.M.,  Pennsyl- 
vania State  College 

Donald  E.  Hoffmaster  Science 

B.S.,  State  Teachers  College,   Slippery  Rock,   Pennsylvania;   M.S., 
Cornell  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  West  Virginia 

Thomas  J.  Hughes  Music  Education 

B.S.,  A.M.,  New  York  University 
B.S.,  Allegheny  College;  A.M.,  Columbia  University 

Mehriix  B.  Jams  Science 

B.S.,  Allegheny  College;  A.M.,  Columbia  University 

C.  M.  Johnson  Social  Studies 

A.B.,   Muskingum   College;    A.M.,   University   of   Chicago 

Marian  Johnson  Kipp  English 

A.B.,  Pennsylvania  College  for  Women;  A.M.,  Columbia  University 

Orval  Kipp  Director  of  Art  Department 

A.B.,  Carnegie  Institute  of  Technology;  A.M.,  Columbia  University; 
Ph.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 


Indiana    Catalogue    NtJMincR 


Jexome  Landsman  Music  Education 

B.M.,  Eastman  School  of  Music;  M.M.,  University  of  California 

ElH-ABETH  H.  LaVelle  Home  Economics 

B.S.,  University  of  Rhode  Island;  M.S..  Pennsylvania  State  Colleg« 

Lucille  J.  Littlefield  Assistant  Librarian 

B.S.,  Simmons  College;  M.S.,  School  of  Library  Service,  Columbia 
University 

Helen  Loftis  Home  Economict 

B.S.,  Winthrop  College;   M.S.,  University  of  Tennessee 

Stanley  W.  Lore  Education 

B.S.,  State  Teachers  College,  Clarion,  Pennsylvania;  Ed.M.,  Ed.D., 
Pennsylvania  State  College 

P.  David  Lott  Keith  School 

B.S.,  State  Teachers  College,  Indiana,  Pennsylvania;  Ed.M.,  Ed.D., 
Pennsylvania  State  College 

Blanche  W.  McCluer  Psychology 

B.S.,  Indiana  State  Teachers  College,  Terre  Haute,  Indiana;  Ed.M., 
Pennsylvania  State  College 

Regis  A.  McKnight  Health  and  Physical  Education 

B.S.,  State  Teachers  College,  Indiana,  Pennsylvania;  A.M.,  Columbia 
University 

Helen  McLean  Keith  School 

B.S.,  A.M.,  Columbia  University 

C.  David  McNaugiiton  Music 

A.B.,    Dickinson    College;    A.M.,    New    York    University;    Diploma 
Juilliard  Graduate  School 

Joy  Mahachek  Mathematics,  Director  of  Secondary 

Education  Division 
A.B.,  Iowa  State  Teachers  College;  A.M.,  Columbia  University; 
Ph.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 

Helen  C.  Merriman  Home  Economies 

B.S.,  Purdue  University;  A.M.,  Columbia  University 

Jane  S.  Mervine  Keith  School 

A.B.,  Hood  College;  A.M.,  University  of  Michigan 

George  P.  Miller  Health  and  Physical  Education 

B.S.,  A.M.,  Columbia  University 

Rachel  Moss  Home  Economics 

B.S.,  University  of  Tennessee;   M.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  College 

Dorothy  Murdock  Art  Education 

B.S.,  A.M.,  Columbia  University 

Arthur  F.  Nicholson  English,  Director  of  Public  Relations 

B.S.,  State  Teachers  College,  Indiana,  Pennsylvania;   Ed.M.,  Penn- 
sylvania State  College 

NiLES  E.  Norman  Keith  School 

B.S.,  State  Teachers  College,  Mansfield,  Pennsylvania;  M.S.,  Buck- 
nell  University;  Ed.D.,  Pennsylvania  State  College 

Mildred  Evelyn  Om^saxe  Home  Economies 

B.S.,  George  Washington  University;   M.S.,  Drexel  Institute 

Anna  O'Toole  Education 

B.S.,   University  of  Pittsburgh;   M.Litt.,   University   of  Pittsburgh 

Kathryn  O'Toole  Keith  School 

A.B.,  Iowa  State  Teachers  College;  A.M.,  Columbia  University 


8  Teachers   College  Bulletin 

Ethyl  Vekna  Oxley  Home  Economics 

A.B.,  Iowa  State  Teachers  College;  A.M.,  Columbia  University 

Elfa  M.  Porte»  Keith  School 

A.B.,  Iowa  State  Teachers  College;  A.M.,  University  of  Iowa 

Daniel  G.  Reiber  Science 

A.B.,  Franklin  and  Marshall  College;  M.S.,  Pennsylvania  State 
College 

Laura  M.  Remsberg  Music  Education 

Teacher  Certificate  in  Voice,  Peabody  Conservatory  of  Music,  Balti- 
more, Maryland 

Ralph  William  Reynolds  Art  Education 

A.B.,  Beloit  College;  A.M.,  University  of  Iowa 

Opal  T.  Rhodes  Director  of  Home  Economics  Departm,ent 

A.B.,  A.M.,  University  of  Illinois;  Ed.D.,  Columbia  University 

Florence  Ridenour  Assistant  Librarian 

A.B.,  Ohio  Northern  University;  B.S.  in  L.S.,  Carnegie  Institute 
of  Technology;  A.M.,  Columbia  University 

Maurice  L.  Rider  English 

B.S.,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Ohio  State  University 

Elsie  Garlow  Rineer  Business  Education 

B.S.,  State  Teachers  College,  Indiana,  Pennsylvania;  Ed.M.,  Uni- 
versity of  Pittsburgh 

Paul  A.  Rishebergeb  Education 

A.B.,  Washington  and  Jefferson  College;  A.M.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 
Pittsburgh 

Adrian  W.  Ruland  Chemistry 

B.S.,  Colgate  University;  M.S.Ed.,  Syracuse  University;  M.S.Chem., 
Ohio  State  University 

Irene  Russell  Director  of  Elementary  Education  Division 

B.S.,  State  Teachers  College,  Lock  Haven,  Pennsylvania;  M.Ed., 
Ed.D.,  Pennsylvania  State  College 

John  R.  Sahli  Social  Studies  and  Keith  School 

A.B.,  Geneva;   M.Ed.,  A.M.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 

Leroy  H.  Schnell  Mathematics,  Venerans'  Counselor 

A.B.,  Albion  College;  A.M.,  University  of  Michigan 

Lewis  H.  Shaffer  Health  and  Physical  Education 

B.S.,  Ohio  University;  Ed.M.,  Pennsylvania  State  College 

Clel  T.  Silvey  Director  of  Music  Education  Department 

A.B.,  University  of  Texas;  A.M.,  Columbia  University;  M.Mus., 
Northwestern  University  School  of  Music;  Ph.D.,  Peabody  College 
for  Teachers;  Dec.Ch.   (Music  Diploma)    E'cole  d'Art,  France 

Fannie  Dee  Smith  Home  Economics 

B.S.,  Murray  State  College;  M.S.,  University  of  Tennessee 

Samuel  G.  Smith  Health  and  Physical  Education 

B.S.,  Waynesburg  College;   M.Ed.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 

DwiGHT  Sollberger  Biology 

B.S.,  State  Teachers  College,  Slippery  Rock,  Pennsylvania;  Ph.D., 
Cornell  University 

Mary  Alice  St.  Clair  Keith  School 

B.S.,  State  Teachers  College,  Indiana,  Pennsylvania;  A.M.,  Columbia 
University 


Indiana    Catalogue    NtrMiirER 


Rhodes  R.  Stabley  English 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College;   A.M.,  Columbia   University;   Ph.D., 
University  of  Pennsylvania 

Margaret  O.  Stewart  English 

A.B.,  A.M.,  University  of  Kentucky 

Lawrence  Stitt  Music  Education 

B.S.,  A.M.,  New  York  University 

James  K.  Stoner  Business  Education 

B.S.,   State   Teachers   College,   Indiana,    Pennsylvania;    A.M.,    Uni- 
versity of  Pittsburgh 

L  L.  Stright  Mathematics 

A.B.,  Allegheny  College;  A.M.,  Cornell  University;  Ph.D.,  Western 
Reserve  University 

Mary  G.  Swarts  Keith  School 

B.S.,  State  Teachers  College,  Shippensburg,  Pennsylvania;   M.Ed., 
University  of  Pittsburgh 

Arvilla  Terrell  MuMc  Education 

A.B.,  Colorado  State  College  of  Education,  Greeley,  Colorado;  M.M. 
Eastman  School  of  Music,  Rochester,  New  York 

Harold  W.  Thomas  Business  Education 

B.S.,  Grove  City  College;   Ed.M.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 

Edgar  J.  Trapp  Art  Education 

B.A.,  M.F.A.,  Carnegie  Institute  of  Technology 

Paul  M.  Waddell  Science 

A.B.,  Bethany  College;  A.M.,  Cornell  University 

Albert  J.  Wahl  Social  Studies 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Lafayette  College;  Ed.D.,  Temple  University 

Florence  Wallace  Social  Studies 

A.B.,    Wellesley   College;    A.M.,   Columbia    University 

Blanche  Waugman  Keith  School,  Art  Education 

B.S.,  State  Teachers  College,  Indiana,  Pennsylvania;  A.M.,  Colum- 
bia University 

Robert  Franklin  Webb  Business  Education 

B.C.S.,   Bowling  Green   Business   University;   A.B.,   Bowling  Green 
College  of  Commerce 

W.  M.  Whitmyre  Social  Studies,  Dean  of  Men 

A.B.,  Syracuse   University;   A.M.,  Harvard   University 

Wynn  York  Music  Education 

B.F.A.,  University  of  Oklahoma;  M.M.,  Eastman  School  of  Music 

Vernon  A.  Zeitler  Science 

B.S.,  State  Teachers  College,  Indiana,  Pennsylvania;   M.Litt.,  Uni- 
versity of  Pittsburgh 

Martha  E.  Zimmerman  Keith  School 

B.S.,  State  Teachers  College,  Indiana,  Pennsylvania;  A.M.,  Columbia 
University 

NoRAH  E.  ZiNK  Geography 

B.S.,  University  of  Utah;  A.M.,  Columbia  University;   Ph.D.,  Uni- 
versity of  Chicago 


10 


Teachers  Collbgk  Bxtlletin 


SUPERVISING  TEACHERS  IN  CO-OPERATING  SCHOOLS 


Alma  Bagley Barnesboro 

Edith  A.  Bowers  __  Punxsutawney 

Sylvia  M.   Breth Clearfield 

Edgar  J.  Brooks Altoona 

William  G.  Buchanan  _  Commodore 

Madge    Burns Kittanning 

Harry  Canfield Indiana 

Marvin   Clark Punxsutawney 

Twila   Claycomb   Sidman 

Alice  Clements Indiana 

Anthony  Cotroneo Heilwood 

Amanda  M.  Covert Butler 

Margaret  Cummins Indiana 

James  E.  Davis Ford  City 

Willard  Dominick Clearfield 

John  C.  Doney Punxsutawney 

Richard  Dryden Butler 

Gerald  Fetterman  _  Punxsutawney 

Noble  V.  Fritz Punxsutawney 

Don  B.  Gibson Butler 

Helen  Glassford Indiana 

Vemer  Hanson Spangler 

Geraldine  Hawxhurst Indiana 

Ethel  Henry Altoona 

Marybelle  Hill Indiana 

Betty  S.  Hunter Indiana 

C.  W.  Johnston Indiana 

Virginia  Joll Indiana 

Martha  Jones Ebensburg 

Rachel  Keck Greensburg 

Madolyn  Keener Greensburg 

W.  Robert  Kline Indiana 

Mary  N.  Klingensmith,  Greensburg 

Hazel   Krouse   Altoona 

Eugene  Kunselman Indiana 

Sara  Louise  LeVan Altoona 


Evelyn  J.  Lockowandt Sidman 

Thalia  Long Indiana 

Virginia  B.  Long  _  Roaring  Spring 

Elizabeth  LowTy Indiana 

J.  A.  Lubold Indiana 

Larue  McCullough Indiana 

Mary  McGregor Indiana 

James  McKelvey Indiana 

Webster  Mahan Twin  Rocks 

Marjorie   Mattem Altoona 

Nova  Mayer Windber 

Idell  Mars Butler 

Melvin  S.  Mitchell  _  Punxsutawsey 
Raymond  W.  Morgan  _  Johnstown 

Elizabeth  Neilsen Portage 

•Galia  Null Greensburg 

Annabelle  Ortner Indiana 

Jean  A.  Painter Kittanning 

Edna   Pifer Punxsutawney 

Margaret  C.  Puff Butler 

Rogers  Rankin Indiana 

Edward  Roncone Butler 

Donald  S.  Schwing  __  Greensburg 

Joseph  Shane Indiana 

Elwood   Sheeder   Indiana 

Stephen   Shuster Greensburg 

Ruth  Sloan Greensburg 

Harold  L.  Sowers Ford  City 

Alma  Stuchell Johnstown 

Crai?  Swauger Indiana 

Gladys  Veitch Indiana 

Gertrude  Walker Indiana 

Gladys  F.  Wille Clymer 

Neal   Williams Greensburg 

Dorothy  M.  Wood  _  Punxsutawney 
I-Iarold  Yoder Altoona 


V^w 


THE  COLLEGE 

GENERi^L 
INFORMATION 

REQUIREMENTS 

FEES 


12  Teachers  College  Bttlletin 

THE  COLLEGE 

AN  INSTITUTION  FOR  TEACHER  EDUCATION 

The  State  Teachers  College  at  Indiana  is  a  state-owned  and  state- 
controlled  institution  devoted  exclusively  to  the  preparation  of  teachers 
for  the  public  schools  of  Pennsylvania.  All  curricula  are  four  years  in 
lengrth,  and  all  lead  to  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Education 
and  the  Provisional  College  Certificate  in  the  field  of  the  student's  elec- 
tion.   The  following  are  offered: 

An  Elementary  Curriculum  designed  primarily  to  prepare  teachers  for 
the  kindergarten  and  grades  one  to  six,  inclusive. 

A   Secondary  Curriculum  designed   primarily   to   prepare   teachers   for 
junior  and  senior  high  schools. 

An  Art  Curriculum  designed  primarily  to  prepare  teachers  and  super- 
visors of  art  in  the  public  schools. 

A  Business  Education  Curriculum  designed  primarily  to  prepare  teachers 
of  commercial  subjects  in  the  public  schools. 

A  Home  Economics  Curriculum  designed  primarily  to  prepare  teachers 
of  home  economics  in  the  public  schools. 

A  Music  Education  Curriculum  designed  primarily  to  prepare  teachers 
and  supervisors  of  music  in  the  public  schools. 

FULFILLING  THE  PURPOSES  OF  THE  COLLEGE 

The  State  Teachers  College  at  Indiana,  Pennsylvania,  recognizes 
the  importance  of  general  education  for  all  students.  The  primary 
function  of  this  college  is  to  prepare  every  student  intellectually,  physi- 
cally, spiritually,  socially  and  professionally  for  adult  life  which  will 
bring  all  of  the  rewards  which  come  from  the  traditional  liberal  educa- 
tion which  marks  institutions  of  higher  learning.  The  college  recognizes 
that  every  teacher,  whether  he  prepares  himself  to  teach  children  in  the 
elementary  grades,  in  the  high  school,  or  in  some  special  field  needs  a 
profound  understanding  of  life  values  which  comes  only  from  broad 
experiences  in  all  areas  of  learning. 

Intellectually 

Every  student  who  attends  Indiana  is  challenged  intellectually  by  a 
competent  staff  in  those  understandings  and  appreciations  which  are  so 
essential  to  the  educated  person.  In  acquiring  competence  in  language 
considerable  emphasis  is  placed  upon  the  importance  of  reading,  writing, 
speaking,  and  listening  in  new  comprehensive  courses  in  Communications 
in  which  each  student  engages.  To  give  the  student  a  rich  background  of 
heritage,  he  studies  the  cultures  of  the  world,  the  history  of  mankind, 
his  music,  his  art  and  his  literature.  Every  student  is  expected  to  know 
something  of  the  physical  world  in  which  he  lives  and  gains  an  insight 
into  this  area  of  learning  through  his  courses  in  the  physical  sciences  and 
the  biological  sciences.    Recognizing  that  appreciations  as  well  as  under- 


Indiana    Catalogue   Numbeu  18 

standings  are  essential  to  the  liberally  educated  person,  all  students 
'Spend  some  time  in  courses  which  deal  with  the  arts,  especially  in  the 
graphic  arts  and  in  music. 

Physically 

The  physical  development  of  students,  although  recognized  by  the 
Greeks  as  essentiaj,  was  for  many  years  considered  of  little  importance 
in  institutions  of  higher  education.  Fortunately  today,  the  mental  and 
physical  health  of  all  college  students  has  been  given  greater  emphasis. 
At  Indiana  an  attempt  has  been  made  to  provide  as  many  opportunities 
as  possible  for  men  students  to  participate  in  some  kind  of  varsity 
athletics.  This  part  of  the  physical  development  program  has  not  been 
extended,  however,  at  the  expense  of  a  broad  physical  activity  program 
in  which  hundreds  of  men  and  women  of  the  college  participate.  Athletics 
have  been  rightfully  considered  as  a  part  of  the  program  for  physical 
development  and  not  as  a  means  of  using  the  special  talents  of  a  re- 
latively few  students  to  provide  advertising  of  questionable  value  for 
the  college. 

Spiritually 

The  State  Teachers  College  at  Indiana  not  only  provides  for  the 
intellectual  and  physical  development  of  a  student,  but  also  em.phasizes 
those  spiritual  values  so  essential  to  a  well  adjusted  personality.  Here 
one  will  find  almost  seven  hundred  students  who  are  enrolled  in  church- 
affiliated  clubs  in  the  town,  three  hundred  students  who  are  in  the 
Y.W.C.A.  and  one  hundred  and  fifty  others  who  are  active  in  the 
Y.M.C.A.  One  will  find  weekly  and  monthly  meetings  of  church  groups, 
morning  watches  at  times  of  religious  holidays,  monthly  vesper  services 
in  which  students  participate  and  religious  exercises  conducted  by  stu- 
dents at  the  weekly  convocations.  One  will  find  an  active  participation 
in  a  religious-emphasis  week  at  which  time  religious  leaders  of  all  faiths 
meet  with  students  in  large  groups  and  in  small  discussion  conferences 
to  consider  problems  of  the  spiritual  life.  Indeed,  spiritual  growth  of 
students  at  a  state  institution  need  not  be  neglected  and  it  is  not  at 
Indiana, 

Socially 

No  less  important  than  the  intellectual  and  physical  development  of 
a  student  is  his  personal  and  social  growth.  At  Indiana  there  are  on 
the  campus  more  than  eighty  student  organizations  through  which 
student  participation  pro\ndes  an  opportunity  for  personal  and  social 
development.  The  primary  function  of  all  these  organizations  is  to 
assure  for  every  student  a  chance  to  develop  to  the  best  of  his  ability 
desirable  personal  and  social  traits. 

Einphasis  is  placed  at  the  college  upon  student  participation  in  the 
administration  of  college  affairs.  Most  men  and  women  students, 
through    dormitory    councils,    make    and    enforce    their    own   rules    and 


14  Teachers   College  Bulletin 

regulations  with  respect  to  their  living  conditions.  The  student  govern- 
ment of  the  college,  through  the  student  council,  recommends  rules  and 
regulations  for  the  administration  of  student  affairs.  All  social  activi- 
ties of  the  college  are  carried  out  through  the  Student  Cooperative 
Association  which  levies  and  collects  the  activity  fee  and  prepares  and 
administers  its  own  budget.  This  Cooperative  Association  finances 
the  college  publications,  the  cultural  life  programs,  the  student  book- 
store, and  student  union  and  other  services  directly  related  to  the 
students'  social  life. 

At  the  present  time  the  college  is  developing  more  fully  its  student 
personnel  program.  Beginning  with  an  orientation  program  in  the 
freshman  year,  which  seeks  to  induct  students  into  college  life  and  social 
life,  this  student  personnel  service  seeks  to  assist  every  student  through- 
out his  college  career.  Better  coordination  is  now  being  sought  among 
the  various  services  of  the  college  which  are  related  to  student  welfare 
such  as  the  instructional  service,  testing  service,  health  service,  clinical 
service,  and  others.  An  advisory  program,  which  provides  a  faculty 
advisor  for  each  student,  guides  effectively  the  personal  and  social 
growth  of  all  students. 

Professionally 

The  main  function  of  the  teachers  college,  however,  is  the  profes- 
sional preparation  of  the  student  for  teaching  in  the  public  schools  of 
the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania,  acquired  through  experiences  in 
professional  education  and  in  the  laboratory  school.  It  is  this  unique 
function  which  Indiana  is  especially  equipped  to  perform.  Every  student 
is  given  a  broad  understanding  of  the  principles  of  child  growth  and 
development,  the  principles  of  learning  and  the  principles  of  teaching. 
No  longer  is  it  belived  that  one  who  knows  his  subject  field  acquires  in 
some  subtle  way  the  techniques  and  skills  necessary  to  teach  others. 
Even  more  important,  however,  is  the  practicum  in  teaching  which  only 
teachers  colleges  have  the  facilities  and  the  staff  to  provide.  On  the 
Indiana  campus,  for  example,  is  one  of  the  most  modern  well-equipped 
and  well-staffed  laboratory  schools  in  the  Commonwealth,  In  this 
school,  which  is  operated  and  administered  exclusively  by  the  college, 
are  350  students  and  14  specially-trained  supervisors  whose  sole  responsi- 
bility it  is  to  initiate  students  in  the  actual  teaching  situation. 

At  Indiana,  there  is  today  a  well-balanced  and  effective  program  for 
the  intellectual,  physical,  spiritual,  social,  and  professional  growth  of 
college  students.  The  unique  function  of  the  teachers  colleges  is  to  be 
found  in  the  professional  preparation  of  students  for  this  is  the  special 
task  of  this  institution  of  high  learning.  Even  though  the  college  does 
provide  a  sound  liberal  education  for  all,  Indiana  is  a  professional  school 
and  it  maintains  the  special  facilities  and  specially-trained  staffs  for 
the  purpose  for  which  it  exists.  Indiana  seeks  not  only  to  provide  a 
general  education  for  all  students  but  thorough  professional  education 
as  well,  for  this  is  the  main  function  of  the  college. 


Indiana   Catalogue   Nttmber  15 

ACCREDITING   AGENCIES 

The  establishment  and  maintenance  of  educational  standards  have 
long  been  fostered  by  regional  and  national  accrediting  associations 
whose  job  it  is  to  study  and  rank  all  institutions  desiring  recognition. 
Any  school  or  college,  therefore,  which  has  the  approval  of  one  of  these 
accrediting  agencies  may  be  assumed  to  have  met  certain  standards  pre- 
scribed by  the  agency  and  hence  to  be  educationally  acceptable  within  the 
limits  of  those  standards.  The  two  acknowledged  accrediting  agencies 
for  institutions  in  this  region  are  the  Middle  States  Association  of  Col- 
leges and  Secondary  Schools  and  the  American  Association  of  Colleges 
for  Teacher  Education.  The  State  Teachers  College  at  Indiana  is  an 
approved  and  fully  accredited  member  of  both  of  these  organizations. 

The  fact  that  this  college  is  a  member  of  these  two  organizations  is 
of  immediate  personal  importance  to  the  individual  student  in  two  ways: 
first,  the  student  may  transfer  college  credits  from  one  approved  insti- 
tution to  another  without  loss  in  case  he  finds  it  necessary  to  change 
colleges;  and  second,  the  student  who  is  a  graduate  of  an  approved  insti- 
tution is  eligible  for  a  better  teaching  position  in  the  secondary  schools. 

HISTORY 

A  State  Normal  School  was  authorized  by  act  of  the  General  As- 
sembly of  1871.  Indiana  was  favored  as  the  site  for  this  institution 
and  the  first  building  was  opened  for  students  May  17,  1875.  The  original 
building  was  named  John  Sutton  Hall,  in  honor  of  the  first  president  of 
the  Board  of  Trustees.  A  continuous  expansion  of  the  physical  plant  and 
surroundings  has  brought  a  fine  campus  into  existence  with  all  the  equip- 
ment necessary  to  carry  on  a  complete  college  program. 

In  April,  1920,  entire  control  and  ownership  of  the  school  passed  to 
the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania.  In  May,  1927,  by  authority  of  the 
General  Assembly,  the  school  became  a  college  with  the  right  to  grant 
degrees,  and  the  name  was  changed  to  the  State  Teachers  College  at 
Indiana,  Pennsylvania.  A  Board  of  Trustees  appointed  by  the  Governor 
of  the  Commonwealth  is  the  official  agency  of  control. 

LOCATION  AND  TRANSPORTATION  FACILITIES 

Indiana  Borough,  the  county  seat  of  Indiana  County,  is  located  in 
the  foothills  of  the  Alleghenies  at  an  elevation  of  about  1,300  feet,  an 
ideal  location  for  cleanliness  and  beauty.  It  is  easily  accessible  by  auto- 
mobile, as  it  is  located  on  the  Benjamin  Franklin  Highway  and  is  con- 
nected with  all  leading  highways  of  the  state  by  excellent  roads. 

The  Edwards  Lakes-to-Sea,  the  Blue  Ridge,  and  the  Hutchinson 
Route  80  Shortway  lines  operate  buses  on  frequent  schedule  to  Pitts- 
burgh. Shortway  buses  also  operate  between  Indiana,  Saltsburg,  Cherry 
Tree,  and  Barnesboro,  with  passenger  service  available  to  all  towns  along 
the  route.  In  addition,  the  Blue  Ridge  line  makes  connections  east  from 
Blairsville  and  Johnstown  via  the  Greyhound  lines.  The  Edwards  Lakes- 
to-Sea  line  goes   north  through  Punxsutawney,   DuBois,   Ridgway,   and 


1€  Teachehs  College  Bulletin 

other  points  to  Buffalo  with  some  connections  on  the  Greyhound  lines. 
The  Harmony  line  makes  connections  with  Johnstown,  Butler,  and  New 
Castle.  Local  bus  companies  provide  service  to  many  nearby  towns.  The 
Hutchinson  lines  make  several  trips  daily  to  and  from  Johnstown. 

Indiana  is  served  by  bus  connections  with  the  main  line  of  the  Penn- 
sylvania Railroad  at  Johnstown  and  Pittsburgh.  Baggage  service  only, 
however,  is  available  in  Indiana. 

CAMPUS 

The  Campus  comprises  46  acres  of  land,  23  of  which  are  in  the  origi- 
nal campus.  In  the  center  of  the  campus  is  an  historic  oak  grove,  about 
which  are  grouped  the  main  buildings,  forming  three  sides  of  a  quad- 
rangle. The  rest  of  the  campus  is  beautified  by  a  careful  distribution  of 
shrubs,  flowers,  and  vines  artistically  arranged. 

BUILDINGS 

John  Sutton  Hall  is  the  largest  building.  In  addition  to  housing 
more  than  500  women  students,  it  contains  the  administrative  offices, 
post  office,  parlors  and  recreation  rooms,  the  President's  apartment,  and 
lounges  for  day  students.  The  ground  floor  contains  the  cooperative 
store,  an  excellent  laundry  and  ironing  room,  a  shampoo  room,  the 
Mademoiselle  room  for  the  use  of  women  students.  > 

Thomas  Sutton  Hall,  erected  in  1903,  an  addition  to  John  Sutton  Hall, 
contains  the  kitchen,  dining  rooms,  and  dietitian's  office  on  the  first 
floor,  and  the  Music  Education  Department  on  the  second  and  third 
floors. 

Clark  Hall,  named  in  honor  of  Justice  Silas  M.  Clark,  a  former  mem- 
ber of  the  Board  of  Trustees,  was  erected  in  1906  on  the  site  of  a  build- 
ing burned  that  year.  It  was  used  as  a  men's  dormitory  until  1924; 
since  that  time  it  has  served  as  a  dormitory  for  women. 

Wilson  Hall  Library  was  erected  in  1893  and  was  named  for  A.  W. 

Wilson,  third  president  of  the  Board  of  Trustees.  It  was  completely 
remodeled  in  1941  and  provides  ample  facilities  for  the  reading  and  study 
essential  to  the  curricula  of  the  college. 

Current  magazines,  newspapers,  reserved  books,  reference  books, 
fiction  A-G,  rental  books,  pamphlets  and  curriculum  materials  are 
located  on  the  first  floor.  Books  on  the  second  floor  and  in  the  basement 
are  on  open  shelves.  Students  have  free  access  to  all  library  books  and 
periodicals  from  which  they  choose  their  recreational  and  educational 
reading. 

Leonard  Hall,  named  for  Jane  E,  Leonard,  for  many  years  pre- 
ceptress of  Indiana  Normal  School,  was  erected  in  1903  as  a  recitation 
building,  and  was  destroyed  by  fire  on  April  14,  1952.  A  new  Leonard 
Hall  is  now  being  constructed  by  the  Pennsylvania  General  State  Author- 
ity. The  new  building  will  contain  classrooms,  laboratories,  faculty 
offices,  and  the  Indiana  Film  Library. 


Indiana    CAXAi.ofitiE    Numukw  17 

David  J.  Waller  Gymnasium  was  completed  in  1928.  It  contains 
two  gymnasiums,  a  fine  swimming  pool,  and  all  the  equipment  that  goes 
to  make  up  an  efficient  physical-education  plant. 

Jean  R.  McElhaney  Hall,  completed  in  1931  houses  the  Art,  Busi- 
ness Education,  and  Home  Economics  departments,  one  entire  floor 
being  given  to  each  department.  This  building,  both  in  appearance  and 
in  equipment  for  efficient  work,  is  recognized  as  one  of  the  finest  educa- 
tional buildings  in  the  state. 

John  S,  Fisher  Auditorium,  completed  in  1939,  has  a  seating  ca- 
pacity of  1600,  and  a  well-equipped  stage  large  enough  to  accommodate 
a  cast  of  100  people.  Its  design  facilitates  the  presentation  of  intimate 
drama  to  a  small  group  or  super-spectacles  to  capacity  audiences.  Light, 
air,  and  sound  may  all  be  mechanically  controlled  by  the  director  of 
any  presentation. 

John  A.  H.  Keith  School,  completed  in  1939,  provides  for  a  com- 
plete elementary  and  junior-high-school  program  for  observation  and 
demonstration.  The  tenth  year  has  been  added  to  the  junior  high  school, 
expanding  it  into  a  four-year  organization.  The  junior  high  school  pro- 
vides for  courses  in  the  following  fields:  academic,  commercial,  home 
economics,  and  industrial  arts.  Facilities  are  provided  for  physical 
education,  a  psychological  clinic,  a  health  clinic,  a  speech  clinic,  a  library, 
and  music  and  art  studios.  A  fine  demonstration  room,  with  seats  for 
160  observers,  is  a  unique  feature  of  the  building. 

Elkin  House  and  six  acres  of  land  were  bought  in  1947.  The  home 
has  been  renovated  and  serves  temporarily  as  quarters  for  classes  in 
English,  social  studies,  and  geography. 

The  Biology  Building,  a  temporary  structure  erected  in  1947,  is 
located  on  Grant  Street.  It  contains  offices,  storage  rooms,  and  three 
classrooms. 

The  College  Lodge  is  an  important  location  in  the  instructional  and 
recreational  life  of  the  college.  Owned  by  students  and  faculty,  the  100 
acx'es  of  wooded  hillside  with  its  rustic  lodge  and  three  shelter  houses, 
not  only  offers  opportunity  for  nature  study  by  science  and  conservation 
classes,  but  is  in  frequent  demand  for  picnics,  meetings,  and  winter 
sports. 

Houses  owned  by  the  College  and  bordering  the  campus  are  occu- 
pied principally  as  dormitories  by  men. 

Catawba  House  located  at  the  corner  of  Maple  Street  and  College 
Avenue  temporarily  houses  laboratories  and  classrooms  for  classes  in 
physical  science  and  chemistry. 

Shawanese  House  located  at  430  South  Eleventh  Street  temporarily 
houses  the  Speech  and  Reading  Clinics  and  provides  classrooms  for 
mathematics  and  speech  groups. 


18  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

Whitmyre  Hall,  named  for  Walter  Murray  Whitmyre,  dean  of  men 
at  the  college  for  the  past  thirty-six  years,  was  completed  in  1952.  The 
dormitory  houses  220  men  students,  recreational  rooms,  music  practice 
rooms,  the  dean  of  men's  apartment,  and  the  Student  Union  which  is  a 
coeducational  recreation  center. 

The  Greenhouse  of  the  College  is  used  as  an  experimental  and  dem- 
onstration laboratory  by  the  Science  Department  in  the  conducting  of 
biology  courses. 

The  College  Infirmary  is  located  at  406  South  Eleventh  Street.  (See 
page  18). 

Louise  Stanley  and  Ellen  Richards  Houses,  located  on  South  Elev- 
enth Street,  are  used  by  the  home  economics  department  for  senior  stu- 
dents in  that  department  in  participating  in  practical  home  manage- 
ment problems  based  on  actual  family  needs  and  expenditures. 

Activities  House  on  Grant  Street  is  comfortably  furnished  and 
has  convenient  kitchen  facilities.  Small  groups  of  30  to  40  students  use 
it  frequently  for  both  formal  and  informal  social  gatherings. 

The  College  Cafeteria  is  located  northwest  of  the  Elkin  House.  The 
home  economics  department  school  lunchroom  management  class  pre- 
pares and  serves  lunches  in  the  Cafeteria  five  days  each  week  to  the 
pupils  of  the  Keith  School,  the  college  faculty,  and  community  students. 

Memorial  Athletics  Field,  developed  in  1949  as  a  memorial  to  stu- 
dents and  alumni  who  served  their  country  in  World  War  II,  is  located 
south  of  the  main  campus  off  Grant  Street.  This  field  seating  five  thous- 
and persons  is  the  site  of  intercollegiate  football  and  baseball  games. 
Three  other  athletic  fields  about  the  campus,  including  a  new  area  ac- 
quired in  1950  off  S.  Eleventh  Street  near  the  Glassworks,  provides  space 
for  soccer,  field  hockey,  and  other  outdoor  sports  activities.  There  are 
also  six  tennis  courts  available  for  student  use. 

R.O.T.C.  House  on  College  Avenue  below  the  Greenhouse  is  the 
Headquarters  for  the  Army  R.O.T.C.  at  Indiana. 

Student  Union,  a  coeducational  recreation  center,  is  located  in  the 
south  wing,  first  floor  of  Whitmyre  Hall  and  contains  a  snack  bar,  dance 
floor,  and  other  recreational  facilities. 


Indiana    Catai.ooue   Nuthber  19 

GENERAL  INFORMATION 

NEW  STUDENTS 

Preliminary.  The  prospective  student  should  send  to  the  Re^strar, 
State  Teachers  College,  Indiana,  Pennsylvania,  for  an  application  blank 
for  entrance  into  the  College.  This  blank  should  be  properly  filled  out 
and  returned  with  his  advance  deposit  of  $10.00,  payable  by  check  or 
money  order.  This  deposit  is  credited  on  the  following  semester's  con- 
tingent fee. 

Advance  deposits  may  be  returned  to  students,  provided  three  weeks 
before  the  opening  of  the  semester  they  notify  the  College  of  their 
intention  not  to  attend,  and  provided  the  request  for  a  refund  is  ap- 
proved by  the  Board  of  Trustees  and  the  Department  of  Revenue.  See 
page  39. 

Freshmen  Dormitory  and  Room  Assignments.  A  section  of  John 
Sutton  Hall  has  been  designated  Freshmen  Dormitory  for  women.  After 
that  space  is  filled,  freshmen  will  be  placed  as  space  is  available.  Rooms 
and  roommates  are  not  assigned  until  applications  have  been  approved 
by  the  Committee  on  Admissions. 

A  very  few  rooms  have  running  water,  for  which  there  is  an  extra 
charge  of  $.50  per  week  for  each  person.  Requests  should  be  made  for 
such  rooms,  and  assignments  are  made  in  order  of  requests. 

Names  of  roommates  will  not  be  released  until  students  arrive. 
Therefore,  students  are  urged  not  to  plan  draperies  and  furnishings 
until  after  arrival  so  that  both  roommates  may  have  a  part  in  the  plan- 
ning. 

First  year  and  other  new  men  students  who  reside  at  the  College  are 
assigned  to  quarters  in  Whitmyre  Hall.  Roommates  are  by  choice  or 
assignment.    Draperies  and  other  furnishings  are  provided. 

In  order  to  facilitate  registration  of  new  students,  the  dormitories 
will  be  open  the  afternoon  before  the  date  set  for  registration.  Informa- 
tion concerning  registration  and  Freshman  Week  will  be  mailed  to 
each  student  about  ten  days  before  the  opening  of  college. 

Student  Supplies.  Students  who  live  in  college  dormitories  are  fur- 
nished bed  linen  and  bedspreads.  Each  student  must  provide  blankets, 
towels,  window  curtains  or  draperies,  soap,  needed  toilet  articles,  etc. 
Plastic  draperies  are  recommended  rather  than  paper  draperies  which 
present  a  fire  hazard.  Curtains  and  draperies  are  provided  in  Whitmyre 
Hall. 

Students  must  also  furnish  their  own  gymnasium  attire  and  towels. 
The  Physical  Educational  Department  requires  regulation  gymnasium 
and  pool  equipment,  which  can  be  purchased  in  the  College  Book  Store  at 
a  saving  to  students.  The  required  costume  for  men  costs  about  $6.00. 
The  cost  for  women  is  a  little  higher. 


20  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

Each  student  is  required  to  own  a  good  college  dictionary,  approved 
by  the  English  Department.  Such  a  dictionary  costs  about  $5.00  and  can 
be  purchased  in  the  College  Book  Store.  Core  courses  in  English  require 
the  dictionary  as  a  standard  text;  other  college  courses  use  it  extensively. 

Baggage.  All  baggage  is  delivered  to  the  basement  of  John  Sutton 
Hall  or  Whitmyre  Hall,  and  porters  transfer  it  directly  to  the  students' 
rooms.  Luggage  should  be  plainly  marked  with  the  student's  name  and, 
if  the  room  assignment  has  been  made,  should  also  bear  the  room 
number.  Students  living  in  college  houses  should  mark  their  baggage 
with  the  street  address;  the  college  truck  will  deliver  baggage  to  the 
rooming  place. 

The  Handbook.  The  Student  Council  publishes  a  handbook  which 
is  given  to  all  students  This  handbook  contains  information  concerning 
the  college  set-up  and  routine  and  is  a  great  help  to  new  students. 

Office  Hours.  Monday  through  Friday:  8:00  A.  M.  to  12:00  Noon; 
1:00  P.  M.  to  5:00  P.  M.  Saturdays:  8:00  A.  M.  to  12:00  Noon.  Offices 
are  not  open  Saturday  afternoons  and  Sundays.  Offices  close  at  4  P.  M. 
in  June,  July  and  August. 

Library  Hours.  Monday  through  Friday:  7:45  A.  M.  to  5:00  P.  M.; 
7:00  P.  M.  to  9:00  P.  M.  Saturday  7:45  A.  M.  to  5:00  P.  M,  Sunday: 
2:30  P.  M.  to  5:00  P.  M. 

BOARDING  STUDENTS 

The  State  Teachers  College  at  Indiana  is  primarily  a  dormitory 
school.  All  women  students  except  those  living  with  parents  or  near 
relatives  and  those  who  work  in  approved  private  homes  for  room  and 
board  must  live  in  the  dormitories  which  are  under  adult  supervision. 

Men  students  room  in  Whitmyre  Hall,  fraternity  houses  or  in  private 
homes  approved  by  the  College  All  freshmen  living  in  college  property 
must  take  their  meals  in  the  college  dining  room  although  upperclassmen 
are  permitted  a  choice  of  taking  meals  in  town  or  in  the  college  dining 
room. 

Yacatioii  and  Guest  Charges.  Students  do  not  remain  at  the  college 
during  Thanksgiving,  Christmas,  Easter,  or  summer  vacation.  Students 
and  teachers  are  responsible  for  meals  of  their  guests  at  current  tran- 
sient rates.  The  transient  rate  for  meals  is  as  follows:  breakfast,  50 
cents;  lunch,  75  cents;  dinner,  one  dollar. 

A  charge  of  50  cents  is  made  for  overnight  guests.  Arrangements 
should  be  made  with  the  House  Director,  or  Dean  of  Women,  or  Dean  of 
Men,  depending  on  the  dormitory  involved. 

Fire  Precautions.  Students  are  not  permitted  to  use  or  to  have 
stoves,  electric  irons,  heaters  or  cookers,  or  other  equipment  for  pro- 
ducing fire  or  heat  in  their  rooms.  Such  equipment  is  prohibited  by 
fire  regulations  and  will  be  removed  and  confiscated  by  the  fire  inspector. 


Indiana    Catalogue   Number  21 

Smoking  in  dormitory  rooms  is  absolutely  forbidden,  due  to  the  fire 
hazard.  Radios  are  permitted  but  must  be  approved  by  the  college  elec- 
trician. Extension  cords  are  not  allowed,  and  double  sockets  only  as  ap- 
proved by  the  electrician. 

Laundry.  The  laundry  of  all  boarding  students,  to  the  extent  of 
ten  plain  pieces  per  week,  plus  towels  and  napkins,  is  done  in  the  col- 
lege laundry.  All  pieces  sent  to  the  laundry  must  be  plainly  marked 
with  the  owner's  name  either  written  in  indelible  ink  or  by  sewed-on 
name  tapes.  Cash's  name  tapes  may  be  ordered  in  department  stores, 
or  mail  orders  may  be  sent  direct  to  the  Sterling  Name  Tape  Co.,  Win- 
sted.  Conn.    Charges  are  nominal. 

An  excellent  laundry  and  ironing  room  with  modern  equipment  is 
maintained  on  the  ground  floor  of  John  Sutton  Hall  for  the  free  use  of 
women  students. 

Upperclass  Room  Assignments.  Up  to  May  1,  those  students  who 
have  paid  the  advance  deposit  of  $10.00  will  have  rooms  assigned  to 
them  as  follows:  If  they  desire  to  keep  the  rooms  they  have,  these 
rooms  are  reassigned  to  them,  unless  for  some  reason  it  is  felt  wise  or 
necessary  to  withdraw  students  from  said  rooms.  As  soon  after  May  1  as 
possible,  the  remaining  rooms  are  chosen  by  lot.  Only  students  who 
have  paid  the  room-reservation  deposit  may  reserve  a  room  for  the  fol- 
lowing year.  Otherwise,  their  assignment  to  a  room  is  cancelled  and 
they  take  a  place  on  the  list  of  entering  students. 

College  Infirmary.  At  406  South  11th  Street  is  located  the  infirmary 
which  is  thoroughly  equipped  for  all  routine  work.  Two  registered 
nurses  are  always  on  duty.  Medical  service  is  provided  by  a  physician 
who  comes  daily  to  the  infirmary.  Twelve  beds  are  available  where 
resident  students  may  have  three  days'  free  hospitalization.  A  fee  of 
$1.00  is  charged  for  each  day  after  that.  Commuting  students  are  given 
free  dispensary  service  and  may  be  admitted  to  the  infirmary  for 
emergency  hospitalization,  for  which  a  fee  of  $2.00  per  day  from  the 
first  day  is  charged.  Free  dispensary  service  is  available  to  students 
in  clinics  conducted  in  the  infirmary  and  in  the  Keith  School. 

Chest  X-Rays.  For  several  years  the  State  Health  Department  has 
given  chest  X-rays  to  all  freshmen  and  seniors  free  of  charge.  This 
service  has  been  an  important  step  in  controlling  and  preventing  tuber- 
culosis in  the  State. 

Dormitory  Life.  General  supervision  of  the  personal  and  social  wel- 
fare of  women  students  is  exercised  by  the  Dean  of  Women  and  head 
residents.  Student  body,  faculty,  and  administration  cooperate  to  main- 
tain high  standards  of  social  life  and  conduct.  Privileges  are  granted 
according  to  official  class  ratings  based  on  scholastic  achievement.  Re- 
strictions which  are  put  upon  the  freedom  of  students  are  felt  to  be 
necessary  for  successful  study  and  living  conditions  and  for  the  well- 
being  of  the  g^roup. 


22  Teachebs  College  Bulletin 

Enrollment  in  the  College  implies  an  agreement  on  the  part  of  each 
student  to  comply  with  the  customs  of  the  College  and  to  obey  the  regu- 
lations. 

Participation  in  dormitory  government  is  vested  in  the  Women's 
Collegiate  Association,  of  which  all  resident  women  are  automatically 
members.  Representatives  from  each  living  unit  make  up  the  Council, 
which  serves  as  a  clearing  house  for  discussing  difficulties  and  making 
recommendations  concerning  dormitory  problems.  A  Judicial  Board  ad- 
ministers and  enforces  association  regulations. 

Men's  Dormitory  and  Houses  are  under  the  leadership  of  student 
house  heads  responsible  to  the  Dean  of  Men.  Some  men  may  find  it  nec- 
essary to  live  in  private  homes.  Men  students  are  expected  to  abide  by 
the  rules  and  regulations  of  the  College.  A  Men's  Council  assists  the 
Dean  of  Men  in  effecting  orderly  procedures  in  resident  living. 

DAY  STUDENTS 

Women  students  are  not  permitted  to  room  or  board  with  private 
families  who  are  not  immediate  relatives,  unless  they  are  working  for 
room  and  board.  Exceptions  from  these  regulations  must  have  the 
approval  of  the  President  in  advance  of  registration  or  loss  of  credit 
will  result. 

Accommodations  for  day  women  students  are  provided  in  John 
Sutton  Hall.  Similar  quarters  for  men  day  students  are  located  in 
Whitmyre  Hall.  Library  facilities  provide  pleasant  study  conditions  for 
non-resident  students.  Students  through  their  House  Committee  assume 
responsibility  for  care  and  use  of  rooms  set  aside  for  them.  Day  stu- 
dents may  purchase  lunches  in  the  College  Cafeteria  or  Student  Union. 

RESERVE  OFFICERS'  TRAINING   CORPS 

The  United  States  Army  has  in  operation  a  unit  of  the  Reserve 
Officers  Training  Corps  at  the  College.  Male  students  may  enroll  in 
their  freshman  year  and  upon  graduation  from  the  regular  College 
Course  and  the  Reserve  Officers  Training  Corps  program  receive  a  Sec- 
ond Lieutenant's  commission  in  the  United  States  Army  Officers  Re- 
serve Corps.  College  credit  for  this  training  is  given  in  lieu  of  credit 
for  Physical  Education.  To  make  this  program  possible,  deferments 
from  the  draft  are  issued  to  the  students  successfully  meeting  the  Col- 
lege and  ROTC  requirements.  Upon  graduation,  the  former  student 
goes  into  the  Army  as  an  officer  for  a  period  of  two  years,  if  called  by 
the  Secretary  of  the  Army.  This  enables  the  student  to  obtain  his  Col- 
lege degree  and  then  fulfill  his  obligation  to  his  country. 

ADVISORY  SYSTEM 

Purpose  of  the  advisory  system  is  to  assist  the  student  in  his  orienta- 
tion to  college  life.  Each  student  is  assigned  to  a  faculty  adviser  who 
confers  with  him  relative  to  his  program,  his  activities,  his  academic 
work,  the  evaluation  of  his  progress  and  his  education  in  values.     At 


Indiana   Catalogue  Number  23 

mid-semester  teachers  make  reports  of  unsatisfactory  work  to  student's 
adviser.  The  adviser  consults  with  the  student  reported  with  the  thought 
of  assisting  him  to  improve  his  status  by  the  end  of  the  semester. 

SPECIAL  CLINICS 

Three  clinics  at  the  college  offer  diagnostic  testing  and  remedial 
services  in  the  following  areas: 

Psycho-Education  Bureau — personal,  vocational,  and  educational 
counseling,  and  diagnosis  of  academic  and  behavior  prob- 
lems. 

Reading  Clinic — diagnosis  and  remedial  programs  for  reading 
disabilities. 

Speech  Clinic — diagnosis  and  remedial  programs  for  the  speech 
handicapped. 

These  services  are  made  available  to  the  students  regularly  enrolled 
at  the  college  as  well  as  to  supervisory  officials  and  classroom  teachers 
in  the  college  service  area  without  charge.  College  students  who  need 
help  in  any  of  the  problem  areas  suggested  above  are  encouraged  to 
seek  the  help  of  the  clinic  concerned.  Every  effort  is  made  to  help 
students  remove  deficiencies  which  would  interfere  with  their  successful 
progress  in  college, 

GRADE  REPORTS 

About  a  week  after  each  semester  or  summer  session  a  full  report 
is  given  or  mailed  to  every  student.  Parents  do  not  receive  reports  as 
it  is  assumed  that  college  students  are  sufficiently  mature  and  trust- 
worthy to  report  the  facts  to  their  parents.  Students  who  have  not 
reached  this  state  of  maturity  and  integrity  would  seem  to  lack  quali- 
ties highly  desirable  in  prospective  teachers. 

COMMENCEMENT 

Alumni  Day.  Each  year  the  Commencement  season  is  started  with 
a  day  devoted  to  the  Alumni  of  the  college.  During  this  day  the  Seniors 
who  will  be  graduating  are  accepted  as  members  into  the  Alumni  Asso- 
ciation at  their  regular  meeting  at  that  time  of  the  year.  Other  matters 
of  importance  to  the  Alumni  are  also  considered  at  this  meeting  as  well 
as  the  election  of  officers  for  the  ensuing  year.  At  noon  an  Alumni 
luncheon  is  served  at  which  time  a  member  of  the  Association  addresses 
the  group  and  reunion  classes  are  honored.  During  the  afternoon,  class 
meetings  and  reunions  are  held;  in  the  evening  there  is  a  dance  and  other 
forms  of  entertainment  for  the  Seniors,  their  guests,  and  Alumni. 

Baccalaureate.  On  the  Sunday  of  Commencement  week  end,  at  4:00 
p.  m,  the  Seniors  and  their  guests  join  in  the  Baccalaureate  services  in 
Fisher  Auditorium,  A  guest  speaker  addresses  the  group  and  special 
music  is  provided  by  the  Music  Department  of  the  college. 

Commencement  Exercises.  On  the  concluding  day  on  Commencement 
season  the  academic  exercises   of  graduation  are   observed.     An  out- 


24  Teachers   College  Bulletin 

standing  speaker  is  procured  to  talk  to  those  attending  the  exercises; 
and  in  turn,  degrees  are  conferred  upon  the  graduates  of  the  various  de- 
partments of  the  college,  along  with  commissions  being  conferred  upon 
those  who  have  completed  their  work  in  the  Reserve  Officers  Training 
Corps.  The  Commencement  Exercises  are  followed  by  the  last  activity 
of  the  season,  a  Commencement  Dinner  at  noon. 

ALUMNI 

Number.  Since  its  founding,  Indiana  has  graduated  approximately 
16,000  students  from  its  various  curricula.  Approximately  5,700  degrees 
have  been  granted  since  the  school  became  a  college  in  1927.  The  sup- 
port of  these  alumni  has  been  an  important  factor  in  the  consistent 
growth  of  the  college. 

Alumni  Association.  Indiana  has  a  strong  Alumni  Association. 
Organized  units  are  active  in  many  sections  of  Pennsylvania.  There 
are  also  units  in  New  York,  Michigan,  and  the  District  of  Columbia. 
The  Alumni  Association  inaugurated  a  publications  program  in  the  Fall 
of  1949  and  alumni  bulletins  are  now  published  biannually.  The  bulletins 
are  sent  to  members  of  Alumni  Units.  Graduates  living  in  areas  where 
there  are  no  Alumni  Units  may  secure  the  bulletins  by  sending  their 
dues  directly  to  the  Alumni  Office  at  the  college.  A  Life  Membership 
Plan  was  also  adopted  in  1949. 

The  Executive  Council,  made  up  of  the  officers  of  the  Association 
and  delegates  from  the  local  units,  meets  twice  a  year  and  the  General 
Alumni  Association  has  one  meeting  a  year — on  Alumni  Day  in  May. 

Recent  gifts  of  the  Alumni  Association  to  the  college  include  the 
Moller  Pipe  Organ  in  John  S.  Fisher  Auditorium;  furniture  for  East 
Porch,  John  Sutton  Hall;  furniture  and  furnishings  for  a  college  guest 
room;  three  RCA  television  sets;  a  public  address  system  for  John  S. 
Fisher  auditorium,  and  water  coolers  for  the  library,  gymnasium,  and 
infirmary.  The  association  also  furnished  and  equipped  the  Alumni 
Office. 

The  Alumni  Office  is  prepared  to  give  information  relative  to  all 
activities  of  the  association. 

PLACEMENT  SERVICE 

The  services  of  the  Placement  Bureau  are  available  to  all  students 
of  the  College  who  receive  certification.  The  directors  of  the  various 
departments  take  an  active  interest  in  the  placement  of  their  graduates. 
Coordination  of  effort  is  secured  through  a  central  committee.  The 
bureau  supplies  credentials  to  employers  who  are  seeking  applicants  for 
positions  and  serves  as  a  center  where  graduates  may  keen  their  records 
up-to-date.  Alumni  are  using  the  bureau  increasingly.  Teaching  posi- 
tions are  not  guaranteed  by  the  College,  but  Indiana's  record  of  place- 
ment is  one  of  the  very  best  in  Pennsylvania. 

STUDENT  ORGANIZATIONS  AND  ACTIVITIES 

In  order  that  students  may  have  opportunities  to  develop  their  own 
avocational  interests  and  desirable  qualities  of  leadership,  initiative,  and 
cooperation,  the  College  sponsors  a  variety  of  student  organizations. 


Indiana    Catalogue    Number  26 

STUDENT  PARTICIPATION  IN  COLLEGE  ADMINISTRATION 

Student  Council.  The  Student  Council  cooperates  with  the  admin- 
istration in  the  consideration  of  college  problems  which  pertain  to  schol- 
arship, school  life,  community  relationships  and  professional  develop- 
ment. The  Student  Council  is  active  in  recommending  changes  of  policy 
to  the  administration  and  improving  student  life  in  general. 

Student  Cooperative  Association.  Each  student  enrolled  in  college 
pays,  along  with  other  fees,  an  Activity  Fee  of  $15.00  a  semester.  This 
money,  together  with  the  profits  made  from  the  operation  of  the  Cooper- 
ative Bookstore,  is  used  to  finance  the  Student  Cooperative  Association. 

The  activities  of  this  organization  are  extremely  broad  and  have  a 
great  influence  on  the  college  life  of  the  student  body.  In  general  a 
student  is  entitled  to  participate  in  the  variety  of  activities  provided  by 
the  Association  through  the  use  of  his  "I"  card  which  is  issued  upon 
payment  of  the  Activity  Fee. 

All  students  are  entitled  to  attend  college  athletic  contests,  receive 
the  weekly  college  paper  "The  Indiana  Penn,"  a  copy  of  the  college 
annual  "The  Oak,"  attend  all-college  dances  with  music  furnished  by  an 
orchestra,  parties  which  are  held  each  Saturday  evening  as  well  as  the 
dances  conducted  for  an  hour  after  dinner  on  Tuesday  and  Thursday. 
Funds  from  the  Association  are  provided  to  secure  programs  for  the 
weekly  college  convocations,  motion  pictures  twice  monthly,  and  also  pro- 
vide the  student  body  with  an  active  intramural  program  of  athletics. 

The  Cultural  Life  Series,  sponsored  by  the  College  Student  Co- 
operative Association,  brings  to  the  campus  outstanding  professional 
leaders   in   the   fields   of   music,   the   dance,   and   contemporary   affairs. 

During  the  college  year  1952-1953  this  committee  presented  Charles 
L.  Wagner's  production  of  Bizet's  Carmen,  Ted  Shawn  and  the  Jacob's 
Pillow  Dance  Festival,  and  the  Robert  Shaw  Chorale  and  Orchestra  and 
lectures. 

Each  year  the  Religious  Life  Committee  sponsors  a  week  devoted 
to  the  emphasis  of  religion  and  all  different  religious  groups  represented 
on  the  campus.  Outstanding  leaders  in  various  religious  groups  are 
brought  to  the  campus  and  help  conduct  the  program  outlined  for  this 
special  occasion. 

The  finances  of  the  Student  Cooperative  Association  are  admin- 
istered by  a  Finance  Committee  appointed  jointly  by  the  President 
of  the  College  and  the  Student  Council. 

Women's  Collegiate  Association.  This  organization,  composed  of  all 
women  boarding  students,  aids  in  directing  the  affairs  of  women  students 
who  live  in  College  property. 

Men's  Student  League.  This  group,  made  up  of  all  the  men  students, 
cooperates  with  the  administration  in  managing  the  affairs  of  men 
students. 

Non-Resident  Student  League.  This  organization  promotes  social 
contacts  and  activities  of  non-resident  women  students. 


26  Teachers   College  Bulletin 

RELIGIOUS  ORGANIZATIONS 

Although  the  College  is  non-denominational,  its  authorities  aim  to 
make  it  a  place  of  positive  religious  influence.  Students  are  encouraged 
to  attend  the  churches  of  their  choice  on  Sunday  and  to  join  the  church 
clubs  which  offer  opportunities  for  discussion  and  participation  in  re- 
ligious programs.  During  the  year  the  College  Vesper  programs  give 
the  opportunity  for  the  students  to  hear  some  of  the  outstanding 
religious  leaders  of  the  country. 

Through  the  YWCA,  the  YMCA  and  church  clubs,  students  are 
afforded  other  avenues  for  experience  in  Christian  living.  These  take 
the  form  of  religious  meetings,  social  functions,  and  opportunities  for 
community  service.  Attendance  at  area  and  regional  conferences  and  the 
Student  Christian  Movement  provide  opportunities  for  studying  state, 
national  and  world  religious  problems.  Another  opportunity  for  re- 
ligious participation  is  given  in  a  special  Spiritual  Enrichment  Program 
which  extends  over  several  days.  Speakers  and  counselors  from  different 
denominations  speak  during  this  time  and  aid  students  in  individual 
and  group  conferences. 

DEPARTMENTAL  GROUPS 
The  Art  Department  sponsors  the  Art  Club  to  stimulate  interest 
in  art  in  the  College  community.  Membership  is  open  to  all  interested 
persons.  The  College  Annual,  "The  Oak,"  the  Art  Education  Conference, 
and  the  Annual  Cooperative  Exhibition  are  sponsored  by  the  department 
and  are  supported  financially  by  the  Student  Cooperative  Association. 
Art  students  lend  their  talents  freely  to  many  other  campus  activities. 

The  Department  of  Business  Education  provides  for  its  students  an 
organization  called  the  Junior  Chamber  of  Commerce.  This  organization 
has  for  its  objectives  the  social  and  professional  development  of  the 
students  within  the  department.  The  professional  meetings  are  held 
twice  a  year  at  which  time  outstanding  leaders  in  business  and  business 
education  are  invited  to  the  campus  to  discuss  with  the  students  problems 
relative  to  these  fields. 

Each  fall  a  Business  Institute  is  held.  At  this  time  representatives 
of  business  firms  meet  on  the  Campus  to  discuss  and  demonstrate  to  the 
members  of  the  Business  Education  Department  up-to-date  business 
practices.  Each  spring  a  Merchandise  Fair  is  staged  in  the  college 
gymnasium,  affording  the  merchants  of  the  community  a  chance  to 
display  their  merchandise,  and  giving  the  students  of  the  Department 
of  Business  Education  valuable  business  contacts  and  practice  in  ar- 
ranging merchandise  displays. 

The  Division  of  Elementary  Education  sponsors  a  local  branch  of 
the  Association  for  Childhood  Education  International.  All  the  students 
of  the  division  become  members  of  this  organization  which  has  for  its 
purpose. 

To  work  for  the  education  and  well-being  of  children; 

To  promote  desirable  conditions,  programs  and  practices  in  the 
schools  -  nursery  through  the  elementary; 


Indiana   Catalogue  Number  27 

To  raise  the  standard  of  ixreparation  and  to  encourage  continued 
professional  growth  of  teachers  and  leaders  in  this  field; 

To  bring  into  active  cooperation  all  groups  concerned  with  children 
in  the  school,  the  home  and  the  community; 

To  inform  the  public  of  the  needs  of  children  and  how  the  school 
program  must  be  adjusted  to  fit  those  needs. 

A  student  planned  professional  and  social  program  helps  the  mem- 
bers of  the  organization  to  achieve  the  purpose  of  the  ACEI. 

The  English  and  Speech  Department  sponsors  three  campus  pub- 
lications, all  of  which  are  underwritten  financially  by  the  Student  Co- 
operative Association:  "The  Indiana  Penn,"  weekly  newspaper;  "The 
Indiana  Student  Writes,"  annual  collection  of  student  creative  writing; 
and  "The  Cue,"  the  student  handbook.  Advisory  responsibility  of  a  lit- 
erary nature  is  also  assumed  by  the  Department  for  "The  Oak,"  the 
college  annual.  The  Speech  wing  of  the  Department  sponsors  two  organ- 
izations: "Masquers,"  an  all-college  group  devoted  to  drama  and  the 
allied  arts,  and  Sigma  Alpha  Eta,  national  professional  fraternity  for 
college  students  interested  in  speech  correction  and  hearing.  The 
English-Speech  Club,  whose  membership  includes  all  persons  seeking 
certification  in  English  and  speech,  holds  a  social-professional  meeting 
once  each  semester  at  the  College  Lodge. 

The  Geography  Department  sponsors  the  Alpha  Omega  Gamma 
Fraternitj',  a  selected  group  of  outstanding  geography  majors,  which 
furthers  professional  work  and  social  contacts  in  the  field. 

The  Home  Economics  Department  sponsors  a  Freshman  and  an 
upper  class  Home  Economics  Club.  Both  are  affiliated  with  the  Pennsyl- 
vania and  the  American  Home  Economics  Association.  Delegates  are 
sent  to  the  regional  workshop  and  to  state  and  national  conventions. 
Every  department  major  joins  and  works  in  the  clubs  as  a  preparation 
for  her  responsibility  with  Future  Homemakers  of  America  Clubs 
when  teaching.  Through  club  work  each  major  gains  experience  in  pro- 
fessional, social  and  leadership  respcnsibilities  in  organization  work. 
Merry-go,  other  social  activities  and  fun  raising  experiences  prepare 
members  for  many  out-of-class  advisory ^responsibilities  home  economics 
high  school  teachers  are  asked  to  assume. 

The  Music  Department  sponsors  only  one  group  exclusively  for 
students  majoring  in  Music,  the  Music  Educators  Club.  All  other  ac- 
tivities exist  for  any  college  student  who  is  interested  and  sufficiently 
capable.  If  a  student  cannot  meet  the  rather  exacting  requirements  for 
college  choir  he  can  be  in  one  of  the  glee  clubs.  Likwise,  where  a 
student  cannot  qualify  for  the  more  advanced  instrumental  organiza- 
tions (College  Symphony,  String  Orchestra,  or  Symphonic  Band)  he  may 
get  desired  experience  through  membership  in  the  beginning  orchestra, 
band,  and  instrumental  workshop. 

The  Science  Department  sponsors  the  Science  Club,  an  all-college 
club  for  those  interested  in  Science.  Membership  includes  students  from 
practically  all  departments  of  the  college,  though  naturally  the  Science 


28  Teachers  College  Bullbtin 

Department  is  more  strongly  represented  than  any  other  department. 
Meetings  are  held  on  the  second  and  fourth  Mondays  of  the  month  with 
the  program  provided  by  local  talent  or  speakers  from  the  outside. 
Outings  and  special  trips  as  well  as  reports  on  special  projects  are 
included  in  the  activities. 

The  Division  of  Secondary  Education  sponsors  the  Secondary  Educa- 
tion Club  which  provides  opportunities  for  students  of  the  Division  to 
become  acquainted  with  current  activities  in  modern  high  schools,  to 
become  familiar  with  areas  outside  those  of  their  own  specialization,  to 
organize  and  participate  in  club  activities  similar  to  those  carried  on  in 
high  schools,  and  to  enjoy  social  meetings  of  the  entire  group. 

The  Social  Studies  Department  sponsors  the  Inter-Collegiate  Con- 
ference on  Government,  which  studies  state  and  national  problems  and 
discusses  these  at  a  state  meeting  at  Harrisburg;  and  the  International 
Relations  Club,  which  provides  an  opportunity  for  understanding  and 
discussing  world  affairs.  The  club  is  sponsored  by  the  Carnegie  Founda- 
tion for  Universal  Peace  and  sends  each  year  delegates  to  the  Middle 
States  Regional  Conference. 

The  Physical  Education  Department  encourages  the  formation  of 
sports  clubs  for  those  students  that  are  interested  in  a  particular  sport. 

Men's  Varsity  "I".  The  Varsity  "I"  Club  is  made  up  of  members 
who  have  the  distinction  of  winning  at  least  one  varsity  "I"  letter.  The 
chief  purpose  of  the  club  is  to  promote  and  foster  good  fellowship, 
sportsmanship,  and  a  friendly  feeling  of  cooperation  among  the  athletes 
of  this  and  rival  colleges. 

Women's  Varsity  "I".  This  group  is  composed  of  girls  who  have 
shown  by  participation,  an  interest  in  athletics.  It  organizes  intra-mural 
activities  for  girls,  supplies  sport  managers,  keeps  records  of  all  candi- 
dates for  awards  and  promotes  extra-college  and  professional  contacts 
for  its  own  members. 

Men's  Intramural  Sports.  A  well-organized  and  varied  program  of 
sports  and  athletics  is  incorporated  in  the  intramural  program  for  men. 
The  program  includes  the  following  sports:  archery,  badminton,  tennis, 
ping  pong,  boxing,  wrestling,  swimming,  track,  basketball,  volleyball, 
football  (six-man  and  touch),  baseball,  softball,  speedball,  soccer  and 
out-door  winter  sports. 

Women's  Intramural  Sports.  The  women's  athletic  activities  provide 
opportunity  for  college  women  to  learn  a  variety  of  sport  skills.  Each 
activity,  including  instruction,  practice,  and  competition  extends  approx- 
imately over  a  nine-week  period.  Intercollegiate  Sports  Days  occasion- 
ally permit  women  to  compete  with  other  colleges.  This  opportunity  to 
be  hosts  to  visiting  teams  and  guests  at  other  colleges  provides  desirable 
social  and  educational  experiences. 

Varsity  Athletics.  A  well  rounded  program  of  varsity  athletics  is 
provided  for  the  student  interested  in  football,  basketball,  baseball, 
tennis,  track,  wrestling,  soccer,  and  swimming. 


Indiana    Catalooue   Numbeh  29 


Red  Cross  Life  Saving  and  Swimming.  The  college  cooperates  with 
the  American  Red  Cross  in  conducting  life  saving  and  swimming  classes 
in  the  college  pool.  Many  students  earn  their  Senior  and  Instructor's 
certificates  in  Life  Saving.  This  enables  these  students  to  work  in 
summer  camps  and  city  pools  as  life  savers. 

PROFESSIONAL  ORGANIZATIONS 

The  John  A.  H.  Keith  Chapter  of  the  Future  Teachers  of  America 
is  a  professional  organization  composed  of  all  seniors  and  other  interested 
students.  Its  purpose  is  "to  quicken  the  interest  of  young  people  in  the 
professional  side  of  their  educational  careers."  This  organization  pro- 
vides an  opportunity  for  active  participation  in  both  state  and  national 
education  associations  with  which  the  seniors  will  later  be  associated. 

CLASS  ORGANIZATIONS 

Each  of  the  four  classes — Freshman,  Sophomore,  Junior,  and  Senior 
— has  a  class  organization,  holds  social  and  professional  meetings,  and 
sponsors  a  formal  dance  each  year. 

FRATERNITIES 
Honorary  Fraternities.  The  Beta  Gamma  Chapter  of  Kappa  Delta 
Pi,  an  educational  honor  fraternity  open  to  both  men  and  women,  was 
inaugurated  in  1928.  Only  juniors  and  seniors  of  high  scholastic  attain- 
ment are  eligible  to  membership.  Pi  Omega  Pi,  an  honorary  national 
fraternity  for  men  and  women  in  business  education  is  represented  on 
the  campus  by  Kappa  Chapter,  formed  in  1929.  Beta  Chapter  of  Gamma 
Rho  Tau,  an  honorary  fraternity  for  men  in  business  education,  was 
organized  in  1929.  The  Tau  Chapter  of  Kappa  Omicron  Phi,  a  national 
honorary  home  economics  sorority,  was  established  on  the  campus  in 
June,  1940.  The  Alpha  Lamba  Chapter  of  Delta  Phi  Delta,  a  national 
honorary  art  fraternity,  was  installed  on  the  campus,  March  30,  1946. 
Alpha  Omega  Gamma  is  a  local  honorary  fraternity  in  geography, 
organized  in  1927.  Sigma  Alpha  Eta,  a  national  professional  speech  and 
hearing  fraternity,  was  installed  at  the  college  in  1952.  Alpha  Psi  Omega, 
a  national  honorary  dramatic  fraternity,  was  installed  at  Indiana  in  1953. 

Men's  Fraternities.  Three  national  and  two  local  fraternities  for 
men  now  have  chapters  at  Indiana.  The  Phi  Alpha  Zeta  Fraternity  was 
organized  as  a  national  educational  and  social  fraternity  June  4,  1908. 
Alpha  Chapter  has  been  active  on  the  campus  as  a  local  organization 
since  1927.  Pa.  Xi  of  Sigma  Phi  Epsilon,  a  national  social  fraternity, 
was  established  at  Indiana,  January  5,  1952.  It  took  the  place  of  Eta 
Chapter  of  Phi  Sigma  Pi,  a  national  professional  fraternity,  estab- 
lished at  Indiana,  April,  1929.  Phi  Sigma  Pi  replaced  Omega  Chi,  a 
local  organization  founded  in  1909.  The  Pi  Chapter  of  Sigma  Tau 
Gamma,  a  national  educational  and  social  fraternity,  was  established  on 
November  8,  1930.  Delta  Sigma  Nu,  a  local  fraternity,  was  organized 
September,  1949.  Delta  Sigma  Chi,  a  local  fraternity,  was  organized  in 
May,  1951. 

Inter-fraternity  Council.  This  small  group,  made  up  of  the  presi- 
dent, a  representative  and  the  sponsor  of  each  fraternity,  and  the  Dean 


30  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

of  Men,  meets  at  the  call  of  the  chairman  to  regulate  inter-fraternity 
affairs. 

Women's  Fraternities.  Eleven  national  women's  fraternities  have 
chapters  on  the  campus:  Alpha  Sigma  Alpha,  Sigma  Sigma  Sig^ma,  Alpha 
Sigma  Tau,  Pi  Kappa  Sigma,  Theta  Sigma  Upsilon,  Delta  Sigma  Epsilon 
Phi  Mu,  Zeta  Tau  Alpha,  Beta  Sigma  Omicron,  Sigma  Kappa,  and  Delta 
Zeta.  In  addition  one  local  group  is  working  toward  affiliation  with 
national  fraternities.  The  college  believes  that  fraternities  afford  op- 
portunities to  young  women  for  maintaining  scholarship,  for  developing 
social  poise,  and  for  contributing  to  the  life  of  the  campus,  of  the  com- 
munity, and  of  the  world  at  large. 

SCHOLARSHIPS  AND  LOANS 

State  Scholarships.  The  Department  of  Public  Instruction  annually 
awards  scholarships  on  the  basis  of  competitive  examinations  held  on  the 
first  Friday  in  May  of  each  year.  These  are  awarded  in  each  county  and 
senatorial  district  in  the  state.  Each  scholarship  in  worth  $100  a  year 
for  four  years  and  may  be  used  at  the  State  Teachers  Colleges.  Inquiries 
concerning  State  Scholarships  should  be  sent  to  Dr.  James  G.  Pentz, 
Chief  Pre-Professional  Credentials,  Department  of  Public  Instruction, 
Harrisburg,  Pennsylvania. 

Corinne  Menk  Wahr  Scholarships.  Through  the  generosity  of 
Corinne  Menk  Wahr,  Class  of  1916,  approximately  fifteen  scholarships 
are  awarded  each  year  to  worthy  students.  The  amounts  range  from 
one  hundred  to  one  hundred  and  fifty  dollars,  payable  in  the  designated 
amount  for  each  of  four  years.  Applicants  for  Wahr  Scholarships  must 
be  residents  of  Pennsylvania  and  must  be  interested  in  the  teaching  pro- 
fession. Applications  may  be  secured  from  the  Registrar.  In  any  one 
year  as  many  as  eighty  students  may  be  receiving  a  total  of  six  thousand 
dollars  of  Wahr  Scholarship  money.  Policy  governing  the  scholarship 
fund  is  esitablished  by  the  Board  of  Trustees  and  administered  by  a  com- 
mittee appointed  by  the  President  of  the  College. 

Seven  Wahr  merit  recognition  scholarships  of  fifty  dollars  each  are 
given  each  year  to  students  at  the  college  for  excellence  in  certain  fields 
as  follows:  The  student  who  excels  in  athletics;  the  student  who  con- 
tributes the  most  to  campus  welfare;  the  student  who  does  the  most 
to  promote  the  fine  arts;  the  student  showing  the  most  initiative  in 
bringing  new  ideas  or  action  to  the  ISTC  campus;  the  student  evidenc- 
ing the  most  professional  promise  as  a  teacher;  the  student  with  the 
highest  scholarship  during  the  first  three  years  of  college;  and  the  stu- 
dent who  writes  most  effectively. 

Clark  Scholarship.  The  Lieutenant  Alpheus  Bell  Clark  Memorial 
Scholarship  was  established  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Steele  Clark,  Cherry  Tree, 
Indiana  County,  in  memory  of  their  son.  The  sum  of  fifty  dollars  will  be 
awarded  each  semester  to  that  young  man,  or  woman,  a  senior  in  the 
College  and  a  resident  of  Indiana  County,  who  in  the  opinion  of  a 
committee  chosen  by  the  President,  best  qualifies  for  the  honor  in  terms 


Indiana   Catalogue  Number  81 


of  academic  ability,  leadership,  and  service  to  the  College  with  preference 
going  to  a  veteran,  or  a  son  or  daughter  of  a  veteran. 

Morris  Scholarships.  The  Helen  Wood  Morris  Scholarships  were 
established  by  Lieutenant-Colonel  L.  M.  Morris,  of  Altoona  in  memory 
of  his  wife,  a  graduate  of  the  College.  The  sum  of  one  hundred  dollars 
will  be  awarded  annually  to  students  selected  by  a  committee  named  by 
the  institution,  one  award  to  a  sophomore,  the  other  to  a  junior.  Students 
chosen  must  be  in  the  highest  quarter  of  their  class,  must  be  in  need  of 
financial  assistance,  and  must  have  demonstrated  worthiness  in  terms  of 
character,  personality,  leadership,  and  American  citizenship. 

Presser  Foundation  Scholarship.  The  Presser  Foundation  of  Phila- 
dalphia  will  award  a  scholarship  of  $250  each  year  to  a  music  student 
at  the  Indiana  State  Teachers  College. 

Kappa  Delta  Pi  Scholarship.  The  Kappa  Delta  Pi  Scholarship  was 
established  by  the  Beta  Gamma  Chapter  of  this  college  to  honor  that 
member  of  the  Sophomore  class  who  is  judged  to  be  the  ideal  college 
student.  This  award  of  twenty-five  dollars  is  made  each  year  by  a  com- 
mittee of  the  local  chapter  and  is  awarded  on  the  basis  of  character, 
scholarship,  and  evidences  of  leadership. 

Secondary  Education  Scholarship.  A  scholarship  of  $50.00  is  given 
annually  by  the  Secondary  Education  Club  to  an  upperclass  student  who 
has  shown  an  active  interest  in  college  affairs,  scholastic  ability  and 
desirable  personality  traits. 

Syntron  Foundation  Scholarships.  Through  the  Syntron  Foundation 
of  Homer  City,  several  scholarships  of  $200  are  awarded  annually  to 
freshmen.  Preference  is  given  to  children  of  employees  of  the  Syntron 
Company  and  to  graduates  of  Homer  City,  Blairsville  and  Indiana  High 
Schools.  Four  scholarships  good  for  four  years  were  awarded  in  1952. 
Applications  must  be  filed  with  the  registrar  by  May  15th. 

Loan  Fund.  The  Jane  E.  Leonard  Memorial  Loan  Fund  was  estab- 
lished several  years  ago  and  has  been  built  up  largely  through  the  work 
of  the  faculty  and  alumni.  The  fund  now  totals  about  $26,000.  The 
governing  board  in  charge  of  granting  loans  consists  of  the  Dean  of 
Instruction,  the  Dean  of  Men,  the  Dean  of  Women,  and  an  alumni 
member.  The  plan  in  operation  provides  for  the  granting  of  loans  to 
sophomores,  juniors  and  seniors  with  interest  at  two  per  cent,  payable 
at  maturity  of  the  loan.  Not  more  than  $100.00  will  be  loaned  to  a 
sophomore  during  one  semester  and  the  maximum  sum  loaned  will  not 
exceed  $400.00. 

Men's  Varsity  "I"  Loan  Fund.  The  Men's  Varsity  I  Club  has  built 
up  a  loan  fund  for  members  of  varsity  athletic  teams  in  good  standing. 
Members  may  borrow  not  more  than  $150.00  per  year.  Loans  are  made 
for  a  reasonable  period  of  time  and  are  interest  free  for  the  first  year. 
Thereafter  the  interest  rate  is  two  per  cent  per  annum. 

Veterans.  Indiana  is  approved  to  offer  training  under  the  Korean 
G.  I.  Bill  (Public  Law  550)  as  well  as  under  Public  Law  346  (World  War 
II)  and  Public  Law  16  (Disabled  Veterans).     Applicants  for  admission 


32  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

who  are  entitled  to  training  under  one  of  these  bills  should  contact  the 
Veterans  Counselor  immediately  after  they  apply  for  admission. 

THE  SUMMER  SESSIONS 

The  Summer  School  is  an  integral  part  of  the  year's  work.  Teachers 
in  service  and  students  in  regular  attendance  can  secure  in  the  summer 
session  three  to  twelve  hours  credit  toward  any  certificate  or  toward 
graduation  in  any  curriculum.  The  courses  are  planned  primarily  for 
those  who  have  had  previous  work  and  for  those  who  are  accelerating 
their  work.  An  effort  is  made  to  meet  all  reasonable  requests  of  teachers 
who  are  working  toward  higher  certification  or  toward  graduation. 

All  courses  given  in  the  summer  session  require  the  same  amount 
of  time  and  are  granted  the  same  credit  as  if  taken  during  a  regrular 
semester.  Reserve  Officer  Training  Corps  instruction  is  conducted  for 
those  male  students  enrolled  in  the  summer  session  courses.  The  Sum- 
mer School  Bulletin  will  be  mailed  to  anyone  desiring  more  complete 
information  regarding  the  courses  to  be  offered. 

Dates.     Three  sessions,  two  of  three  weeks  and  one  of  six  weeks, 

are  planned  for  the  summer  of  1953.  The  pre-season  will  open  Wednes- 
day, June  10  and  closes  Friday,  June  26.  The  main  session  starts, 
Monday,  June  29  and  continuing  to  August  7.  The  post-session  opens 
Monday,  August  10  and  closes,  Wednesday,  August  26.  It  is  thus  possi- 
ble for  a  student  to  secure  three  to  twelve  credits  by  attending  the  sum- 
mer school. 

Address  Director  of  Summer  Sessions  for  special  bulletin  indicating 
courses  and  activities  of  the  Summer  Session. 

SATURDAY  CAMPUS  AND  EXTENSION  CLASSES 

Saturday  Campus  Classes  are  held  on  the  campus  on  Saturdays 
(generally  between  8:00  A.  M.  and  1:00  P.  M.).  Courses  are  arranged 
according  to  the  demand  for  them  as  indicated  by  teachers  who  are 
interested.  This  is  not  extension  work.  It  is  credited  as  "residence" 
work.  Classes  are  scheduled  to  enable  students  to  earn  as  much  as  six 
semester-hours  credit  each  semester.  Persons  interested  should  write 
for  a  schedule  of  courses. 

Extension  Classes.  Teachers  may  earn  as  much  as  25  per  cent  of 
the  credit  needed  for  a  four-year  curriculum  by  taking  courses  in  ex- 
tension classes.  If  there  is  a  demand  for  certain  courses  at  a  given 
place  too  far  distant  from  Indiana  for  students  to  attend  Saturday 
campus  classes,  arrangements  may  be  made  for  one  or  more  courses 
by  extension.  Requests  should  be  made  to  the  Dean  of  Instruction  not 
later  than  one  month  preceding  the  opening  month  of  the  semester. 

The  contingent  fee  for  all  extension  and  Saturday  Campus  Classes 
is  $7.50  per  semester  hour  of  credit  and  no  activity  fee  is  required. 
Not  more  than  six  semester-hours  credit  can  be  earned  in  one  semester 
by  one  who  is  doing  full  time  teaching. 


Indiana   Catalogue  Numder  83 


REQUIREMENTS  FOR  ADMISSION 

The  following  is  a  condensed  statement  of  the  requirements  adopted 
by  the  Board  of  Presidents  of  the  State  Teachers  Colleges,  May  13,  1932, 
and  adapted  for  use  at  Indiana  State  Teachers  College.  The  general 
bases  for  admissions  are: 

General  Scholarship  and  Tests 
Character  and  Personality 
Health  and  Physical  Vigor 
A  Personal  Interview 

Candidates  for  admission  must  satisfy  these  general  requirements 
as  outlined  in  detail  below. 

General  Scholarship  as  evidenced  by  graduation  from  an  approved 
four-year  high  school  or  institution  of  equivalent  grade,  or  equivalent 
preparation  as  determined  by  the  Credentials  Division  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  Public  Instruction. 

1.  Applicants  ranking  in  the  upper  half  of  their  graduating  classes 
will  be  admitted,  on  recommendation  of  the  principal  or  other 
school  official,  on  certificate  without  further  evidence  of  scholar- 
ship. 

2.  Applicants  who  do  not  rank  in  the  upper  half  of  their  graduating 
classes  may  be  admitted  provided:  A  rating  satisfactory  to  the 
institution  is  made  on  a  seholastic  aptitude  test  administered 
at  the  college. 

3.  Applicants  for  admission  to  the  Art  Department  may  be  ad- 
mitted provided:  A  rating  satisfactory  to  the  institution  is 
made  on  an  art  aptitude  test  adminisered  at  the  college. 

4.  Applicants  for  admission  to  the  Music  Department  may  be 
admitted  provided.  A  rating  satisfactory  to  the  institution  is 
made  on  a  music  aptitude  test  administered  at  the  college,  and 
auditions  in  singing  and  piano  playing  show  the  necessary  spec- 
ialized abilities.  Applicants  may  also  be  heard  on  an  orchestral 
instrument.    They  bring  their  own  music  and  instrument. 

DATES  FOR  TESTS  HOURS  FOR  TESTS 

March  2,  1953 

March  30,  1953 

May  5,  1953  Scholastic  Aptitude  10:30  a.m. — 12:15  noon 

June  17,  1953  Music  Aptitude  1:30  p.m. — 4:00  p.m. 

July  16,  1953  Art  Aptitude  1:30  p.m.— 3:00  p.m. 

August  19,  1953 

Tests  begin  Promptly — applicants  who  wish  to  take  tests  should 
report  not  later  than  10:15  a.m.  and  1:15  p.m. 


S4  Tbachbrs  College  Bulletin 

Character  and  Personality.  Integrity  and  appropriate  personality 
as  shown  by  an  estimate  by  secondary-school  officials  of  the  candidate's 
trustworthiness,  initiative,  industry,  social  adaptability,  personal  appear- 
ance, and  sympathy. 

Health  and  physical  vigor  as  indicated  by  emotional  stability,  ab- 
sence of  physical  defects  that  would  interfere  with  the  successful  per- 
formance of  the  duties  of  a  teacher,  and  absence  of  a  predisposition  to- 
ward ill  health  as  determined  by  a  medical  examination  at  the  College. 

1.  All  applicants  for  admission  shall  present  a  certificate  of  ex- 
amination signed  by  a  physician  legally  qualified  to  practice 
medicine  in  the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania.  Forms  for  the 
examination  will  be  futnished  by  the  College.  This  certificate 
will  be  subject  to  the  approval  of  College  physician. 

2.  Applicants  may  be  rejected  for  the  following  reasons:  incurable 
defects  or  diseases  of  the  heart,  lung,  kidneys,  digestive  system, 
nervous  system  (including  hysteria,  epilepsy,  nervous  insta- 
bility), skin,  organs  of  the  special  senses,  and  thyroid,  defective 
vision  of  marked  degree,  permanently  impaired  hearing,  marked 
speech  defects,  unsightly  deformities  or  marked  obesity. 

3.  Students  with  remedial  defects  may  be  accepted  on  condition 
that  immediate  treatments  be  undertaken  for  the  removal  of 
these  defects. 

A  personal  interview  with  particular  attention  to  personality,  speech 
habits,  social  presence,  expressed  interests  of  the  applicant,  and  promise 
of  professional  development. 

1.  The  purpose  of  the  personal  interview  is  to  give  the  admissions 
committee  a  report  on  the  goals  and  activities  of  the  applicant, 
to  guide  him  in  the  choice  of  curriculm  and  to  give  an  over  all 
evaluation  as  a  prospective  teacher. 

I  2.  The  interview  will  be  conducted  at  the  College.  Wednesday  and 
Thursday  afternoons  and  test  dates,  1:30  p.m.  to  4:00  p.m., 
have  been  reserved  as  appropriate  times  for  interviews.  Specific 
information  regarding  interviews  may  be  secured  at  any  time 
by  writing  to  the  Registrar. 

SUMMARY  OF  STEPS  FOR  ADMISSION 

1.  File  application  and  personnel  record 

2.  File  preliminary  report  on  high  school  rank  if  application  is 
filed  before  graduation 

3.  File  complete  record  of  high  school  credits  after  graduation 

4.  File  medical  blank 

5.  Come  to  the  college  for  personal  interview 

6.  Send  check  or  money  order  for  the  advance  deposit  of  ten  dol- 
lars 

7.  Take  scholastic  aptitude  test  if  required 


Indiana  Oataloovk  Number  8S 

8.  Take  art  or  music  aptitude  test  (applicants  for  Art  and  Music 
only) 

9.  Transfer  students — file  an  official  transcript  of  coljege  credits^ 
including  statement  of  honorable  dismissal 

The  above  steps  for  admission  must  be  completed  before  applica- 
tions can  be  submitted  to  the  Committee  on  Admissions.  A  formal  letter 
ofriipproval  from  the  Registrar  indicates  the  applicant  is  admitted. 

ADVANCED  STANDING 

The  following  regulations  governing  admission  with  advanced  stand- 
ing: were  approved  by  the  Board  of  Presidents  of  the  State  Teachers 
Colleges,  July  19,  1940: 

1.  Transfers  from  other  institutions  will  not  be  accepted  without 
certificates  of  honorable  dismissal. 

2.  Credit  will  be  given  for  acceptable  courses  pursued  in  accredited 
collegiate  institutions  in  which  the  student  has  made  a  grade 
above  the  lowest  passing  grade  in  the  institution  in  which  the 
work  was  done.  Where  the  grades  are  marked  on  a  percentage 
basis,  work  graded  five  per  cent  above  the  minimum  passinfir 
grade  will  be  accepted. 

3.  All  students  who  are  candidates  for  a  degree  shall  be  required 
to  arrange  a  program  of  studies  approved  by  the  Dean  of 
Instruction.  Any  student  desiring  to  pursue  any  part  of  this 
program  at  a  different  institution  will  be  required  to  secure,  in 
advance,  the  approval  of  such  courses  from  the  Dean  of  Instruc- 
tion. 

No  credit  can  be  given  for  correspondence  work  toward  limited 
certification  unless  such  work  was  completed  previous  to  September,  1926. 
Credit  for  extension  work  in  certain  subjects  up  to  a  total  of  not  to  exceed 
32  semester  hours  may  be  accepted  toward  the  requirement  for  a  degree. 

A  student  transferring  from  another  college  will  be  required  to  meet 
the  same  requirements  as  any  other  applicant.  A  student  transferring 
64  hours  or  more  will  be  excused  from  Freshman  tests.  Students  trans- 
ferring less  than  64  hours  may  be  excused  from  some  or  all  Freshmen 
tests  if  they  have  a  transcript  of  their  test  record  sent  to  the  college. 

Any  other  student  must  take  the  tests  or  submit  his  test  records  with 
his  transcript  of  credit.  No  student  may  obtain  a  certificate  or  degree 
without  a  minimum  residence  of  one  year  in  this  College. 

Junior  Standing  can  be  attained  only  after  attendance  at  Indiana 
for  one  semester. 

SCHOLASTIC    REQUIREMENTS 

Grades.  The  following  grades  are  used  in  reporting  the  standing 
of  students  at  the  end  of  each  semester  or  summer  term:  A,  excellent; 
B,  good;  C,  fair;  D,  passed;  F,  failed;  I,  incomplete. 


36  Teachers  College  Bulletin 


A  grade  of  F  can  be  cleared  only  by  repeating  the  course  in  the 
regular  way.  The  grade  of  I  is  used  to  record  work  which,  so  far  as 
covered,  is  of  passing  grade,  but  which  is  incomplete  because  of  personal 
illness  or  other  unavoidable  reason.  It  must  be  made  up  within  two 
months  after  the  student  returns  to  college. 

Quality  Points.  Quality  points  are  assigned  as  follows:  Grade  A,  3 
quality  points  per  semester  hour;  B,  2  quality  points  per  semester  hour; 
C,  1  quality  point  per  semester  hour;  D  or  F,  no  quality  points. 

To  qualify  for  graduation,  a  student  must  have  secured  as  many 
quality  points  as  the  number  of  semester  hours  he  has  earned  in  this 
college  toward  his  degree.  Quality  points  are  not  counted  on  grades 
from  other  schools  and  a  student  transferring  from  another  school  is 
held  responsible  for  quality  points  only  on  work  taken  in  this  College. 

Criteria  Governing  Continnance  in  College.  It  is  expected  that  a 
student- attending  college  for  his  first  semester  earn  a  minimum  of  eight 
hours  and  eight  quality  points  to  continue.  Students  falling  below  this 
minimum  would  rarely  have  a  reversal  of  form. 

It  is  expected  that  a  student  shall  earn  twelve  hours  and  twelve 
quality  points  each  semester  to  continue  in  good  standing. 

A  student  earning  from  8  to  11  semester  hours  and/or  from  8  to  11 
quality  points  may  continue  on  probation  for  one  semester. 

Each  person  shall  be  considered  individually  if  his  record  is  poor 
with  a  view  to  allowing  exceptions  because  of  personal  illness,  family 
conditions,  or  good  test  record. 

Classification  of  Students.  Students  are  placed  in  one  of  four  classes 
according  to  progress  towards  graduation. 

A  freshman  has  less  than  30  semester  hours  and  30  quality  points. 

A  sophomore  has  at  least  30  semester  hours  and  30  quality  points 
but  has  not  attained  junior  standing.  (Transfers  having  30  or  more  sem- 
ester hours  are  so  classified  for  one  semester.) 

A  junior  has  applied  for  junior  standing  and  has  been  approved.  (See 
below.) 

A  senior  has  been  approved  for  junior  standing  and  has  earned  96 
or  more  semester  hours.  (Persons  holding  degree  may  be  classified  as 
seniors.) 

Junior  Standing.  The  main  purpose  of  junior  standing  is  to  assure 
certain  students  that  success  in  the  teaching  profession  is  eyident;  also, 
that  the  college  intends  to  recommend  him  as  a  teacher  if  he  continues 
his  progress  at  the  same  level. 

The  college  hopes  that  the  requirements  established  for  junior  stand- 
ing emphasize  the  fundamental  areas  in  which  the  student  must  develop. 
It  is  more  than  a  look  at  the  scholastic  record  although  deficiencies  in 
a  student's  education  must  be  filled. 


Indiana   Catalootje  Numbkh  87 

After  two  years  at  Indiana  an  evaluation  of  the  progress  of  each 
student  is  desirable.  Various  phases  of  life  contributing  to  teaching 
success  are  noted:  habits  of  social  living,  initiative,  assumption  of  res- 
sponsibility,  professional  attitudes  and  others  listed  below.  All  tl  ese 
should  contribute  to  making  the  student  a  better  teacher  for  a  better 
position. 

The  process  includes  an  application  for  junior  standing  by  the  stu- 
dent and  approval  by  the  Committee  on  Admissions  and  Professional 
Standards.  If  the  student  is  not  suited  to  the  profession,  the  college  will 
assist  in  making  an  adjustment  to  a  new  objective.  In  this  procedure 
of  junior  standing  the  student  is  treated  as  an  individual,  with  special 
hopes,  skills  and  desires.  Not  everyone  may  be  a  successful  teacher  but 
each  student  should  be  helped  in  achieving  a  successful  life. 

Formal  admission  to  Junior  Standing  is  a  requisite  for  continuing 
the  program  in  teacher  education.  This  marks  the  time  when  the  pro- 
fessional work  is  intensified.  Fourth  semester  students  will  make  appli- 
cation for  admission  to  Junior  Standing,  for  which  they  are  required  to 
meet  the  following  qualifications: 

1.  The  scholastic  record  must  be  "C"  average  or  better  for  the  first 
two  years'  work. 

2.  A  "C"  average  must  be  attained  in  Communication  I  and  II  or  a 
satisfactory  score  made  on  the  Sophomore  English  Test.  Stu- 
dents transferring  English  credits  must  pass  the  Sophomore 
English  test. 

3.  Adequate  background  as  measured  by  the  Sophomore  Tests 
(March,  July  or  December)  in  English,  General  Culture,,  and 
Contemporary  Affairs  must  be  shown.  Students  who  rank  low 
in  all  three  tests  will  be  required  to  take  an  additional  three  hour 
course,  and  to  repeat  the  Sophomore  Tests. 

4.  A  personality  that  is  satisfactory  for  a  teacher  must  be  in 
evidence.  Reports  of  six  or  seven  members  of  the  faculty  form 
the  basis  for  evaluating  this  factor. 

5.  Evidence  of  physical  stamina  and  freedom  from  physical  defects 
that  may  interfere  with  the  duties  of  a  teacher  must  be  presented. 

6.  The  voice  must  be  pleasing  and  free  from  objectionable  qualities. 

7.  A  well  balanced  record  of  extra-curricular  activities  must  have 
been  developed. 

8.  The  student  shall  meet  the  specific  requirements  of  his  curriculum 
and  the  courses  prescribed  for  the  first  two  years. 

Students  who  fail  to  meet  the  above  requirements  will  be  given  one 
semester  plus  summer  sessions  to  make  them  up.  Students  who  fail 
to  clear  their  deficiencies  at  the  time  of  their  second  application  will  be 
limited  further  professional  training  leading  to  certification,  imtil  the 
deficiency  is  made  up. 


38  Teachers  Collboe  Bulurtn 

Credentials  will  be  examined  by  the  Committee  on  Professional 
Standards  and  decisions  will  be  reached  on  the  basis  of  all  evidence 
available. 

Eligibility  for  Student  Training.  No  student  vnll  be  permitted  to 
do  student  teaching  unless  he  holds  a  Certificate  of  Junior  Standing. 
Also,  he  must  continue  to  have  a  "C"  average  with  no  "F's." 

Student  teaching  in  the  summer  session  is  restricted  to  those  who 
have  had  previous  student  teaching  in  this  school  or  several  years  of 
actual  teaching  experience.  Application  to  do  student  teaching  during 
the  summer  session  should  be  made  before  May  15. 

REQUIREMENTS  FOR  GRADUATION 

Every  student  entering  the  State  Teachers  College,  Indiana,  Penn- 
sylvania, selects  one  of  the  six  degree  curricula  offered  at  this  College. 
All  curricula  are  four  years  in  length,  and  all  lead  to  the  degree  of 
Bachelor  of  Science  in  Education  or  in  some  specific  field  of  education 
and  entitle  the  graduate  to  the  Provisional  College  Certificate  in  the  field 
of  his  election.  Any  student  who  desires  to  pursue  any  part  of  the 
selected  curriculum  at  a  different  institution  will  be  required  to  secure,  in 
advance,  the  approval  of  such  courses  from  the  Dean  of  Instruction.  For- 
mal application  for  a  degree  and  a  certificate  must  be  made  by  each 
candidate  for  a  degree.  Consult  the  individual  curriculum  for  further 
details. 


Indiana   Catalogue  Number 


REQUIREMENTS  FOR  CERTIFICATION 

Provisional  College  Certificates.  The  Provisional  College  Certificate 
is  issued  to  each  graduate  and  entitles  him  to  teach  the  subjects  indicated 
on  the  face  of  the  certificate  for  a  period  of  three  years.  Three  years  of 
successful  teaching  and  the  completion  of  six  semester  hours  of  additional 
approved  credit  enables  the  holder  to  receive  the  Permanent  College  Cer- 
tificate. This  is  a  life  certificate  to  teach  the  subjects  in  his  field  in  any 
public  school  in  the  State. 

The  holder  of  a  college  certificate  in  the  elementary  field  may  be 
certificated  for  teaching  in  the  secondary  field  by  adding  about  30  hours 
in  secondary  education,  including  six  hours'  student  teaching  in  the  sec- 
ondary grades,  and  securing  18  hours  of  approved  credit  in  a  major  field 
or  in  each  of  several  major  fields  of  secondary  education. 

The  holder  of  a  college  certificate  in  the  secondary  field  or  in  one 
of  the  special  fields  who  wishes  to  secure  certification  in  the  elementary 
field  must  secure  30  semester  hours  of  approved  training  in  work  definitely 
organized  for  the  preparation  of  elementary-school  teachers. 

Elementary-Temporary  Standard  Certificate.  On  March  6,  1942, 
the  State  Council  of  Education  authorized  the  Sfuperintendent  of  Public 
Instruction  to  issue  an  elementary-temporary  standard  certificate  valid 
for  teaching  in  the  elementary  field  for  a  period  of  one  year  to  the 
holder  of  a  certificate  which  is  valid  for  teaching  in  the  secondary  field, 
under  certain  condif'^n:-,  which  are  chiefly: 

1.  A  written  request  shall  be  presented  to  the  Superintendent  of 
Public  Instruction  by  the  superintendent  under  whose  jurisdiction 
the  teacher  is  to  serve. 

2.  The  certificate  may  be  renewed  for  an  additional  period  of  one 
year  through  the  presentation  of  an  official  transcript  showing 
that  six  semester  hours  of  further  professional  education  in 
the  elementary  field  have  been  completed. 


40        '  TEACHEns  College  Bulletin 

FEES,  DEPOSITS,  REPAYMENTS 

(Subject  To  Change) 
CONTINGENT  FEES 

Contingent  Fee  for  Regular  Session.  A  contingent  fee  for  each 
student  in  each  curriculum  is  charged  as  follows: 

Semester 

Elementary  Curriculum $45.00 

Secondary  Curriculum  45.00 

Art  Curriculum 63.00 

Business  Education  Curriculum 57.00 

Home  Economics  Curriculum 72.00 

*Music  Education  Curriculum 90.00 

This  fee  covers  registration  and  the  keeping  of  records  of  students, 
library,  student  welfare,  health  service  (other  than  extra  nurse  and 
quarantine),  and  laboratory  facilities. 

Students  taking  more  than  seven  (7)  semester  hours — whether  in 
regular,  Saturday  Campus,  or  extension  classes — shall  pay  the  appro- 
priate regular  contingent  fee  listed  above.  These  fees  include  the  full 
semesterly  amount  of  the  following  special  curriculum  fees:  Art  Curri- 
culum, $18.00;  Business  Education  Curriculum,  $12.00;  Home  Econom- 
ics Curriculum,  $27.00;  Music  Education  Curriculum,  $45.00.  No  Special 
curriculum  fee  is  charged  to  any  student  in  the  Elementary  or  Secondary 
Curriculua.  All  students  taking  seven  (7)  or  fewer  semester  hours — 
whether  in  the  regular,  Saturday  Campus,  or  extension  classes — shall 
pay  at  the  rate  of  $7.50  per  semester  hour  plus  such  pro  rata  of  the 
above  enumerated  semesterly  special  curriculum  fees  as  the  number  of 
hours  they  carry  bears  to  eighteen  (18)  semester  hours. 

Contingent  Fee  for  Six-Weeks  Summer  Session.  The  fee  for  the 
regular  Summer  Session  is  $7.50  per  semester  hour.  A  minimum  con- 
tingent fee  of  $22.50  is  charged. 

Contingent  Fee  for  Three- Weeks  Pre-  and  Post-Sessions.  The  con- 
tingent fee  for  the  Pre-  and  Post-Sessions  is  $7.50  per  semester  hour. 

Contingent  Fee  for  Special  Curricula.  In  addition  to  the  above  fee 
for  the  summer  sessions,  students  enroled  in  the  special  curricula  will 
pay  the  following  additional  contingent  fees: 

Summer  Pre-  Post- 

Session  Session         Session 

Art   $  6.00  $3.00  $3.00 

Business  Education 4.00  2.00  2.00 

Home  Economics 9.00  4.50  4.50 

Music  Education  15.00  7.50  7.50 


*  This  fee  includes  private  instruction  for  all  work  which  jnay  be  as- 
signed by  the  Director  or  by  the  student's  adviser,  but  does  not  include  fees 
listed  under  "Private  Instruction  in  Music"  on  next  page. 


Indiana   Catalooub   NtrMBRn  41 

HOUSING  FEE 

The  housiriif  fee  for  students  is  $108.00  per  one-half  semester,  $72.00 
for  the  Summer  Session,  and  $30.00  for  the  pre-  and  post-sessions.  This 
includes  room,  meals,  and  limited  laundry.  For  rooms  with  running 
water  an  additional  charge  of  $9.00  per  student  per  semester,  or  $3.00 
for  the  Summer  Session  is  made.  No  reduction  in  the  rate  is  to  be 
made  for  laundry  done  at  home  or  for  absence  of  students  who  go  home 
for  a  few  days  at  a  time.  A  student  may,  at  the  direction  of  the  Presi- 
dent of  the  College,  occupy  a  double  room  alone  by  paying  an  additional 
$36.00  per  semester,  or  $12.00  for  a  Summer  Session. 

STUDENT  ACTIVITY  FEE 

An  activity  fee  is  collected  from  all  students  and  adminis^tered 
through  the  Student  Co-operative  Assocfation  under  regulations  ap- 
proved by  the  Board  of  Trustees.  This  fee  of  $15.00  per  semester  covers 
the  cost  of  student  activities  in  athletics,  lectures,  entertainment,  student 
publications,  etc.,  and  is  payable  in  one  sum  for  the  semester  at  the  time 
of  registration.  For  the  regular  Summer  Session  the  fee  is  $4.00,  and 
for  the  Pre-  or  Post-Summer  Sessions,  $2.00.  No  activity  fee  is  charged 
!for  Saturday  campus  and  extension  classes. 

LATE   REGISTRATION  FEE 

Each  student  registering  after  the  date  officially  set  for  registration 
is  required  to  pay  an  additional  fee  of  $1.00  per  day  until  the  student  is 
in  regular  attendance  (except  when  permission  for  late  registration  has 
been  secured  in  advance  from  the  President  because  of  illness  or  other 
unavoidable  causes),  provided  that  the  total  amount  of  the  Late  Regis- 
tration Fee  shall  not  exceed  $5.00.  The  same  regulation  shall  apply  to 
approved  inter-semester  payments. 

FEES  FOR  OUT-OF-STATE  STUDENTS 

Students  whose  legal  residence  is  out  of  the  State  of  Pennsylvania, 
carrying  the  regular  32  semester-hour  load  in  secondary  and  elementary 
education,  pay  a  contingent  fee  of  $240.00  per  year  or  at  the  rate  of 
$7.50  per  credit.  Out-of-State  students  enrolled  in  other  curricula  pay 
additional  contingent  fees  as  follows:  Art,  $36.00;  Business  Education, 
$24.00;   Home   Economics,   $54.00;   Music   Education,  $90.00. 

SPECIAL  FEES 

Private  Instruction  in  Music.  A  charge  of  $24.00  per  semester  is 
made  for  one  lesson  per  week  in  voice,  piano,  band  or  orchestral  instru- 
ments to  persons  not  registered  in  the  Music  Department,  Members  of 
the  Music  Department  who  wish  additional  private  instruction  other  than 
that  assigned  by  the  Director  (and  included  in  their  $45.00  contingent  fee) 
pay  the  same  rate  for  this  extra  private  instruction. 

The  fee  for  practice  use  of  piano,  band,  or  orchestial  instruments 
for  one  period  per  day  is  $6.00  per  semester.  The  fee  for  practice  use 
of  the  pipe  organ  one  period  per  day  is  $36.00  per  semester.  If  state- 
owned  instruments  are  not  available,  the  Music  Department  will  assist 


42  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

in  securing  instruments  from  individuals  for  students  at  the  current 
rate  of  $8.00  per  semester. 

Damage  Fee.  Students  are  responsible  for  damages,  breakage,  loss, 
or  delayed  return  of  college  property. 

Infirmary  Fee.  After  three  days  in  the  college  infirmary  the  College 
shall  charge  an  additional  $1.00  for  each  day.  Day  students  who  are 
admitted  to  the  infirmary  board  at  the  rate  of  $2.00  a  day.  This  charge 
includes  the  regular  nurse  and  regular  medical  service  but  does  not 
include  special  nurse  or  special  medical  service. 

Degree  Fee.  A  fee  of  $5.00  to  cover  the  cost  of  a  diploma  must  be 
paid  by  each  candidate  for  a  degree. 

Transcript  Fee.  A  fee  of  $1.00  is  charged  for  the  second  and  each 
subsequent  transcript  of  records. 

Delinquent  Accounts.  No  student  shall  be  enroled,  graduated,  or 
receive  a  transcript  of  his  records  until  all  previous  charges  have  been 
paid. 

In  addition  to  the  above  fees  the  average  student  will  require 
approximately  $30.00  per  semester  for  books,  gymnasium  costume, 
student  organization  dues,  etc. 

DEPOSITS 

Advance  Registration  Deposit.  A  deposit  of  $10.00  must  be  made 
by  all  students  when  registration  is  requested.  A  check  or  money  order 
for  this  amount  must  be  drawn  to  the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania. 
If  a  money  order  is  used  it  must  be  payable  at  Harrisburg,  Pennsylvania. 
This  is  a  guarantee  of  the  student's  intention  to  enter  college  for  the 
term  or  semester  designated.  This  money  is  deposited  with  the  Depart- 
ment of  Revenue  to  the  credit  of  the  student's  contingent  fee.  If,  how- 
.ever,  the  student  notifies  the  College  at  least  three  weeks  before  the 
opening  of  school  that  he  is  unable  to  enter,  or  if  the  student  is  rejected 
by  the  College,  repayment  of  this  deposit  will  be  made  on  application  by 
the  student  to  the  college  authorities.  This  repayment  must  be  approved 
by  the  Board  of  Trustees  and  by  the  Department  of  Revenue. 

Military  Clothing  Deposit.  A  deposit  of  $5.00  must  be  made  by 
all  students  at  the  time  of  registration,  if  enrollment  in  the  ROTC  is 
included.  Any  balance  remaining  in  the  deposit  after  losses  of  military 
clothing  have  been  deducted  will  be  returned  at  the  end  of  the  college 
year,  or  sooner,  if  the  student  terminates  his  enrollment  in  the  ROTC 
The  United  States  must  be  reimbursed  only  for  lost  property. 

No  fees  or  deposits  other  than  those  specified  above  will  be  charged. 

Private  Accounts.  As  a  convenience  to  students,  personal  deposits 
may  be  made  in  the  Student  Co-operative  Book  Store  and  drawn  against 
by  countercheck  from  time  to  time.  A  small  fee  will  be  charged  for 
this  service. 


Indiana   Catalogue  Number  43 

REPAYMENTS 

No  refunds  will  be  made  to  students  who  are  temporarily  suspended, 
indefinitely  suspended,  dismissed,  or  who  voluntarily  withdraw  from 
college. 

No  return  of  any  part  of  the  advance  registration  deposit  will  be 
made  for  any  causes  whatsoever,  except  (1)  where  students  give  notice 
of  intention  to  withdraw  at  least  three  weeks  before  the  College  opens, 
or  (2)  when  the  student  is  rejected  by  the  College.  For  personal  illness,  if 
certified  to  by  an  attending  physician,  or  for  other  reasons  approved  by 
the  Board  of  Trustees,  the  housing  and  contingent  fees  for  that  part  of 
the  semester  which  the  student  does  not  spend  in  college  will  be  refunded. 

TIME  OF  PAYMENTS 

Payment  in  full  of  all  Pre-Session  fees June  10 

Payment  in  full  of  all  regular  Summer  Session  fees June  29 

Payment  in  full  of  all  Post-Session  fees August  lO 

Payment  for  the  first  half  of  first  semest^ September  8-10 

Payment  for  the  second  half  of  first  semester November  2-7 

Payment  for  first  half  of  second  semester January  25 

Payment  for  second  half  of  second  semester March  22-27 

Payment  for  the  entire  semester  may  be  made  in  September  and 
January  if  desired. 

HOW  BILLS  AND  CHARGES  ARE  TO  BE  PAID 

All  bills,  including  contingent  fee,  housing  fee,  extra  room  rent  and 
special  department  fees  are  payable  at  least  nine  weeks  in  advance. 
Checks  should  be  made  payable  to  the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania. 
If  a  money  order  is  used  it  must  be  payable  at  Harrisburg,  Pennsylvania. 
Checks  or  money  orders  must  be  presented  in  the  exact  amount  of  the 
account.    Book  Store  purchases  are  on  a  cash  basis. 

Students  will  not  be  permitted  to  enroll  for  any  semester  until  all 
bills  previously  incurred  have  been  paid;  nor  will  credit  be  certified  to 
other  institutions  or  to  the  Department  of  Public  Instruction  until  all 
overdue  accounts  have  been  paid. 

Students  desiring  to  leave  school  before  the  close  of  a  semester 
must  report  to  the  President  and  to  the  Business  Office  to  settle  all 
unpaid  accounts. 

Meal  tickets  for  visitors  can  be  obtained  in  the  office  of  the  dietitian 
or  in  the  business  office. 

All  checks  must  be  made  payable  to  the  Commonwealth  of  Penn- 
sylvania, except  for  the  activity  fee,  which  should  be  made  payable  to 
the  Treasurer  of  the  Student  Co-operative  Association. 


44  Teachers  Collkgb  Bitijjitin 

SUMMARY  OF  FEES 

(Subject  to  Change) 

STUDETNTS  LIVING  AT  THE  COLLEGE 
First  Semester 

Elemen-  Second-    Art        Bus.      Home    Music 
tary         ary  Ed.        Ed.       Ec.  Ed.     Ed. 

Description  Ed.         Ed. 

Amount  Due  Sept.  8-10,  1953 

Contingent  Fee ?  22.50  $  22.50  $  31.50  $  28.50  $  36.00  $  45.00 

Room,  Board  &  Laundry  108.00     108.00     108.00    108.00     108.00    108.00 
Total  Due  Common- 
wealth of  Pa. $130.50  $130.50  $139.50  $136.50  $144.00  $153.00 

Activities  Fee — Total  Due 

Students  Co-operative 

Ass'n.    $  15.00  $  15.00  $  15.00  $  15.00  $  15.00  $  15.00 

Amount  Due  Nov.  2-7,  1953  ' 

Contingent  Fee $  22.50  $  22.50  $  31.50  $  28.50  $  36.00  $  46.00 

Room,  Board  &  Laundry  108.00     108.00     108.00    108.00    108.00    108.00 
Total  Due  Common- 
wealth of  Pa. $130.50  $130.50  $139.50  $136.50  $144.00  $153.00 

Total— First  Semester      $276.00  $276.00  $294.00  $288.00  $303.00  $321.00 
Fees  for  the  Second  Semester  are  the  same  as  the  above. 

STUDENTS  NOT  LIVING  AT  THE  COLLEGE 
First  Semester 

Elemen-  Second-    Art        Bus.      Home    Music 
tary         ary  Ed.        Ed.       Ec.  Ed.     Ed. 
Description                        Ed.         Ed. 
Amount  due  Sept.  8-10,  1953 
Contingent  Fee — Total 
Due  Common- 
wealth of  Pa. $  22.50  $  22.50  $  31.50  $  28.50  $  36.00  $  45.00 

Activities  Fee — Total  Due 

Students  Co-operative 

Ass'n.    $  15.00  $  15.00  $  15.00  $  15.00  $  15.00  $  15.00 

Amount  Due  Nov.  2-7,  1953 
Contingent  Fee — Total 
Due  Common- 
wealth of  Pa. $  22.50  $  22.50  $  31.50  $  28.50  $  36.00  $  45.00 

Total— First  Semester      $  60.00  $  60.00  $  78.00  $  72.00  $  87.00  $105.00 
Fees  for  the  Second  Semester  are  the  same  as  the  above. 

If  Advance  Reservation  Deposit  of  $10.00  has  been  paid,  please 
deduct  $10.00  from  the  September  payment  due  the  Commonwealth. 

Payment  for  the  entire  semester  may  be  made  in  September  and 
January. 


THE  CURRICULA 


46  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

DEPARTMENT  OF  ART  EDUCATION 

Orval  Kipp,  Director 

The  Art  Department  of  the  State  Teachers  College,  Indiana,  Penn- 
sylvania, presents  an  approved  curriculum  leading  to  the  degree  of 
Bachelor  of  Science  in  Art  Education.  Graduates  of  this  curriculum 
receive  from  the  State  Department  of  Public  Instruction  the  College 
Provisional  Certificate  which  certifies  them  to  teach  and  supervise  art 
in  the  elementary  and  secondary  schools  of  the  Commonwealth. 

Opportunities  in  art  are  limited  only  by  the  initiative  and  imagina- 
tion of  the  individual,  for  any  degree  of  talent  can  find  a  useful  and 
important  place  among  the  three  hundred  professions  which  require  art 
training.  The  teaching  profession  needs  art  teachers  of  good  character 
with  highly  developed  artistic  ability,  broad  cultural  background,  and  a 
sound  philosophy  of  education.  Art  education  offers  to  outstanding 
high  school  graduates  the  opportunity  to  contribute  a  lifetime  of  service 
to  their  country. 

Student  teaching,  the  ultimate  goal  of  Indiana's  Art  Curriculum,  puts 
to  work  the  theory  and  practice  of  art  in  relation  to  education.  In  the 
senior  year,  student  teaching  and  conferences  give  opportunity  for  varied 
practical  experiences  in  the  Keith  School  and  in  the  public  schools. 
Eligibility  requirements  for  student  teaching  are  outlined  on  page  39  of 
this  catalog.  They  include  three  years  of  college  study  and  preparation 
during  which  the  qualifications  for  Junior  Standing  have  been  dem- 
onstrated. 

The  college  maintains  a  placement  bureau  for  the  convenience  of 
its  graduates  and  the  Art  Department  cooperates  fully  with  the  place- 
ment bureau  by  assisting  graduates  to  obtain  positions  and  experienced 
teachers  to  obtain  advancement. 

A  student's  expenses  for  a.  college  year  of  thirty-six  weeks  amount 
to  approximately  $588.  Books  and  supplies  are  extra.  These  fees  are 
subject  to  change.    The  budget  for  a  semester  includes: 

Contingent  fee  (payable  in  two  installments) $  63.03 

Housing  Fee i 216.00 

Activity  Fee 15.00 

$294.00 


Indiana   Catalogue   Numbeu 


47 


CURRICULUM  IN  ART  EDUCATION 


Sequence  of  courses  subject  to  change  for  administrative  purposes 


FIRST   SEMESTER 


SECOND    SEMESTER 


Hours 
Clock  Semester 


Drawing  and  Painting..  6 
Drawing     and     Composi- 
tion        4 

Survey  of  Art    4 

Communication      I     ....  5 
English    I    (3-S)   and 
Speech   I    (2-2) 

Professional    Orientation  3 

Health    2 

li 


n 


Hours 
Clock  S«meat«r 


Advanced  Color  and   De- 
sign      

Drawing    and     Lettering 

Elem.    Color  and    Design 

Mechanical   Drawing    . . . 

Communication.     11    .... 
English  II   (3-3)  and 
Speech  II  (2-2) 

Introduction    to    Music. 

Physical   Education   I    . . 


U 


I 
1? 


THIRD  SEMESTER 

Commercial   Art    6 

Modeling      4 

Pottery       4 

General  Psychology  ....  3 

World  Culture  I    5 

Literature  I   (2-2)   and 
History    of   Civiliza- 
tion I  (3-3) 

Physical  Education  II..  2 

24 


16 


FOURTH  SEMESTER 

Aesthetics     2 

Art   History    2 

Interior  Design   4 

Crafts  in  Elem.  Schools.  4 
Educational    Psych,    and 

Eval.  Tech 3 

World  Culture  II    5 

Literature  II  (2-2)  and 

History  of  Civilization 

II  (3-3) 

Physical   Education    III.  2 

ii 


17 


FIFTH   SEMESTER 

Costume  Design    4 

Theater  Arts    6 

Elementary        Industrial 

Arts    4 

Advanced    Crafts    6 

Basic   Biology    4 

History  of  U.  S.  and  Pa.  3 

27 


16 


SIXTH  SEMESTER 

Art    in   Elem.    Education  2 

Art  in  Second.  Education  2 
Advan.    Oil    and    W.    C. 

Painting       4 

Pictorial  Expression  and 

Illustration     4 

Industrial    Design    6 

Basic  Physical  Science.  .  4 

World  Geography 3 

25 


2 
S 
3 
3 

17 


SEVENTH    SEMESTER 


Art  Elective 8  4 

Graphic    Media    4  2 

American    Government.  .  3  3 
Home    and    Family    Liv- 
ing or  Introduction  to 

Philosophy      3  3 

Audio    Visual    Education  3  2 


SEVENTH   SEMESTER 
OR  EIGHTH 

Student  Teaching   30  12 

Professional      Practicum 

including    School    Law     2  2 

31  14 


21 


14 


48  Teachers -College  Bulletin 

DEPARTMENT  OF  BUSINESS  EDUCATION 

G.  G.  Hill,  Director 

The  State  Department  of  Public  Instruction  has  especially  de- 
signated the  State  Teachers  College  at  Indiana  as  one  in  which  teachers 
of  business  for  the  high  schools  of  the  Commonwealth  may  be  trained. 
The  curriculum  is  four  years  in  length,  leading  to  the  degree  of  Bachelor 
of  Science  in  Education.  Those  who  complete  the  work  as  outlined  are 
prepared  either  to  supervise  or  teach  business  subjects  in  any  of  the 
high  schools  of  the  Commonwealth  and  are  certificated  accordingly.  An 
excellent  opportunity  is  available  here  for  men  and  women  of  high 
calibre  who  possess  the  ability,  personality,  and  ambition  requisite  for 
success  in  this  type  of  work. 

Equipment.  The  department  is  well  equipped  throughout  with  a 
full  supply  of  modern  office  machines.  Adding  machines,  calculating 
machines,  banking  machines,  multigraphs,  mimeographs,  mimeoscopes, 
addressographs,  dictaphones,  files  and  cabinets,  and  other  up-to-date 
efficiency  devices  of  modern  business  gives  the  students  a  practical 
knowledge  of  the  time-savers  and  system  units  found  in  modern  business. 

The  Chamber  of  Commerce.  A  Chamber  of  Commerce  is  organized 
in  connection  with  the  Business  Education  Department.  Frequent  op- 
portunity is  afforded  for  public  discussion  on  current  popular  topics 
applicable  to  the  work.  This  organization  fosters  the  formation  and 
development  of  commercial  clubs  and  similar  organizations  in  the  high 
schools,  wherever  the  assistance  is  desired,  and  helps  to  promote  the 
work  of  such  organizations. 

The  Business  Institute  in  the  fall  and  the  Merchandise  Fair  in  the 
spring  are  two  of  the  great  annual  events  sponsored  by  this  department. 
Thousands  of  visitors  from  this  and  other  states  attend  these  gatherings. 

Business  Practice  Department.  This  is  a  complete  business  com- 
munity in  itself,  and  includes  not  only  the  procedure  but  also  the  actual 
atmosphere  and  environment  of  modern  business.  It  is  equipped  for 
efficient  and  up-to-date  work. 

Expenses.  The  expense  for  a  college  year  of  36  weeks  will  amount 
to  aiboHt  $576.00  for  boarding  students.  This  will  cover  board,  room, 
laundry,  books,  and  department  fees.  The  costs  for  one  semester  are 
itemized  below,  but  are  subject  to  change. 

Contingent  Fee  (Payable  in  two  installments) $  57.00 

Housing  Fee  (Payable  in  two  installments) 216.00 

Activity  Fee — 15.00 

$288.00 


Indiana   Catalogue   Number  49 

CURRICULUM  IN  BUSINESS  EDUCATION 

Sequence  of  courses  subject  to  change  for  administrative  purposes 

FIRST   SEMESTER  SECOND    SEMESTER 

Hours  Hour* 

Clock  Semester  Clock  Semester 

Health        2             2           Physical  Education  I    . .     2  1 

Communlcitlons   1    6             5           Communlratlons   II    ....      6  6 

(or)  English  1  (3-3)  (or)    English    II    (3-3) 

&  Speech  I   (2-2)  &  Speech  II  ..      (2-2) 

Introduction  to  Art 3             2           Introduction    to   Music.      3  2 

Basic    Biology    4              3            Kconomics  I    3  3 

Professional    Orientation     6             3           Business   Mathematics   13  3 

Economic    Geography    .  .      8             3           Typewriting  I    B  2 

THIRD  SEMESTER 

Combined  Stenog.  Acctg.  Selling 

Sequence       Seq.        Seq.  8eq. 

Physical  Education  II   2—1         2—1         2—1  2—1 

Literature  I   2—2         2—2         2—2  2—2 

Mathematics  of  Finance  2—2         2—2         2—2  2—2 

Accounting    I     5 — .1          5 — 3          5 — 3  5 — 3 

Business  Law   I    3 — 3          3 — 3          3 — 3  3 — 3 

Business  Org.  &  Finance   2—2         2 — 2         2—2  2 — 2 

Shorthand  I   5—3         B— 3 

Typewriting  II   B — 2         5 — 2         B — 2  6 — 2 

FOURTH  SEMESTER 

Physical   Education    III    2—1         2—1         2—1  2—1 

General "  Psychology    3 — 3         3—3         3 — 3  3 — 3 

Literature  II   2—2         2—2         2—2  2—2 

Busines.s  Law   II    3—3          3 — 3          3—3  3—3 

Accounting  II    6 — 3                           5 — 3  5 — 3 

Shorthan(J    II     5 — 3  6 — 3 

Typewriting  III    5 — 2         B — 2 

Elective       8 — 3         3 — 3  3 — 3 

FIFTH  SEMESTER 

Educ'l.  Psych.  &  Evaluative  Techniques   3 — 3         3 — 3         3 — 3  3 — 3 

Problems  in  Business  Education   3 — 3         3 — 3         3 — 3  3 — 3 

Business    Correspondence    3 — 3          3 — 3          3 — 3  3 — 3 

Sales  &Ret.  Selling  I   3—3         3—3         3—3  3—3 

Accounting   TU    3 — 3  3 — 3 

Shorthand   III — Transcription    5 — 3  5 — 3 

Clerical  Prac.  &  Office  Machines  5 — 3  5 — 3 

Elective       2 — 2 

SIXTH  SEMESTER 

History    of    Civilization     3 — 3         3 — 3         3 — 3  3 — 3 

Audio-Visual    Education    3 — 2          3 — 2          3 — 2  3 — 2 

Methods  of  Teaching  Bus.  Courses 3 — 3          3 — 3          3 — 3  3 — 3 

Accounting    IV    3 — 3  3 — 3 

Secretarial    Practice    .5 — 2  R — 2 

Clerical  Prac.  &  Office  Machines 5 — 2         5 — 2 

Sales  &  Ret.  Selling  II 3 — 3  3 — 3 

Elective       3—3         4 — 4  4 — 4 

SEVENTH  SEMESTER 

History  of  U.  S.  and  Penna 3 — 3         3 — 3         3 — 3  3 — 3 

Basic  Physical   Science    4 — 3         4 — 3         4 — 3  4 — 3 

American    Government     3 — 3          3 — 3          3 — 3  3 — 3 

Home    &    Family    Living    or   Introduction    to 

Philosophy    3 — 3          3 — 3          3 — 3  3 — 3 

Accounting   V    ;~ 3 — 3  3 — 3 

Retailing  III — Store  Practice    > IS — 6  18 — 6 

Elective       3—3         2—2 

EIGHTH  SEMESTER 

Student    Teaching    30—12     30—12     30—12  30—12 

Professional    Practicum    2 — 2         2 — 2         2 — 2  2 — 2 


50  Teachers  College  Bulletin 


DEGREE  CURRICULUM  FOR  DENTAL  HYGIENISTS 

The  Board  of  Presidents  of  the  State  Teachers  Colleges  approved  on 
November  17,  1950  a  curriculum  for  Dental  Hygienists  leading  to  the 
degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Education.  The  requirements  shown 
below  must  be  met. 

1.  The  satisfactory  completion  of  an  accredited  two-year  cur- 
riculum for  the  preparation  of  Dental  Hygienists  approved 
by  the  St-ate  Dental  Council  and  Examining  Board. 

2.  The  licensing  of  the  student  by  the  proper  state  authorities. 

3.  The  satisfactory  completion  in  addition  thereto  of  64  semester 
hours  of  professional  and  general  education  courses  distrib- 
uted as  follows: 

General  Education 42 

Communications  I  &  II 10 

or  English  I  &  II  (6-6) 
and  Speech  I  &  II  (4-4) 
Fine  Arts 4 

Introduction  to  Art  (3-2) 
Introduction  to  Music  (3-2) 
Geography    6 

World  Geography  (3-3) 
Geography  of  United  States  and  Pa.  (3-3) 
World  Culture  I  &  II 10 

Social  Studies  I  «&  II  (6-6) 
Literature  I  &  II  (4-4) 
Social  Studies ^ 12 

American  Government  (3-3) 

Principles  of  Economics  (3-3) 

History  of  United   States  and  Pa.  I   (3-3) 

Principles  of  Sociology  (3-3) 

Education   11 

Professional  Orientation 3 

General  Psychology 3 

Educational  Psychology  and  Evaluation 

Techniques  3 

Audio-Visual  Education 2 

Electives 11 

Total 64 

In  each  category  above,  credit  will  be  given  for  equivalent  courses 
pursued  in  the  two-year  Dental  Hygiene  curriculum.  In  such  cases  students 
will  be  permitted  to  increase  their  electives  by  the  number  of  semester 
hours  so  credited. 

Electives  may  be  chosen  with  the  approval  of  the  Dean  of  Instruction 
from  any  field  or  curriculum  offered  at  the  college  In  which  the  student  Is 
enrolled.  . 

Tn  the  case  of  Dental  Hygienists  who  have  nad  less  than  2  years  of 
special  training  on  the  basis  of  which  they  have  been  licensed  by  the  State 
Dental  Council  and  Examining  Board  such  persons  will  pursue  additional 
courses  in  college  to  fulfill  the  requirements  for  the  de^ee. 


Indiana   Catalooub  Number  5t 

DIVISION  OF  ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION 

Irene  Russell,  Director  of  Division 

The  elementary  curriculum  is  planned  to  prepare  students  to  teach 
children  who  are  enrolled  in  kindergarten,  primary  and  intermediate 
grades.  Upon  completion  of  work  in  this  curriculum,  the  student  will, 
receive  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Education  and  a  College 
Provisional  Certificate  which  will  entitle  the  graduate  to  teach  in  the 
public  schools  of  Pennsylvania. 

During  the  four  years  of  preparation,  emphasis  is  placed  on  the 
philosophy  that  the  function  of  the  elementary  teacher  is  to  guide  the 
development  of  children  and  to  provide  learning  experiences  which  are 
real  and  meaningful,  and  planned  to  meet  the  individual  needs  of 
children  in  the  classroom. 

Professional  courses  give  the  student  an  understanding  of  child  de- 
velopment, a  knowledge  of  elementary  school  materials  and  procedures, 
and  an  appreciation  of  the  function  of  the  public  school  in  community 
life.  Opportunities  are  provided  for  continuous  group  experiences  with 
childi-en  of  elementary  school  age.  These  experiences  take  place  with 
children  in  different  community  situations  and  culminate  with  supervised 
participation  and  student  teaching  in  the  Keith  School  and  in  the  ele- 
mentary schools  of  Indiana. 

Students  in  the  elementary  division  are  members  of  the  Elementary 
Club  which  is  affiliated  with  the  Association  for  Childhood  Education 
International.  This  organization  sponsors  many  professional  and  social 
activities  during  the  college  year. 

Teaching  in  the  elementary  schools  of  Pennsylvania  provides  many 
opportunities  for  capable  yourfg  men  and  women.  A  single  salary  schedule 
with  yearly  increments  is  maintained.  Teaching  experience  in  elementary 
grades  provides  students  interested  in  graduate  study  with  an  excellent 
background  for  specialization  and  further  advancement. 

FEES 
(Subject  to  Change)  Semester 

Contingent  Fee  (payable  in  two  installments) $  45.00 

Housing  Fee  (payable  in  two  installments) 216.00 

Activity  Fee 15.00 

$276.00 
(Alio  see  pages  40  to  44) 


82 


Teachers  College  Bulletin 


CURRICULUM  IN  ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION 

Sequence  of  courses  subject  to  change  for  administrative  reasom 


FIRST   SEMESTER 

Hours 
Clock  Semester 

Communications  I    6  6 

or  English  I  (3-3) 
and  Speech  I   (2-2) 
Professional    Orientation     3  3 

Basic   Biology    4  3 

Health    2  2 

World  Geography 3  3 

17  16 


SECOND    SEMESTER 

Hours 
Clock  Semester 


Communications    II 5 

or  English  II    (3-3) 
and  Speech  II   (2-2) 

Introduction  to  Art 8 

introduction    to    Music.  3 

Basic  Physical  Science..  4 

Physical   Education   I...  2 
Geography  of  the  United 

States  and   Penna.    ...  3 

20 


IS 


THIRD  SEMESTER 

FOURTH    SEMESTER 

World  Culture  I 

6 

6 

World  Culture  II    

6 

( 

or  History  of 

or  History  of 

Civilization  I   (3-3) 

Civilization  II  (3-3) 

and 

and 

Literature  I  (2-2) 

Literature  II  (3-2) 

Ifusic   for    the    Element- 

Audio-Visual    Education 

I 

S 

ary  Grades   

2 

2 

Teaching  of  Music  in  the 

Physical   Education   II.. 

2 

1 

Elementary    Grades . . . 

4 

s 

Science  for  the  Element- 

Teaching of  Art  in  the 

ary  Grades    

3 

3 

Elementary    Grades... 

4 

8 

Art   for   the   Elementary 

Physical  Education  III.. 

2 

1 

Grades    

2 
3 

2 
3 

Electives    

2 

2 

Electives   

— 

_ 

20 

le 

17 

16 

FIFTH  SEMESTER 

SIXTH   SEMESTER 

History  of  the  United 

History  of  the  United 

States  and  Penna.  I. . . 

3 

3 

States  and  Penna.  II.. 

S 

s 

Language    Arts    in    the 

Child    Development 

3 

t 

Elementary    Grades... 

9 

9 

Social      Living      in      the 

or   Teaching   of    Read- 

Elementary   Grades... 

9 

» 

ing      (3-3),     Language 

Teaching  of  Arithmetic 

(8-3).    Children's    Lit- 

(3-3), Elementary  Sci- 
ence    (3-3),    Social 

erature   (3-3) 

General     Psychology 

3 

3 

Studies  and  Geography 

Teaching  of   Health   and 

(3-3) 

Physical   Education . . . 

3 

2 

Educational     Psychology 
and     Evaluative     tech- 

Ti 

17 

niques     

3 

t 

18 


18 


SEVENTH    SEMESTER 

American  Citizenship  . .  6 
Option  I  Home  and  Fam- 
ily Living  (3-3),  and 
American  Government 
(3-3),  Option  II  Intro- 
duction to  Philosophy 
(3-3).  and  American 
Government  (3-3) 
Electives    9 

15 


15 


EIGHTH    SEMESTER 

Student  Teaching  and 
Direction  of  Pupil  Ac- 
tivities          30  12 

Professional      Practicum 

including    School    Law     2  2 

32  14 


A  student  may  be  given  the  privilege  of  taking  an  examination  in  any 
subject  matter  area  for  the  purpose  of  securing  exemption  from  taking  a 
course.  A  student  sTiall  be  given  credit  for  a  course  in  which  he  registers 
and  in  which  he  demonstrates  competence  by  a  qualifying  examination. 


SFECZAZ.IZATXOH   AZTD    Z:X.ECTIVES 

Provisional  ColteKe  Certificates  issued  on  the  basis  of  the  four  year  elementary 
curriculum  are  valid  for  icindergarten  and  Grades  I  and  VI  inclusive  and  for  Grades 
VII  and  VIII  if  not  in  a  regularly  organized  and  approved  junior  high  school  or  in 
junior-senior  high   school. 


Indiana   Oatalooux  Numbkb  Bg 


DIRECTORY  OF  DESCRIPTIONS  OF  REQUIRED  COURSES 
FOR  THE  ELEMENTARY  CURRICULUM 

D«Kriptioa 

OU    P»ff« 

AKT 

Introduction    to    Art    M 

Art  for  the  Elementary  Grades 70 

Teaching  of  Art  in  the  Elementary  Oradea 70 

EDUCATION 

Professional    Orientation    77 

Audio-Visual     Education     77 

LanRuaKe  Arts  in  the  Elementary  Grades 79 

Children'^    Literature    79 

Teaching  of  Reading: 80 

Teaching  of  LanKuagre   80 

General    Psychology   77 

Child   Development    I 79 

Educational   Psychology   and   Evahiatlve  Techniques   77 

Social    Living    79 

Student  Teaching  and  Direction  of  Student  Activities 78 

Professional  Practicum  including  School  Law 78 

ENGLISH  AND  SPEECH 

Communication   I   and   II -~....— ...» — 8S 

Literature    11    ._ — ---.--■.-■—■--.-  84 

GEOGRAPHY 

World    Geography    92 

Geography  of  the  United  States  and  Pennsylv&nia ~_ .  9S 

HEALTH  AND  PHYSICAL  EDUCATION 

Health     »« 

Physical  Education  I 9« 

Physical  Education  II  and  III 97 

Teaching  of  Health  and  Physical  Education »7 

MATHEMATICS 

Arithmetic   In   Social   Living   108 

MUSIC 

Introduction    to    Music   112 

Music  for  the  Elementary  Grades 128 

Teaching  Music  in  the  Elementary  Grades 128 

SCIENCE 

Basic    Biology    12i 

Basic  Physical   Science  124 

Science  for  the  Elementary  Grades 182 

Teaching  Science  in  the  Elementary  Grades 182 

SOCIAL  STUDIES 

History  of  Civilization  I  and  11 ISS 

History  of  the  United  States  &  Penna.  I  and  II 133 

Teaching  Geography  &  Social  Studies  in  the  Elementary  Grades 95 

American    Citizenship    134 

American    Government   184 

DIRECTORY  OF  DESCRIPTIONS   OF  ELECTIVE   COURSES 
RECOMMENDED   FOR  THE    ELEMENTARY   CURRICULUM 

Conservation   of   Natural   Resources   127 

Creative  Activities   in   the  Elementary    School   .._  80 

Diagnostic    and    Remedial    Reading    80 

Education  for  Family  Living 104 

General    Safety    Education    98 

Geojrraphy  of  United  States  and  Canada 94 

Industrial    Arts    70 

School  and  Community 79 

Speech   Development   and    Improvement .   -  80 

Teaching  the  Exceptional  '^hild 79 


54  Teachehs  College  Bulletin 

DEPARTMENT  OF  HOME  ECONOMICS 

Opal  T,  Rhodes,  Director  of  Department 


Graduates  from  this  department  receive  a  College  Provisional  Cer- 
tificate valid  for  any  vocational  or  general  home  economics  position  in 
the  public  schools  of  Pennsylvania.  They  are  qualified  to  manage  a 
school  cafeteria.  A  minor  in  some  fields  for  certification  is  possible.  The 
Bachelor  of  Science  degree  in  Home  Economics,  which  they  receive  is 
recognized  for  entrance  to  graduate  courses  by  all  leading  colleges  and 
universities  . 


Employment  opportunities  are  unexcelled.  Three  to  five  times  the 
number  of  graduates  could  be  placed  annually.  All  are  well  qualified 
for  a  later  profession,  homemaking.  Members  from  the  upper  half  of 
their  high  school  graduating  class  and  others  qualified  to  do  college  work 
are  admitted. 


The  home  economics  curriculum  includes  a  good  general  education 
as  well  as  instruction  in  all  phases  of  homemaking.  Of  special  interest 
are:  the  nursery  school  for  children  two  and  three  years  of  age;  the 
cafeteria  where  laboratory  school  children  and  commuting  students  and 
faculty  are  fed  while  juniors  learn  to  manage  a  school  lunch  program; 
the  home  economics  club  which  is  affiliated  with  the  state  and  national 
organizations;  two  home  management  houses  with  babies  under  a  year 
of  age  where  senior  students  learn  all  phases  of  homemaking;  student 
teaching  as  residents  of  a  community  similar  to  the  one  where  they  will 
soon  be  teaching;  adult  education  experience  and  cooperation  with  the 
elementary  teachers  and  student  teachers  at  the  campus  school;  and  va- 
cation experiences  in  their  own  homes  or  as  employees  in  positions  that 
will  help  them  develop  confidence,  poise,  dependability  and  self-assur- 
ance as  well  as  skills  and  managerial  ability. 


'Expenses  for  the  school  year  of  3S  weeks  amoont  to  $606.00.    The 
costs  for  one  semester  are  itemized  below,  but  are  subject  to  change. 

Contingent  Fee   (payable  in  two  installments)   $  72.00 

Housing  Fee 216.00 

Activity  Fee —     15.00 

$303.00 


Indiana   Catalogue   Numbkh 


55 


CURRICULUM  IN  HOME  ECONOMICS  EDUCATION 


Sequence  of  courses  subject  to  change  for  administrative  purposes 


FIRST   SEMESTER 

Hours 
Clock  Semester 

Communications   I    5  5 

English  I   (3-3)  and 

Speech  I  (2-2) 
Professional      Orientation  4  3 

(Inoludingr  Home  Eco- 
nomics Orientation) 
Household  Care  & 

Equipment       4  2 

Clothing    I     6  3 

Basic   Biology    4  3 

23  16 


SECOND  SEMESTER 

Hours 
Clock  Semester 

Communications   II    6  5 

English    II    (3-3)    and 

Speech  II   (2-2) 

Introduction  to  Art 3  2 

Foods   I    6  S 

Health      2  2 

Physical   Education  I    ...  2  1 
Basic  Physical 

Science     4  S 

ii        T« 


THIRD  SEMESTER 


World  Culture  I   5 

History  of 

Civilization  I  (3-3)  and 

Literature  I  (2-2) 

Introduction   of   Music...  3 

Inorganic  Chemistry    ....  6 

Physical   Education   II...  2 

Home  Care  of  the  Sick..  2 

Foods   II    6 


Principles  of  Design 4 

27 


2 

3 
1 
1 
3 
2 

17 


FOURTH  SEMESTER 

"World  Culture  II 5 

History    of    Civilization 
II  (3-3)  and 

Literature  II    (2-2) 

Nutrition      5 

Organic  and  Biological 

Chemistry      5 

Physical    Education   III..    2 
Clothing  for  the 

Individual      3 

Clothing    II 6 

26 


16 


FIFTH  SEMESTER 

World    Geography    3 

School   Lunchroom 

Mgt.    I    9 

Bacteriology       4 

General  Psychology 3 

Audio  Visual  Education..  3 
Textiles  and 

Clothing  Economics.   ..  4 


26 


SIXTH  SEMESTER 

3  History  of  U.  S.  and 

Pennsylvania      3 

3  Clothing  III    6 

2  Educational      Psychology 

3  and  Evaluative 

2  Techniques    3 

Family    Relations    2 

2  Home  Furnishing 4 

—  Housing     2 

15  20 


3 
2 
S 

2 

16 


SEVENTH   SEMESTER 

American   Government    . .   3  3 

Elective      5  5 

Vocational   Home  Ec. 

Methods     and     Student 

Teaching      15  6 

Consumer   Economics    ...   2  2 

25  16 


EIGHTH   SEMESTER 

Child  Dev,  &  Nursery 

School    Child    6 

Home   Management    9 

Family    Finance    2 

Student    Teaching     15 

Prof.    Practicum    (includ- 
ing school  law)    2 

U 


11 


56  Teachers  College  Bitlletim 

DEPARTMENT  OF  MUSIC  EDUCATION 

Clbl  T.  Silvey,  Director 

The  State  Teachers  College  at  Indiana  is  authorized  by  the  State 
Department  of  Public  Instruction  to  offer  the  curriculum  for  the  prep- 
aration of  supervisors  and  special  teachers  of  music. 

Opportunities  in  Music  Education.  The  increased  recognition  of 
music  as  a  fundamental  part  of  our  educational  program  is  serving  to 
emphasize  to  superintendents  and  school  boards  the  importance  of 
selecting  as  the  music  teacher  an  individual  of  strong  character  and 
personality  who  has  a  soundly  developed  musicianship  and  a  broad 
educational  outlook. 

The  demand  for  well-prepared  teachers  capable  of  forceful  leadership 
in  music  is  such  as  to  offer  excellent  opportunity  for  future  success  to 
superior  high  school  graduates  whose  interest  and  abilities  lead  them 
to  select  the  teaching  of  music  as  their  profession. 

The  College  has  the  faculty  and  equipment  to  offer  and  to  carry 
out  successfully  every  phase  of  the  preparation  and  development  of  public 
school  music  teachers  and  supervisors. 

The  courses  in  the  Music  Education  curriculum  aim  to  prepare  the 
student  to  teach  music  in  the  elementary  and  high  school  grades.  Com- 
pletion of  the  degree  program  ordinarily  requires  four  years  (eight 
semesters)  of  study.  The  emphasis  throughout  is  upon  the  acquisition 
of  musicianship,  but  each  year  also  includes  certain  material  relating 
directly  to  the  teaching  of  music. 

FEES 

(Subject  to  change) 

The  fees  for  a  college  year  of  36  weeks  amount  to  $642.00.  The 
costs  for  one  semester  are  itemized  below,  but  are  subject  to  change. 
Books  and  supplies  are  extra.    Also  see  pages  40-44. 

Contingent  fee  (covering  the  cost  of  class  instruction, 

private  lessons,  and  piano  rental)  $  90.00 

Housing  Fee 216.00 

Activity  Fee i 15.00 


$321.00 


The  statement  on  Private  Instruction  Fees  found  under  Fees,  page  38, 
does  not  apply  to  the  students  enrolled  in  the  Music  Education  Curriculum. 
The  above  itemized  statement  of  costs '  includes  all  fees  charged  for 
enrollment  in  the  Music  Education  Curriculum. 


Indiana   Catalogue   Number 


67 


CURRICULUM  IN  MUSIC  EDUCATION 


Sequence  of  courses  subject  to  change  for  administrative  purposes 


FIRST   SEMESTER 

Hours 
Clock  Semester 

Communications  I    5  5 

English    I    (3-8) 

Speech   I   (2-2) 

Basic    Biology    4  3 

World  Geography 3  3 

Health  Education    2  2 

Solfeggio  I    3  2 

'Applied  Music   6  2 

23        17 


SECOND  SEMESTER 

Hours 
Clock  Semester 

Communications    II    S  S 

English  II  (3-3) 

Speech    II    (2-2) 
Basic  PTiysical  Sc. 

(Acoustics)    4  3 

Introduction  to  Art   3  2 

I'rofessional    Orientation..    3  3 

Physical  Edu. 

(Eurythmics  I)    2  I 

Solfeggio   II    3  2 

•Applied  Music   6         2 

26  18 


THIRD  SEMESTER 

World  Culture  I 5         5 

or   History   of   Civilization 

I  (3-3) 

and 

Literature  I  (2-2) 
Physical  Ed.  II 

(Eurythmics  II)    2  1 

Solfeggio   III    3  2 

Theory  of  Music  I 5         4 

•Applied  Music    9         3 

Survey  of  Music  Literature  2         1 
Conducting  I   (CThoral)    ...   3         1 

29       17 


FOURTH   SEMESTER 

World  Culture   TI    S 

or   Hi.'story   of   Civilization 

II   (3-3) 

and 

Literature  II  (2-2) 

Physical  Ed.   Ill    2 

Audio-Visual  Education...   3 

Theory  of  Music  II    5 

•Applied  Music    9 

Conducting   II 

(Instrumental)    3 

27 


16 


FIFTH   SEMESTER 

History  of  U.  S.  &  Pa.   ...    3  3 

General  Psychology 3  3 

Theory  of  Music  III 3  3 

History  of  Music  I 3  3 

Methods  I   (Elementary)..   4  3 

•Applied  Music   9  3 

25  18 


SIXTH   SEMESTER 

Elective    3  3 

Educational  Psychology 

and  Evaluative 

Techniques    3  3 

Theory  of  Music  IV 3  3 

History  of  Music  II 3  3 

Methods   II    (High   School)   3  2 

•Applied   Music    9  3 

24  17 


SEVENTH    SEMESTER 

Americnn  Pitizenship  ....  6 
Option  I  Home  and  Fam- 
ily Living  (3-3),  and 
American  Government 
(3-3).  Option  TI  Intro- 
duction to  Pliilosophy 
(3-3),  and  American  Gov- 
ernment (3-3) 
Methods  Ill(Instrumental)  3 

Orchestration   3 

•Applied  Music   3 

Music   (elective)    3 


13 


EIGHTH  SEMESTER 

Professional    Practicum...   2 
Student  Teaching  and 

Direction  of  Pupil 

Activities SO 

32 


12 
14 


*  See  Page  110  for  a  specific  outline  of  requirements  and  electives. 


53  Teacheks  College  Bulletin 

DEGREE  CURRICULUM  FOR  PUBLIC  SCHOOL  NURSES 

The  Board  of  Presidents  of  the  State  Teachers  Colleges  approved 
on  January  19,  1951  a  curriculum  for  Public  School  Nurses  leading  to 
the  'degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Education.  The  requirements  shown 
below  must  be  met. 

The  Curricular  and  Credentials  Committee  recommends  that  Teachers 
Colleges  in  Pennsylvania  confer  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science  in 
Education  upon  registered  nurses  who  meet  the  following  requirements: 

1.  The  satisfactory  completion  of  a  three  year  curriculum  in  an 
approved  school  of  nursing  and  registration  by  the  State  Board 
of  Examiners  for  the  Registration  of  Nurses  of  Pennsylvania. 

2.  The  satisfactory  completion  of  forty-five  (45)  semester  hours 
of  additional  preparation  distributed  as  follows: 

A.  Courses  Related  to  Public  School  Nursing 

Semester  Hours 

Public  School  Nursing 2 

Public  School  Organization 2 

Public  Health  Nursing 6 

Nutrition  and  Community  Health 2 

Family  Case  Work 3 

TOTAL  15 

B.  General  and  Professional  Education 

Semester  Hours 
History  of  the  United   States  and 

Pennsylvania  3 

Communications   6 

World  Culture 5 

American  Government 3 

Professional  Orientation  to 

Education   3 

Educational  Psychology 3 

Audio-Visual  Education 2 

Electives  6 

TOTAL  30 

GRAND  TOTAL—  45 

In  the  case  of  nurses  with  less  than  three  years  preparation  for 
registration,  such  persons  will  pursue  additional  courses  to  meet  the 
requirements  for  the  degree. 


Indiana   Catalogue  NuMOBn  69 

DIVISION  OF  SECONDARY  EDUCATION 

Joy  Mahacuek,  Director  of  Division 

Students  preparing  to  teach  the  academic  subjects  in  the  secondary 
school  will  choose  their  courses  from  the  curriculum  in  secondary  edu- 
cation. That  curriculum  is  four  years  in  length,  requires  128  semester 
hours  properly  chosen  for  completion,  and  leads  to  the  degree  of  Bache- 
lor of  Science  in  Education  and  the  Provisional  College  Certificate  which 
entitles  the  holder  to  teach  the  subjects  written  on  the  face  of  the 
certificate  in  any  junior  or  senior  high  school.  Besides  completing  the 
courses  listed  under  "Curriculum  in  Secondary  Education,"  a  student 
in  that  curriculum  must  meet  the  certification  requirements  in  two  fields, 
in  one  of  which  he  must  have  at  least  24  semester  hours,  and  in  the  other 
at  least  18  semester  hours.  He  may  choose  his  two  fields  from  the 
following:  aeronautics,  English,  French,  geography,  mathematics,  science, 
social  studies,  Spanish,  and  speech;  and  fit  the  necessary  courses  into 
his  program  as  electives. 

Students  should  note  that  requirements  for  specialization  in  some 
areas  are  above  the  minimums  listed.  For  course  descriptions  and  de- 
partment requirements  see  pages  64  to  136. 

Permanent  certification  is  secured  upon  the  completion  of  three  years 
of  successful  teaching  and  the  completion  of  six  semester  hours  of 
approved  work. 

There  are  excellent  opportunities  for  teachers  in  the  secondary  school. 
Trained  teachers  are  needed  pi  develop  its  changing  curriculum  and  to 
prepare  its  students  for  the  obligations  and  privileges  of  democracy. 

The  broad  background  and  Specific  knowledge  necessary  for  such 
teachers  can  be  obtained  by  completing  satisfactorily  the  required  courses, 
by  developing  thoroughly  their  major  interests  and  by  making  the  best 
use  of  their  professional  training  in  the  12  hours  of  student  teaching 
done  under  the  careful  supervision  of  training  teachers. 


FEES 

(Subject  to  Change)  Semester 

Contingent  Fee  (payable  in  two  installments) $  45.00 

Housing  Fee  (payable  in  two  installments) 216.00 

Activity  Fee 15.00 


$276.00 
(Also  see  pages  40  to  44). 


60 


Teachers  Collboe  Bui^lbtin 


CURRICULUM  IN  SECONDARY  EDUCATION 

Sequence  of  courses  subject  to  change  for  administrative  purposes 

FIRST   SEMESTER 

Hours 
Clock  Semester 


Communications  I    .... .  5  6 

or    English    I    (3-S) 

and  Speech  I   (2-2) 

Basic    Biology. 4  8 

Health    2  2 

World  Geography 3  3 

Blectives    2  2 

le  1?" 


THIRD  SEMESTER 
World   Culture    1 6  5 

or  History  of 

Civilization   I    (3-3) 

and 

Literature  1  (2-2^ 

Introduction  to  Art 3  2 

•Physical   Education   II..     2  1 

Science  in  Modern 

Civilization     3  3 

Blectives   6  6 

19  17 
FIFTH  SEMESTER 
History    of    the    United 

States  and  Penna.   I..     3  3 

Audio-Visual     Education     3  2 

General    Psychology  ....     3  3 

Blectives    8  8 

17  16 


SECOND    SEMESTER 

Hours 
Clock  Semester 

Communications  II    

or   English    II    (3-3) 
and    Speech    II    (2-2) 

Basic     Physical     Science 

Physical     Education    I.. 

Professional  Orientation 

Fundamentals  of 

Mathematics     

Electives    

5 

4 
2 
3 

3 

2 

5 

3 

1 
3 

8 
2 

19 

17 

FOURTH    SEMESTER 

World  Culture  II 

or   History  of 

Civilization  II  (3-3) 

and 

Literature  II  (2-2) 
Introduction    to   Music. 
Physical    Education     III 
Electives    

5 

3 

2 
9 

5 

2 

1 
9 

19  IT 


SIXTH  SEMESTER 
History    of    the    United 

States    and    Penna.    II     3  8 

Problems    of    Secondary 

Education  including 

Guidance    3  8 

Educational   Psychology 

and    Evaluative 

Techniques    3  8 

Electives    7  7 

16  16 

EIGHTH    SEMESTER 
Student      Teaching      and 

Direction     of     Student 

Activities     30  12 

Professional      Practicum 

including    ScTiool    Law     2  2 

32  14 


SEVENTH    SEMESTER 

American   Citizenship    .  .      6  6 

Option  I  Home  and 
Family  Living  (3-3), 
and  American  Govern- 
ment (3-3),  Option  II 
Introduction  to  Phil- 
osophy (3-3),  and 
American  Government 
(3-3) 

Electives      9  9 

Is        Is 

Graduation  requirements  for  this  curriculum  include  specialization  in 
Dot  less  than   two  teaching  fields. 

1.  The  first  field  shall  require  not  fewer  than  thirty  (30)  semester 
hours  except  the  General  Field  of  Science  requiring  thirty-eight 
(38)  hours  and  English  requiring  thirty-five  (35)  hours.  The 
fields  included  in  this  category  are: 

Biological  Science.  History,  Social  Science,  Social  Studies  and 
Physical  Science  and  not  fewer  than  twenty-four  (24)  Semester 
Hours  in:  Aeronautics,  Chemistry.  Foreign  Languages,  Geo- 
graphy,  Mathematics,  Physics  and  Speech. 

2.  The  second  field  shall  require  not  fewer  semester  hours  than  the 
minimum  required  for  certification,  (in  most  cases,  eighteen). 

A  student  may  be  given  the  privilege  of  taking  an  examination  in  any 
subject  matter  area  for  the  purpose  of  securing  exemption  from  taking  a 
required  course.  A  student  shall  be  given  credit  for  a  course  in  which  he 
registers  and  In  which  he  demonstrates  competence  by  a  qualifying  ex- 
amination. 


For  course  descriptions  see  pages  65  to  136. 


Indiana   Catalogue  Numuer 


61 


THE   REQUIRED   AND   ELECTIVE  COURSES   IN    EACH   FIELD 
OFFERED  IN  THE  CURRICULUM  IN  SECONDARY  EDUCATION 


Hours 
Se- 
Clock  mester 
A2l&OZrAT7TZC8 

First   Field— 24  s.  h. 
Second  Field — 18  s.  h. 

Regnired: 

Aviation  Mathematics  ....   3         3 

Aircraft      Communications 

and   Regulations 3         3 

General  Service  and  Struc- 
ture of  Aircraft 3  3 

Aerial     Navigation 3         3 

Meteorology    3  3 

Aerodynamics  and   Theory 

of  Flight.,.. 3         3 

BlectiveB : 

Aircraft    Engines 12  6 

Identification  of  Aircraft. .    3  3 

Climatology    3  3 

Commercial  Air  Transpor- 
tation       3  8 

Plight     Experience 3-6 

8ZOX.OOXCAZi     SOZEKCB 

First    Field — 30  s.  h. 

Second     Field — 18  s.  h. 
Basic  Biology  may  be  omitted... 
Beqaired: 

Botany   1 6         4 

Botany    II 6  4 

Zoology    1 6  4 

55oology    II 6         4 

•Teaching    Science    In    the 

Secondary  School   3         3 

Slectlves:    at  least  one  course  to  be 
selected    from    each    group    below: 

Group   1 — Field   Coorstts 

Field  Botany   5  3 

Ornithology    5  3 

Entomology 5  3 

Ecology    5  3 

Field    Zoology 5  3 

Conservation    5  8 

Oroup  2 — laboratory  Coorses 

Vertebrate  Anatomy    6  3 

Physiology    5  3 

Microbiology     6  3 

Parasitology 5  3 

Genetics 5  3 

CHSMISTBY 

First  Field — 30  s.  h. 
Second    Field — 18  s.  h. 

Bequired:    Basic    Physical 

Science  may  be  omitted 

Inorganic   Chemistry  I....    6  4 

Inorganic  Chemistry   II...    6  4 

Physics     I     6  4 

Physics     II     6  4 

Qualitative    Analysis     ....   7  3 

Quantitative     Analysis....    7  3 
•Teaching    Science    in    the 

Secondary  School    3  3 

Electives : 

Organic  Cbemistry  1 6  4 

Organic  Chemistry  II 5  3 

Biological    Chemistry 6  3 

Physical  Chemistry   5  3 

Collodial     Chemistry 6  3 

Industrial   Chemistry    ....  5  3 


Hours 
Se- 
Clock  nnest«r 

Chemistry     of     Food     and 

Nutrition      6  3 

Water  Analysis 4  2 

EIfai>ISH 

First    Field — 35  s.  h. 
Second   Field— 18  S.  h. 

Begnired: 

iCommunlcationr  ;  I      (5-5)   3  3 

'Communication*   II    (5-5)    3  8 

World   Culture   I    (5-5) 2  2 

World   Culture   II    (5-6),..   2  2 

•Recent    Trends   in    Teach- 
ing   English     3  8 

Blectivss:  at   least  one  course  to  b€ 
selected    from    each    group    below: 

Oroup    1 — Survey    ConrieB 

American    Literature     ....  3  3 

English    Literature    3  3 

American    Poetry    3  3 

American    Prose    3  3 

Children's    Literature    and 

Story    Telling    3  8 

World   Literature    3  8 

Group   2 — Period    Courses 

Pre-Shakespearean 

Literature   3         8 

Shakespeare    3         3 

Eighteenth  Century 

Literature    3  3 

The  Romantic  Movement  3  8 
Victorian    Literature 3         3 

Group   3 — Uterary 
form   courses 

Criticism    8  8 

Modern    Drama    3  3 

The  Novel  to  1870 3  3 

C^ontemporary   Novel    3  3 

Short   Story    3  3 

Essay    3  3 

Contemporary   Poetry    ....  3  3 

Literature  of  Biography..  3  3 

Group  4 — Composition 

Advanced    Composition     . .    3  8 

English    Philology    3  3 

Creative   Writing    3  5 

Journalism    3  8 

FBBNCH 

First    Field — 24  8.  h. 
Second    Field — 18  B.  b. 

Required: 
Elementary  French 

I  and  II    3  » 

Intermediate   French 

III  and  IV 3         8 

Advanced   French 

Language     3  3 

French  Culture    3         « 

Electives: 

French    Literature    to    the 

Nineteenth  Century    ....    3         3 
Nineteenth    Century 

French    Literature    3  3 

Twentieth   Century 

French    Literature    3  3 

Special  Projects   3         3 


62 


Teachers  College  Bulletin 


Hours 
Se- 
Clock  mester 

GENEKAI.   FISIiS    07   SCIENCE 

First    Field    Only — 38  s.  h. 

Seanlred:    Basic    Biology    and    Basic 
Physical    Science    may    be    omitted 

Botany    I     6  4 

Botany    II     6  4 

Zoology    I     6  4 

Zoology   II    6  4 

Inorganic  Chemistry   I....    6  4 

Inorganic  Chemistry   II...   6  4 

Earth    Science     4  3 

Physics    1 6  4 

Physics     IT     6  4 

•Teaching    Science    in    the 

Secondary  School   3  3 

GENEBAZ;    SPSECK 

First    Field — 24  s.  h. 
Second   Field — 18   s.  h. 

Heqnired: 

Communicationi_    I    (5-5)..    2  2 

Communication'  II  (5-5)..    2  2 

Phonetics    and    Voice 3  3 

Oral    Interpretation     3  3 

Play    Production     3  8 

•Speech  Programs  in 

Secondary    Schools    ....   2  2 

Stagecraft.    Scenic    Design 

and    Lighting     3  3 

Debate,    Group    Discussion 

and  Parliamentary 

Procedure    3  3 

Radio     I     3  3 

Radio    II    3  3 

Creative      Dramatics      and 

Story    Telling    3  3 

Costume  and  Make-up    ...   3  3 

Choral    Speaking     3  3 

Community   Dramatics 

and  Pageantry 3  3 

Speech  Development  and 

Improvement    3  3 

Speech  and  Hearing  Clinic  6  4 

Speech    Problems    3  3 

Psychology  of  Speech  ....   3  3 

Speech    Pathology    3  3 

GEOGBAPHT 

First    Field — 24  s.  h. 
Second    Field — 18  s.  h. 

Beguired: 

World    Geography    3  3 

•Teaching     Geography     in 

the    Secondary    School..   3  3 

Xlectlves:  at  least  two  courses  to  be 
selected   from   each  group   below 

Gronp  1 — Barth  Studlea 

Climatology     3  3 

Geology    3  3 

Meteorology    3  3 

Physiography     3  3 

Cartography    3  3 

Gronp   2 — Ecoiioinlcg 

Economic    Geography    ....   3  3 

Commercial    Air 

Transportation     3  3 

Conservation    of 

Natural    Resources    ....   3  8 
Geographic    Influences 

in   American   History    . .   3  S 

Trade   and   Transportation  3  3 


Hours 
Clock  mester 

Group    3 — Beglonal   Studies 

Geography    of    the    United 

States  and  Pennsylvania  3  3 
Geography    of 

Pennsylvania    3         3 

Geography   of  Asia 3         3 

Geography    of    Africa 

and     Australia     3  3 

Geography  of  Europe....  3  3 
Geography  of  the  Far  East  3  8 
Geography   of   Latin 

America     3  3 

Geography    of    the    United 

States  and  Canada 3         3 

World    Problems    In 

Geography     3         3 

Field    Courses 

(as  approved)    8         3 

HISTOBT 

First    Field — 30  s.  h. 
Second    Field — 18  s.  h. 

Required: 

World  Culture  I   (5-5) 3         3 

World   Culture   II    (5-5)...   3  3 

History  of  U.  S.  and  Penn- 
sylvania   I    3         3 

IJistory  of  U.  S.  and  Penn- 
sylvania   II     3  8 

•American    Citizenship 6         « 

or  American  Government 
(3-3)  and  Home  and 
Family  Living  (3-3)  or 
Introduction  to  Philoso- 
phy   (3-3) 

•Teaching     Social     Studies 

in   the  Secondary  School  3         9 

Electives: 

History   of  Europe 

to  1815   3         I 

History   of  Europe 

Since     1815     3  3 

History  of  Pennsylvania..   3         3 

History    of    England 3  3 

Twentieth  Century  World  3  3 
Diplomatic    History 

of    U.    S 3  3 

History  of  Latin  America  3  3 
History  of  the  Middle 

East  and   India S  3 

History  of  the  Far  East..   3         3 

XATHSKATXCS 

First    Field — 24  s.  h. 
Second    Field — 18  s.  h. 

Required: 

College     Algebra     3  3 

Trigonometry 3  8 

Analytic    Geometry    3  3 

Calculus    I    3  S 

Calculus    II    3  3 

•Teaching  Mathematics  In 

the    Secondary    School..  3  8 

Zlectlves: 

Advanced   College   Algebra  3  3 

Synthetic    Geometry    3  3 

Spherical    Trigonometry 

and  Navigation   8  3 

Statistics 3  3 

History   of   Mathematics..  3  3 

College    Geometry    3  3 

Field    Work    in 

Mathematics     3  8 

Calculus    III    8  3 

Mathematics  of  Finance..  3  Z 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
BY  DEPARTMENTS 


64  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

ART  EDUCATION  DEPARTMENT 

Orval  Kipp,  Director  of  Department 

Alma  Munson  Gasslander  Ralph  Willlvm  Retynolds 

Dorothy  Murdock  Edgar  J.  Trapp 

Blanche  Marie  Waugaman 

The  Art  Curriculum  provides  opportunity  for  the  prospective  artist- 
teacher  to  specialize  in  one  or  more  of  the  art  fields  at  the  same  time  as 
he  is  securing  a  broad  cultural  background  in  art  and  in  general  educa- 
tion. The  departmental  program  is  guided  by  the  philosophy  that  design, 
composition,  drawing  and  understanding  of  structure  are  basic  to  the 
development  of  feeling,  appreciation,  creative  expression  and  independent 
thought.  The  art  teacher  in  public  schools  must  understand  that  an 
effective  art  program  emphasizes  the  application  of  the  principles  of  art 
in  every  day  life.  The  attempt  to  develop  an  understanding  and  feeling 
for  art  through  the  teaching  of  art  techniques  and  skills  disregards  the 
known  laws  of  learning  and  is  contrary  to  the  recognized  concept  of  art 
in  the  public  schools.  Rather,  the  Art  program  should  give  the  student" 
the  ability  to  apply  principles  ©f  art  in  every  day  living  and  an  appreci- 
ation of  the  beautiful  in  life.  Possessing  these  concepts,  the  art  major 
may  go  on  to  develop  to  the  highest  degree  possible  the  abilities  and  skill 
of  the  artist.  A  balanced  professional  art  education  is  assured  because 
the  curriculum  includes  courses  in  education,  English,  music,  science 
and  social  studies.  Majors  and  minors  in  other  fields  may  be  secured 
by  art  students  if  they  attend  summer  sessions. 

The  Art  Department  sponsors  social  and  professional  activities  in 
fine  and  applied  arts.  The  Jean  R.  McElhaney  Award  for  Excellence 
in  Fine  Arts,  established  in  1932,  is  presented  annually  to  the  junior  or 
senior  whose  achievements  in  three  different  fields  of  art  are  outstanding. 
Miss  McElhaney,  Director  of  the  Art  Department  from  1906  to  1927,  in 
1942  willed  $500  to  the  Student  Loan  Fund  of  the  College,  stipulating 
that  preference  should  be  given  to  art  students.  The  Kate  Lacy  Award 
for  Outstanding  Art  Service  to  the  college  and  the  community,  established 
in  1943  in  memory  of  Miss  Lacy,  Crafts  teacher  in  the  Art  Department 
from  1927  to  1941,  is  awarded  annually  to  a  junior  or  senior.  Delta  Phi, 
Honorary  Art  Fraternity  initiated  in  1944,  received  a  charter  as  Alpha 
lambda  Chapter  of  Delta  Phi  Delta,  National  Honorary  Art  Fraternity 
on  March  30,  1946. 

A  budget  allocation  in  1943  from  the  Student  Cooperative  Association 
for  the  purchase  of  a  work  of  art  by  an  artist  in  the  Americas  enriched 
the  Cultural  Life  Program  of  the  college  by  enabling  the  art  department 
to  sponsor  the  nationally-known  Annual  Cooperative  Art  Exhibition  and 
to  begin  building  a  valuable  contemporary  art  collection.  This  collection, 
known  as  the  Art  Memorial,  was  formed  for  the  purpose  of  honoring 
those  who  served  in  World  War  IL     It  will  be  a  permanent  source  of 


Indiana  Catalogue  Number  65 


cultural  enjoyment  to  the  students  of  the  college  as  well  as  to  the 
citizens  of  the  community. 

The  Cooperative  Association  also  provides  funds  for  a  series  of 
traveling  exhibitions  of  the  work  of  nationally-known  artists  and  crafts- 
men. Other  exhibitions  include  the  work  of  the  artist  members  of  the 
community,  the  faculty  and  the  students.  The  Art  Department  owns  a 
copy  of  the  Museum  of  Modern  Art  Exhibitions,  Creative  Photography 
and  The  Elements  of  Design,  as  well  as  a  representative  collection  of 
prints.  The  art  service  program  by  which  students  serve  the  art  needa 
of  the  college,  prepares  them  to  serve  the  art  needs  of  the  communities 
in  which  they  shall  later  teach. 

Admission  to  the  Art  Department  is  granted  to  a  candidate  after  he 
has  met  the  general  entrance  requirements  of  the  college  and  the  special 
requirements  of  the  department.  Consult  page  30  for  entrance  and  other 
requirements.  Fitness  to  pursue  the  Art  Curriculum  will  be  assumed  if 
the  applicant  has  normal  ability  to  see  and  make  motor  adjustments 
accordingly;  has  sensitivity  to  harmony  and  contrast  in  line,  form,  and 
color;  and  has  interest  in  and  aptitude  for  art.  Those  who  meet  these 
entrance  requirements  are  admitted  in  the  order  of  application.  For  this 
reason  it  is  wise  to  apply  early  for  personal  interview  and  admission. 

Graduation  and  the  conferring  of  the  degree  depend  upon  the 
candidate's  demonstration  of  his  ability  as  an  artist  educator  and  by  his 
maintaining  a  grade  average  of  "C"  or  better.  Capability  in  supervision 
and  teaching  may  be  shown  by  success  in  student  teaching  and  by 
participation  in  college  art  service  activities. 

GENERAL  EDUCATION  COURSE 
(Required  of  all  students) 

Introduction  to  Art  2  or. 

Studies  in  the  understanding  and  enjoyment  of  the  visual  arts  as 
modes  of  expression  and  communication  make  up  the  content  of  this 
course.  The  arts  are  studied  and  evaluated  on  the  basis  of  their  relation 
to  life  (the  individual,  the  home,  the  community,  etc.).  Museum  and 
exhibition  visits  supplement  the  work  of  the  course. 

REQUIRED  COURSES  FOR  ART  STUDENTS 

Courses  are  listed  in  the  order  in  which  they  should  be  taken  in  each 
field.  On  the  students*  program  subjects  in  various  fields  are  carried 
simultaneously  in  order  to  facilitate  the  artistic  development  of  the 
student. 

ART  EDUCATION 

Art  in  Elementary  Education  2  cr. 

The  aims  and  purposes  of  creative  activity  in  the  total  program 
for  the  development  of  children  are  discussed.  Tjrpical  experiences,  types 
of  motivation,  and  child  art  are  evaluated.    Unit  and  lesson  plans  are 


66  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

designed  for  such  activities.  The  development  and  guidance  of  an  art 
progrram  with  general  element.ary  teachers  is  studied  as  an  important 
duty  of  the  art  teacher  and  supervisor. 

Art  in  Secondary  Education  2  or. 

The  philosophy  of  art  education  in  a  democracy  as  well  as  the 
needs  of  the  secondary  school  child  are  studied.  The  guidance  aspect 
of  art  and  its  relationship  to  American  life  and  education  are  stressed. 
Curriculum  materials  with  specific  reference  to  art  subject  matter  are 
selected  and  adapted  for  the  various  levels. 

Stndent  Teaching  (and  Directed  Student  Activities)  12  cr. 

Actual  participation  in  the  art  of  teaching  and  in  activities  related 
to  the  performance  of  a  teacher's  work  are  the  basis  of  the  course  in 
student  teaching  which  includes  the  primary,  the  intermediate,  the  junior 
and  senior  high  school  levels.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  experiences  through 
which  children  develop  creative  power  simultaneously  with  knowledge, 
skill  and  appreciation. 

Professional  Practicum  (including  School  Law)  2  cr. 

Consideration  is  given  to  recent  educational  trends  and  methods,  to 
a  study  of  art  curricula,  and  to  the  planning  of  art  courses  for  various 
grade  levels. 

ART  HISTORY  AND  AESTHETICS 

Survey  of  Art  2  cr. 

The  understanding  and  enjoyment  of  the  visual  arts  as  modes  of 
expression  afe  emphasized.  The  arts  are  studied  and  evaluated  on  the 
basis  of  the  use  of  principles  and  elements.  The  relation  of  the  arts  to 
life,  the  individual,  the  home,  the  community  are  surveyed. 

History  of  Art  3  cr. 

The  course  covers  the  historical  development  and  function  of  each 
art  at  different  periods  in  our  civilization.  Critical  judgment  and  inter- 
pretation are  developed  through  analysis  of  old  and  modern  masters. 

Aesthetics  2  cr. 

The  philosophical  bases  of  art  expression  provide  a  foundation  for 
the  understanding  of  universal  concepts  in  an  inquiry  into  the  higher 
values  and  functions  of  art  to  society  and  to  the  individual. 

CRAFTS 

Modeling  2  cr. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  give  experience  in  the  use  of  clay  as  a 
medium  of  expression.  Problems  involve  modeling  or  carving  animals, 
figures,  and  heads  both  in  relief  and  in  the  round.  Casting  and  the 
making  of  moulds  are  additional  studies. 


Indiana  Catalogue  Number  67 

Pottery  2  cr. 

This  course  deals  with  the  forming,  decoration,  and  firing  of  objects 
of  clay.  Experiences  include:  wheel  throwing,  casting,  and  the  prim- 
itive methods  of  constructing  a  vase  by  hand  with  coils.  Slip  painting, 
glazing,  and  firing  are  experienced  by  all  students.  The  study  of  historical 
and  contemporary  ceramics  is  a  part  of  the  course. 

Crafts  in  Elementary  Schools  2  cr. 

Craft  experiences  suggested  by  activities  and  materials  suitable  to 
the  various  grades  of  the  elementary  schools  are  appraised  and  executed. 
Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  accumulation  of  source  material  and  the  needs 
of  children  at  this  leveL 

Elementary  Industrial  Arts  2  cr. 

Materials  of  the  major  industries  such  as  wood,  metal,  paper,  clay, 
cardboard,  etc.,  are  studied  in  relation  to  their  various  uses  in  the  public 
schools.  Use  of  tools,  fabrication,  and  design  are  studied.  Areas  of 
human  needs  such  as  food,  clothing,  shelter,  utensils,  etc.,  are  considered 
in  relation  to  design. 

Advanced  Crafts  3  cr. 

The  common  industrial  materials  available  for  the  crafts  are  em- 
ployed for  the  development  of  advanced  techniques  in  jewelry,  textiles, 
•bookbinding,  leather  work,'  wood  carving,  metal  work  and  other  projects 
which  are  suitable  for  the  secondary  school, 

DESIGN  AND  COLOR 
'Elementary  Color  and  Design  2  cr. 

Basic  experiences  in  the  functional  use  of  color  are  given:  color 
theories  are  derived  from  pigments  and  from  light.  This  is  related  to 
the  teaching  of  the  appreciation  and  use  of  color  in  the  elementary  and 
secondary  schools.  Further  experiences  include  use  of  the  elements  and 
principles  of  art  to  produce  two  and  three  dimensional  design.  The  sources 
Ci  design  in  nature  and  historic  ornament  are  studied. 

Advanced  Color  and  Design  2  cr# 

This  course  aims  to  apply  the  principles  of  color  and  design  ^. 
specific  needs  such  as:  leather,  wood,  metal,  cJay,  stone,  etc  These 
creative  experiences  find  a  practical  application  in  the  crafts,  painting, 
illustration  and  other  related  courses. 

DRAWING  AND  PAINTING 

Drawing  and  Painting,-  3  cr. 

This  course  is  an  introduction  to  the  fundamentals  of  pictorial  design: 
line,  form,  color,  volume,  space,  texture,  etc.,  stressing  the  creative 
aspects  of  drawing  and  painting. 

Drawing  and  Composition  2  cr. 

Problems  in  pictorial  composition  involving  landscape,  figure,  and 
still  life  are  examined  critically  in  this  course.  Various  media  are  use^ 
to  execute  creative  problems. 


68  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

Mechanical  Drawing  2  cr. 

This  is  a  basic  course  in  methods  and  understanding  of  drawing  with 
instruments.  Experiences  include  geometric  construction,  shape  and  size 
description,  instrumental  and  pictorial  drawing,  and  blue  printing. 

Drawing  and  Lettering  3  cr. 

Advanced  experiences  in  pictorial  structure  involve  all  modes  of 
drawing  and  painting  from  naturalism  to  non-objective.  Figure,  still-life, 
landscape,  lettering  and  mural  problems  are  undertaken. 

Advanced  Oil  and  Watercolor  Painting  2  cr. 

In  this  course  the  artist-teacher  has  an  opportunity  for  individual 
development  by  stressing  volume,  plastic  color,  or  abstract  form  in  his 
painting. 

INDUSTRIAL  AND  COMMERCIAL  ART 
Costume  Design  2  cr. 

The  course  aims  to  develop  the  ability  to  design  and  make  clothing 
for  personal  and  school  needs.  Experiences  include:  selection  according 
to  type,  derivation  from  historic  sources,  and  the  understanding  of 
harmony  of  line,  color  and  texture.  Costuming  for  school  and  community 
dramatics  and  pageantry  are  given  pre-eminence. 

Commercial  Art  3  cr. 

The  activities  of  this  course  involve  projects  related  to  publishing  and 
advertising:  design,  layout,  the  poster,  packaging,  and  related  problems. 
The  preparation  of  the  yearbook,  the  school  paper,  and  publicity  for 
school  activities  are  given  full  attention. 

Pictorial  Expression  and  Illustration  2  cr. 

Illustrations  for  poems,  stories  and  novels  from  the  literature  of  the 
various  levels:  childhood,  adolescence,  youth,  and  adulthood,  involve  the 
use  of  various  media.  The  techniques  and  work  habits  of  contemporary 
illustrators  are  constantly  referred  to. 

Interior  Design  2  cr. 

The  content  of  the  course  deals  with  the  design,  decoration,  and  ap- 
pointments of  the  home.  Period  styles,  furniture  arrangement,  and 
exposure  in  relation  to  light  and  color  are  typical  problems  undertaken. 
The  relationship  of  these  experiences  to  art  in  the  schools  is  made  evident. 

Industrial  Design  3  cr. 

The  principles  of  design  are  applied  to  advanced  problems  in  the 
fields  of  business  and  industry.  Plastic  form  as  it  relates  to  the  crea- 
tion, production,  and  marketing  of  industrial  products  is  defined  through 
practical'  experience. 

Theater  Art  3  cr. 

The  application  of  color  and  design  to  school  and  professional  dra- 
matics and  pageantry  are  the  basis  of  this  course.  Designing  and  painting 
of  scenery,  lighting,  prosier  costume,  and  properties  are  basic  experiences. 


Indiana  Catalogue  Number  69 

Graphic  Media  2  cr. 

The  course  is  designed  to  give  the  student  experiences  in  a  wide 
variety  of  media  and  modes  of  graphic  expression. 

REQUIRED  COURSES  IN  ART  FOR  ELEMENTARY 
EDUCATION  STUDENTS 

Art  for  the  Elementary  Grades  2  cr. 

Opportunity  for  many  creative  experiences  in  design  and  color  as 
related  to  personal  problems,  industrial  projects,  and  the  selection  and 
arrangement  of  manufactured  products,  enables  the  student  to  develop" 
confidence  in  his  own  powers  of  expression. 

Teaching  of  Art  in  the  Elementary  Grades  3  cr. 

In  addition  to  further  creative  experience  in  drawing,  desig^n,  and 
color,  this  course  emphasizes,  through  directed  observation  in  the  Keith 
School,  the  relationships  between  personal  art  expression  and  the  art 
activities  of  the  elementary  school. 

ELECTIVES  IN  ART  FOR  ELEMENTARY  STUDENTS 

Handicrafts  2  cr. 

Manipulation  of  tools  and  materials  in  producing  useful  objects  gives 
enjoyment  for  its  own  sake  as  well  as  a  keener  appreciation  of  manu- 
factured materials.  Practical  applications,  fine  in  design,  are  made 
as  aids  for  the  future  teacher  of  kindergarten  and  primary  grades. 

Industrial  Arts  2  cr. 

A  study  of  various  industrial  materials  and  processes  is  related  to 
the  needs  of  the  teacher  in  the  elementary  grades. 

REQUIRED  COURSE  IN  ART  FOR  HOME  ECONOMICS  STUDENTS 

Principles  of  Design  2  cr. 

Creative  experiences  in  design  and  color  provide  bases  lor  consider- 
ation of  personal  and  household  problems  and  form  a  background  for 
understanding  related  arts  projects  on  the  secondary-school  level. 


70  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

BUSINESS  EDUCATION  DEPARTMENT 

6.  G.  HHiL,  Direcior  of  DepartmeTU 

A  T.BERT  E.  Drumhelleb  James  K.  Stoneb 

Clinton  M.  File  Harold  W.  Thomas 

Elsie  Gaelow  Rineer  Robert  Fb.\nklin  Webb 

EXPLANATION  OF  THE  CURRICULUM 

Students  may  pursue  the  work  of  the  entire  curriculum  or  they  may 
elect  to  pursue  work  according  to  their  aptitudes,  as  follows: 

1.  The  Complete  Program  leads  to  certification  in  all  three  fields, 
thus  affording  certification  in  all  of  the  high  school  business  subjects. 
Those  who  possess  aptitudes  that  indicate  success  in  stenographic,  ac- 
counting, and  retailing  work  may,  if  they  wish,  pursue  this  complete 
program. 

2.  The  Stenographic  Field  includes  all  the  courses  of  the  curriculum 
listed  under  that  heading.  Elective  courses  may  be  chosen  from  any 
other  department  of  the  College. 


3.    The  Accounting  Field  includes  all  of  the  courses  of  the  curricu- 
listed  under  that  heading.     Elect 
any  other  department  of  the  College. 


lum  listed  under  that  heading.     Elective  courses  may  be  chosen  from 


4.  The  Retailing  Field  includes  all  of  the  courses  of  the  curriculum 
listed  under  that  heading.  Elective  courses  may  be  chosen  from  any 
other  department  of  the  College. 

5.  The  Combination  Program  combines  either  the  Stenographic  and 
Accounting,  the  Stenographic  and  Retailing,  or  the  Accounting  and 
Retailing  Fields.  With  any  combination  program,  the  certification  ap- 
propriate to  both  of  the  two  areas  will  be  awarded.  Electives  in  other 
departments  of  the  College  also  may  be  carried  with  this  program. 

It  is  possible  to  elect  Typewriting  III  and  become  certificated 
to  teach  typewriting  with  any  one  of  the  fields  or  a  combination  of  the 
fields. 

All  electives  are  determined  by  the  choice  of  the  student,  and  by  the 
approval  of  the  Dean  of  Instruction  of  the  College  and  the  Director  of 
the  Business  Education  Department. 

Our  Standards.  Only  those  students  who  attain  "A"  or  high  "B" 
standings,  and  whose  aptitudes  indicate  success  in  the  fields  elected, 
should  elect  more  than  two  fields. 

To  pursue  the  Complete  Program  a  student  must  maintain  at  least 
a  "C"  average,  and  must  have  a  grade  of  "C"  or  better  in  the  following 
courses:  English,  Typewriting,  Business  Mathematics,  Accounting,  and 
Shorthand. 


Indiana  Catalogue  Number  71 

To  elect  or  continue  with  the  Stenographic  Field,  a  student  must 
maintain  a  grade  of  "C"  or  better  in  English,  Typewriting,  and  Shorthand. 

To  continue  in  the  Accounting  Field,  a  student  must  have  a  grade 
of  "C"  or  better  in  Business  Mathematics  and  Accounting. 

To  continue  in  the  Retailing  Field,  a  student  must  have  a  grade 
of  "C"  or  better  in  English  and  Speech. 

It  should  be  understood  that  those  who  fall  below  "B"  standings  are 
considered  unsatisfactory  to  be  recommended  for  teaching.  Since  high 
school  standards  have  been  greatly  raised,  school  officials  are  more 
particular  than  ever  before  concerning  the  qualifications  of  those  whom 
they  employ.  They  insist  on  high  scholastic  achievement,  good  personal 
appearance,  attractive  personality,  freedom  from  physical  defects,  and 
other  qualities  that  should  be  carefully  considered  by  all  those  contem- 
'  plating  this  type  of  professional  work.  This  should  not  discourage  those 
who  really  have  the  qualities  required.  It  may,  however,  prevent  those 
who  lack  certain  of  the  primary  requisites  for  developing  into  a  high-type 
teacher,  from  being  disappointed  later.  A  tryout  year  at  Indiana  is  often 
recommended. 

If  any  prospective  students  are  in  doubt  concerning  their  fitness  for 
this  type  of  work,  they  should  consult  their  high  school  principals  and 
guidance  officers,  and  ask  them  for  a  frank  and  honest  statement  about 
their  fitness.  They  should  also  have  all  data  concerning  their  personal 
and  scholastic  qualifications  sent  to  the  College.  They  will  be  notified 
of  the  date  for  interviews,  at  which  time  the  matter  can  be  discussed  as 
frankly  and  wisely  as  experience  will  dictate. 

Practical  Experience  Requirements.  Before  graduation,  each  student 
will  be  required  to  have  completed  the  equivalent  of  six  months  of  store 
practice,  secretarial  practice,  bookkeeping  practice,  clerical  practice,  or 
a  combination  of  these  or  other  business  contacts,  acquired  at  places  and 
under  conditions  approved  by  the  Director  of  this  department.  This 
experience  preferably  should  be  in  the  field  or  fields  in  which  the  student 
is  contemplating  certification.  'Much  of  this  experience  can  be  acquired 
during  summer  vacations. 

Student  Teaching.  Each  student  in  training  in  the  Business  Educa- 
tion Department  receives  more  than  the  state  requirement  in  hours  of 
actual  practice  teaching  and  observation.  A  number  of  teaching  centers 
are  conducted  in  connection  with  some  of  the  largest  high  schools  within 
convenient  reach.  To  these  teaching  cent^ers  the  students  are  sent  for 
one  full  semester  of  the  senior  year  for  their  practice  teaching.  The 
teacher  holds  a  regular  position  in  the  high  school  and  carries  a  full 
program  of  classes,  extra-curricular  activities,  and  other  regular  school 
duties.  The  work  is  supervised  and  criticized  by  experienced  supervisors 
who  are  teacher-members  of  the  college  faculty  of  this  department,  and 
also,  by  supervisors  of  exceptional  training  and  ability  furnished  by  the 
teaching  centers.  Everything  is  done  to  afford  these  in  training  as 
much  actual  teaching  experience  and  as  many  teaching  contacts  as 
possible  before  graduation. 


72  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

The  program  of  this  department  includes  a  wide  offering  of  general 
academic  courses,  which  should  produce  a  well-balanced  teacher.  The 
setup  makes  inter-departmental  transfer  of  students  easy  at  the  end  of 
the  first  semester.  Students  will  become  well  adjusted  in  college  before 
entering  upon  their  technical  work  in  business.  It  provides  for  ample 
exploration  during  the  first  college  year. 

REQUIRED  BUSINESS  COURSES  FOR  ALL  BUSINESS 
EDUCATION   STUDENTS 

Professional  Orientation  3  cr. 

The  purpose  of  this  course  is  to  introduce  the  student  to  the  make-up 
of  the  business  world,  acquaint  him  with  the  contacts  of  every-day 
business,  orient  him  in  the  field,  and  provide  exploration  in  shorthand, 
machines,  and  accounting.  This  should  assist  him  greatly  in  his  choice 
of  his  major  field  or  his  fields  in  the  department.  This  course  has  pro- 
nounced: guidance  features. 

Typewriting  I  2  cr. 

This  course  emphasizes  a  sound  mastery  of  the  keyboard  and  the 
ordinary  operative  parts  of  the  typewriter.  The  subject  matter  ranges 
from  introductory  drills  through  paragraph  and  article  writing  to  appli- 
cations in  simple  lett-ers  and  tabulations.  Diagnostic  and  corrective  work 
receive  attention  throughout  the  course.  Speed  with  accuracy  is  con- 
sidered fundamental.     Teaching  techniques  receive  attention. 

Typewriting  II  2  cr. 

This  course  emphasizes  efficiency  and  quickness  in  handling  the 
typewriter  intelligently  with  a  large  variety  of  materials  on  the  inter- 
mediate level  of  operation.  Among  the  contents  of  the  course  are: 
letter  writing  and  envelope  addressing,  multicopy  work,  tabulating,  and 
remedial  drills.  Transcription  is  included  for  stenographic  students. 
Speed  with  accuracy  and  good  judgment  is  considered  fundamental. 
Teaching  techniques  receive  attention. 

Business  Mathematics  I  3  cr. 

This  is  a  review  of  the  fundamental  processes  with  emphasis  on 
speed  and  accuracy  through  adequate  drill  and  practical  application  in 
the  handling  of  the  fundamental  business  operations.  The  course  is 
designed  to  lay  a  groundwork  for  the  mathematics  of  accounting. 

Business  Organization  and  Finance  2  cr. 

The  contents  of  this  course  are  designed  to  give  an  overview  of 
business  management.  Modern  business  organization,  finance,  personnel 
administration,  production,  and  public  relations  are  studied  and  made 
meaningful  as  they  fit  into  our  industrial  society.  The  organization  and 
management  of  the  corporation  and  j)ther  forms  of  business  are  covered. 

Accounting  I  3  cr. 

This  is  the  introductory  course.  Its  purpose  is  to  introduce  the 
students  to  the  keeping  of  records  for  the  professional  man  as  well  as  a 


I 


Indiana  Catalocle  Number  73 

mercantile  enterprise  involving  the  single  proprietor.  Emphasis  is 
placed  upon  the  distinction  between  keeping  records  on  the  cash  basis 
as  compared  to  the  accrued  basis  of  bookkeeping. 

Business  Correspondence  3  or. 

This  is  a  course  rich  in  the  fundamentals  of  grammar;  study  of  the 
vocabulary  of  business;  setup  of  business  forms  and  modem  business 
letters;  emphasis  of  the  "you"  attitude  in  the  writing  of  letters  of 
inquiry,  response,  order  letters,  adjustment  letters,  sales  letters;  prepa- 
ration of  data  sheets,  and  application  letters. 

Business  Law  I  3  cr. 

This  course  deals  with  court  procedure,  contracts,  agency,  and  ne- 
gotiable instruments.  The  aim  is  to  apply  principles  of  law  to  every- 
day life  and  to  establish  proper  interest,  ideals,  and  attitudes  toward  law 
as  a  means  of  social  control. 

Business  Law  II  3  cr. 

This  course  considers  the  law  of  business  organizations,  and  devices 
for  protection  of  creditors  and  personal  and  real  property.  It  applies 
the  principles  of  law  to  every-day  life  and  business,  establishing  proper 
interest,  ideals,  and  attitudes  toward  law  as  a  means  of  social  controL 

Methods  of  Teaching  Business  Courses  3  cr. 

This  includes  methods  of  teaching  general  courses,  as  well  as  short- 
hand, typewriting,  and  bookkeeping.  Demonstration  and  lesson  planning 
are  emphasized.  It  includes  the  construction,  administration,  scoring, 
and  grading  of  various  types  of  tests;  analysis  of  test  results,  remedial 
teaching  and  retesting;  evaluation  of  tests,  all  tied  together  in  the 
psychological  foundation  of  methodology. 

Problems  in  Business  Education  3  cr. 

In  this  course  are  outlined  the  purposes  of  secondary  business  edu- 
cation; the  curriculum  and  its  development;  guidance,  placement,  and 
follow-up;  administration  of  the  business  department;  physical  layout, 
equipment,  and  supplies;  and  trends  in  business  education. 

Retailing  I  3  cr. 

This  course  comprises  a  survey  and  analysis  of  the  fields  of  selling. 
A  study  is  made  of  the  requirements  for  sales  personnel,  the  types  of 
customers  and  how  to  best  serve  the  customer  needs  and  their  buying 
motives,  the  sales  process,  merchandising  plans,  and  the  psychology  of 
dealing  with  the  public. 

Clerical  Office  Practice  3  cr. 

Clerical  office  routine  is  covered,  together  with  the  fundamentals 
of  operating  various  office  machines  —  calculators,  adding  machines, 
stencil  duplicators,  dictaphones,  and  various  office  appliances;  also,  the 
.theory  and  practice  of  office  management  is  stressed.  The  use  of  the 
dictaphone  is  required  of  all,  and  transcription  is  offered  to  the  steno- 
graphic students. 


74  Teachers  College  Bulletin 


Mathematics  of  Finance  3  cr. 

The  purpose  of  this  course  is  to  teach  students  to  apply  principles 
of  business  mathematics  with  speed  and  accuracy  in  solving  advanced 
problems  encountered  by  the  business  man  and  the  consumer.  The 
mathematics  of  production,  marketing,  accounting,  finance,  and  man- 
agement correlate  with  the  accounting  courses. 

COURSES  REQUIRED  IN  THE  STENOGRAPHIC  SEQUENCE 

Shorthand  I  3  cr. 

In  this  course  emphasis  is  given  to  the  reading,  writing,  and  mastery 
of  the  fundamentals  of  Gregg  Shorthand  Simplified. 

Shorthand  II  3  cr. 

This  course  accomplishes  three  major  objectives:  to  review  and 
strengthen  the  student's  knowledge  of  the  system,  to  build  transcription 
skill,  and  to  build  shorthand-writing  speed. 

Shorthand  III,  Transcription  3  or. 

This  course  is  designed  to  develop  practical  speed  in  dictation  of 
material  varied  as  to  vocabulary  and  style,  with  much  emphasis  on  the 
development  of  transcription  skill. 

Type'writing  III  2  cr. 

This  course  deals  with  letter  writing;  writing  on  special  business  and 
legal  forms;  setting  up  outlines,  programs,  indexes,  title  pages,  proof- 
readers' marks;  copying  from  longhand  and  corrected  copy;  writing 
manuscripts;  tabulating;  problems  of  English,  such  as  capitalization, 
punctuation,  and  paragraphing;  and  many  other  practical  and  educational 
matters. 

Secretarial  Practice  3  cr. 

This  course  is  an  advanced  study  of  the  theory  and  the  practice  in 
activities  common  to  the  office — handling  the  mail,  telegraphic  services, 
shipping  services,  meeting  callers,  various  business  reports,  financial 
and  legal  duties,  filing,  transcription,  secretarial  standards;  personality, 
reference  books,  itineraries,  preparation  of  documents,  editing,  etc. 


COURSES  REQUIRED  IN  THE  ACCOUNTING  SEQUENCE 

Accounting  II  3  cr. 

Special  consideration  is  given  in  connection  with  accruals  and  de- 
ferred items;  the  significance  and  handling  of  evaluation  accounts  and 
the  interpretation  of  the  effect  of  all  types  of  transactions  on  the 
operation  of  the  business  are  stressed  throughout  the  course.  Special 
attention  is  given  to  the  preparation  of  columnar  records  for  different 
types  of  businesses  along  with  the  preparation  and  interpretation  of 
comparative  financial  reports. 


Indiana  Catalogue  Number  Ty 

I  — — ■ — 1» 

Accounting  III  S  er. 

Special  attention  is  given  to  the  records  and  reports  peculiar  to  the 
corporate  form  of  organization  as  well  as  to  the  methods  of  handling 
capital  and  surplus.  Emphasis  is  given  to  the  methods  of  accounting 
for  inventories,  tangible  and  intangible  fixed  assets,  investments,  long- 
term  liabilities,  funds  and  reserves  and  the  methods  of  amortizing  bond 
premium  and  discount. 

Accounting  IV  3  cr. 

This  course  is  designed  to  give  the  students  an  understanding  of  the 
theory  of  costing  used  in  manufacturing  establishments.  The  voucher 
system  is  introduced  in  this  course  and  attention  is  given  to  budgeting, 
estimating  and  prorating  of  manufacturing  expenses,  the  technical  as- 
pects of  charting  production  data,  and  investigating  time  and  motion 
study  techniques. 

Accounting  V  3  cr. 

In  this  course  students  conduct  a  semi-detailed  audit  of  business 
records,  make  the  corrections,  and  submit  statements  of  results.  Problems 
of  public  and  private  auditing  are  developed  by  the  instructor.  The  con- 
struction and  organization  of  working  papers  and  the  auditor's  final 
report  are  covered.  It  also  provides,  the  prospective  teacher  with  a 
knowledge  of  the  current  tax  laws  in  connection  with  Social  Security,! 
Excise  and  Income  Taxes. 


COURSES  REQUIRED  IN  THE  RETAIL  TRAINING  SEQUENCE 

Accounting  II    (See  previous  outline)  3  cr. 

Sales  and  Retail  Selling  II  3  cr. 

This  course  is  an  advanced  study  of  the  units  of  Retail  Training  I, 
and  includes  a  study  of  merchandise  control,  stock  planning,  buying, 
pricing,  personnel  training,  store  location,  store  layout  and  equipment, 
and  retail  advertising.  Suggested  public  relations  activities  are  practiced 
in  this  course.  A  part  of  the  semester  is  devoted  to  the  study  of  the 
Pennsylvania  Distributive  Education  Program. 

Retailing  III  (Store  Practice)  6  cr. 

This  is  a  practical  course  of  cooperative  part-time  training  in  the 
retail  establishments  of  Indiana.  The  student  spends  a  minimum  of  15 
clock  hours  per  v/eek  in  actual  retail  work  at  which  time  he  puts  into 
practice  the  theories  of  retailing  studied  in  previous  retail  training 
courses.  This  work  is  under  close  supervision  of  the  store  officials  and 
of  the  College. 


76  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

EDUCATION  DEPARTMENT 

Ralph  B.  Beard,  Head  of  Department 

Wilbur  Emmert  Blanche  W.  McClueb 

S.  Trevor  Hadley  Anna  K.  O'Toole 

Stanley  W.  Lore  Paul  A.  Risheberger 

Irene  Russell 

The  purpose  of  the  courses  in  the  Education  Department  is  to 
stimulate  an  interest  in  and  an  understanding  of  the  teaching  profession. 
The  staff  members  of  the  department  utilize  the  Keith  School  for  obser- 
vation and  participation  in  an  attempt  to  see  theory  put  into  practice. 

GENERAL  EDUCATION  COURSES 
(Required  of  all  students) 

Professional  Orientation  3  cr. 

An  orientation  and  guidance  course  designed  to  acquaint  prospective 
teachers  with  the  opportunities  and  requirements  of  their  profession,  the 
relationship  of  the  school  to  society,  the  organization  of  the  American 
school  system,  the  pupil  and  the  educational  process.  Extensive  directed 
observation  of  various  schools  and  learning  situations  will  be  required. 

General  Psychology  3  cr. 

A  comprehensive  study  of  the  origins,  motives  and  modifications  of 
human  behavior  with  emphasis  on  the  scientific  approach  in  analyzing 
behavior  patterns;  the  importance  of  man's  biological  inheritance,  and 
the  significance  of  social  environment  in  influencing  human  living. 
Attention  is  given  to  an  appreciation  of  simpler  techniques  in  psycho- 
logical experimentation. 

Educational  Psychology  and  Evaluative  Techniques  3  cr. 

This  course  deals  with  the  problem  of  understanding  the  child  and  the 
adolescent  and  how  he  learns.  Some  emphasis  is  given  the  growth  pro- 
cess to  better  understand  the  learner.  The  learning  process  is  dealt  with 
in  detail.  Actual  classroom  observation  and  a  study  of  classroom  tech- 
niques attempts  to  give  the  student  the  information  he  needs  in  order 
to  teach  effectively.  Attention  will  be  given  to  measurement  as  related 
to  growth  and  the  learning  process.    Prerequisite:  General  Psychology. 

Audio-Visual  Education  2  cr. 

A  consideration  of  the  needs  for  sensory  techniques  and  materials 
is  given  with  attention  to  the  psychological  processes  involved.  Through 
class  and  laboratory  work  the  student  will  have  an  opportunity  to  become 
acquainted  with  materials  and  equipment  and  skilled  in  audio-visual 
techniques,  within  the  teaching  field.  Activities  will  include  actual 
production  of  materials  for  class  use  and  participation  in  their  use. 


INDIA^A  Catalogue  Number  77 

Student  Teaching  and  Directed  Activities  12  cr. 

Student  teaching  is  the  course  which  opens  to  the  student  rich 
experiences  in  the  various  aspects  of  the  work  of  the  teacher.  The 
student  teaching  assignment  begins  with  observation  and  simple  teaching 
duties.  As  he  progresses,  the  student  is  gradually  inducted  into  more 
responsible  teaching  situations  which  provide  opportunities  to  test 
theories  in  action,  to  observe  and  develop  learning  experiences  with  and 
for  children,  to  guide  children  in  the  formation  of  good  habits,  and  to 
better  understand  how  children,  both  as  individuals  and  as  groups,  react, 
behave,  and  achieve  in  school  situations.  In  addition  to  these  experiences 
with  children,  this  course  will  provide  many  opportunities  for  the  future 
teacher's  growth  both  as  a  person  and  as  a  professional  worker. 

Professional  Practicum  Including  School  Law  2  cr. 

The  purpose  of  this  course  is  to  broaden  the  concept  of  subject  matter 
and  to  give  the  beginning  teacher  a  sense  of  values  which  can  be  used 
in  the  selection  of  educational  experiences  and  materials.  It  aims  also 
to  teach  him,  through  guidance  in  his  planning  and  teaching,  how  to 
organize,  motivate,  and  use  these  experiences  and  materials  in  child 
learning.  This  course  also  aims  to  provide  an  interpretation  of  school 
law  as  it  directly  pertains  to  the  needs  of  the  teacher.  The  course  is 
given  concurrently  with  student  teaching. 

ELECTIVES 
Educational  Measurements  3  cr. 

This  course  is  designed  to  meet  the  needs  of  teachers  in  appraising 
student  achievement.  It  will  include  the  construction  and  evaluation  of 
informal  objective  test-s,  the  selection  and  use  of  measures  of  achieve- 
ment and  group  intelligence  tests,  tbe  interpretation  of  test  scores,  and 
the  use  of  the  anecdotal  record,  diary,  case  history,  sociogram  and  the 
cumulative  record.  The  course  will  provide  for  differentiation  to  meet 
the  needs  of  teachers  of  different  grade  levels. 

Mental  Hygiene  3  cr. 

This  course  endeavors  to  develop  a  background  for  the  study  of 
human  .conduct  and  an  understanding  of  the  foundations  of  human  be- 
havior, together  with  an  application  of  the  emergent  principles  to  the 
life  of  the  everyday  person.  It  is  designed  especially  for  students  in  all 
curricula.    Prerequisites:  Educational  Psychology. 

Public  School  Administration  3  cr. 

This  course  is  designed  to  acquaint  the  teacher  with  the  administra- 
tion and  organization  of  the  American  public  school.  Among  the  topics 
to  be  discussed  will  be:  pupil  classification  and  promotion;  supervision 
of  instruction;  the  organization  of  extra-curricular  activities;  classroom 
management  and  discipline;  grading  systems;  the  daily  schedule;  and 
a  philosophy  of  education. 


78  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

Recent  Trends  in  American  Education  1  cr. 

This  course  will  include  a  brief  study  of  the  origin  of  education  at 
local,  state  and  national  levels,  basic  curriculum  issues,  school  community 
situations,  organization  and  methods  of  instruction  and  current  evalua- 
tion and  reporting  procedures. 

School  and  Community  8  cr. 

This  course  emphasizes  the  study  of  group  dynamics  and  leadership 
techniques  which  will  aid  the  teacher  in  filling  the  role  as  an  active 
member  of  the  community.  Techniques  of  surveying  community  re- 
sources, needs,  problems,  and  school-community  relationships  are  studied. 
Field  trips  and  group  activities  are  a  required  part  of  the  course. 

Teaching  the  Exceptional  Child  3  cr. 

This  course  is  designed  to  aid  the  student  in  identifying  and  in  meet- 
ing the  needs  of  those  children  who  deviate  from  the  normal  in  areas  of 
physical,  mental,  emotional  and  educational  development.  Consideration 
is  given  to  educational  opportunities  available  to  these  children.  Study 
is  made  of  agencies  which  serve  exceptional  children.  Field  trips  are 
emphasized.     Prerequisite:    Educational  Psychology. 

REQUIRED  COURSES  IN  ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION 

Child  Development  3  cr. 

The  objective  of  this  course  is  to  help  the  student  develop  an  under- 
standing of  the  physical,  mental,  social  and  emotional  growth  patterns 
characteristic  of  childhood.  The  functions  of  educational  and  welfare 
agencies  which  work  with  children  will  be  studied.  Opportunity  will  be 
provided  for  learning  experiences  with  children. 

Language  Arts  9  cr. 

This  course  deals  with  the  language  arts  program  as  an  integrated 
area  of  development  in  oral  and  written  communication.  Study  is  made 
of  the  reading  processes,  materials  of  instruction  and  procedures  in  teach- 
ing the  child  to  read.  Purposeful  experiences  are  provided  with  the  other 
techniques  and  materials  of  communication.  Children's  literature  is 
explored  and  methods  of  interpretation  are  studied.  Opportunity  is 
provided  for  observation  and  work  with  children. 

Social  Living  in  the  Elementary  School  9  cr. 

Social  living  in  the  elementary  school  is  an  integrated  course  which 
draws  its  content  from  the  fields  of  science,  mathematics,  geography, 
economics,  sociology  and  history.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  child's  de- 
velopment, his  broadening  environment  and  their  relationship  to  the 
acquisition  of  concepts  and  skills  in  these  areas.  Ways  of  using  sensory 
materials,  activities,  committees,  scientific  problem  solving  and  the 
organization  of  content  into  social  living  units  will  be  studied. 


Indiana   Catalooub   Number  79 

ELECTIVE  COURSES  IN  ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION 

Creative  Activities  in  the  Elementary  School  8  cr. 

This  course  is  planned  to  provide  the  student  with  a  wide  rang^e  of 
creative  experiences  in  the  fields  of  art,  crafts,  music,  rhythmics,  dram- 
atics and  games  in  the  elementary  school.  Stress  is  placed  upon  the  need 
to  help  children  in  developing  their  capacities  for  creative  expression  in 
these  areas. 

Reading  Problems  8  cr. 

This  course  deals  with  the  major  causes  of  reading  disabilities  in 
elementary  school  children.  Emphasis  is  placed  upon  the  analyses  of 
reading  difficulties  and  the  methods  of  organizing  instructional  programs 
to  meet  different  needs  of  children  in  the  elementary  classroom. 

Prerequisite:  Language  Arts  in  the  Elementary  School. 

Speech  Development  and  Improvement  8  cr. 

The  course  is  designed  to  acquaint  students  with  the  various  types 
of  speech  problems  common  to  children  in  the  elementary  schooL  Em- 
phasis  is  placed  upon  speech  rehabilitation.  Study  is  made  of  the  mater- 
ials, methods,  and  techniques  which  the  classroom  teacher  uses  in  im- 
proving the  speech  of  all  children  as  well  as  giving  special  attention  to 
the  needs  of  those  children  who  are  atypical  in  speech  will  be  provided. 
Practice  with  children  in  the  classroom  wtl  be  provided. 

REQUIRED  COURSE  IN  SECONDARY  EDUCATION 

Problems  of  Secondary  Education  and  Guidance  3  er. 

This  is  a  basic  course  in  secondary  education  designed  to  aid  tha 
student  wth  the  practical  problems  of  teaching.  Special  attention  ia 
given  to  problems  in  such  areas  as:  teacher-pupil  relationships,  classroom 
organization,  the  nature  of  the  secondary  school  population,  the  cur- 
riculum, extra-class  activities  and  home  room  practices. 

ELECTIVE  COURSES  IN  SECONDARY  EDUCATION 
Adolescent  Psychology  8  cr. 

This  eourse  is  a  study  of  the  adolescent  child  as  revealed  by  re- 
searches of  his  emotions,  personality  integration,  social  adjustment, 
character  development,  moral  problems,  attitudes,  religious  interests, 
home  adjustments,  and  mental  hygiene. 

Guidance  8  er. 

This  course  presents  the  need  for  guidance  of  youth  in  the  public 
school,  and  gives  the  prospective  teacher  many  of  the  fundamential 
skills  and  techniques  he  can  use  in  meeting  the  guidance  needs  of  his 
students.  Guidance  is  defined  broadly  to  include  vocational,  educational, 
personal,  and  social  counseling,  and  includes  both  the  responsibilities  of 
the  regular  classroem  teacher  as  well  as  the  specialized  guidance  coun- 
selor or  direck>r. 


go  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

Reading  Problems  of  Junior  and  Senior  High  School  Students  3  cr. 

This  course  is  planned  to  help  the  secondary  or  special  teacher  to 
work  with  the  pupils  who  are  not  able  to  do  satisfactory  work  because 
of  reading  problems.  Special  help  is  given  in  basic  reading  skills,  the 
development  of  readiness  for  reading  in  the  content  fields  at  all  levels, 
techniques  for  improving  reading  comprehension,  reading  rate,  and 
study  skills. 


Indiana   Catal.oous  Numbkh  gl 

ENGLISH  AND  SPEECH  DEPARTMENT 

Rhodes  R.  Stabley,  Head  of  Department 

Galen  S.  Besco  Edna  Hays 

Abigail  C.  Boardman  Donald  A.  Hess 

Edward  F.  Carr  Arthur  F.  Nicholson 

Robert  W.  Ensley  Maurice  L.  Rider 

James  R.  Green  Margaret  0.  Stewart 

The  English  and  Speech  Department  serves  two  main  functiona. 
First,  through  courses  required  of  aH  students  as  part  of  the  general 
education  program  of  the  college,  the  Department  aims  at  the  improve- 
ment of  English  usage  in  both  writing  and  speaking  and  of  other  forma 
of  communication  such  as  listening,  observing,  reading,  and  demon- 
strating. Second,  for  a  select  group  of  students  who  show  marked 
interest  and  competence,  the  Department  undertakes  to  give  specialized 
training  needed  for  the  successful  teaching  of  English  and  Speech  in 
secondary  schools. 

Because  of  the  need  of  good  English  usage  by  teachers  of  all  sub- 
jects, candidates  for  Junior  Standing  are  required  to  reach  a  satisfactory 
standard  for  both  oral  and  written  expression  (see  page  34).  At  the 
end  of  the  sophomore  year,  therefore,  a  general  English  examination  is 
given  to  all  students  to  determine  their  competency  in  these  matters. 
Speech  difficulties  are  also  checked  on.  A  speech  test  is  given  to  all 
entering  students,  and  wherever  noticeable  defects  or  limitations  are 
revealed,  an  appropriate  remedial  program  is  arranged  for  the  individual 
according  to  his  needs. 

A  student  may  elect  to  specialize  in  either  English  or  general  Speech, 
perhaps  even  in  both.  Graduation  requirements  demand  35  semester 
hours  if  the  student  offers  English  as  his  first  field,  with  14  hours  in 
required  courses  counting  toward  this  total;  eighteen  hours  if  he  offers 
it  as  a  second  field,  with  ten  required  hours  counting  toward  this  total. 

Twenty-four  hours  are  required  for  general  speech  as  a  first  field, 
18  as  a  second  field;  toward  both  totals  are  counted  the  four  hours 
representing  the  two  speech  courses  required  in  general  education. 
Where  certification  is  sought  in  both  fields  these  two  courses  count 
only  toward  one  field. 

GENERAL  EDUCATION  COURSES 

(Required  of  all  students) 

Communication  I  g  er. 

This  course  is  designed  to  develop  basic  skills  in  reading,  writing, 
speaking,  listening,  observing,  and  demonstrating.    Media  employed  in- 


82  Teachers  College  Bulletin 


elude  books,  magazines,  radio,  movies,  television,  art,  music,  drama.  First 
semester,  freshman  year. 

OR— 

English  I  3  cr. 

This  course  is  an  introduction  to  written  composition  featured  by 
extensive  use,  in  class  and  out,  of  the  individual  conference  method. 
Improvement  is  also  sought  in  reading  habits,  interests,  and  skills.  Li- 
brary instruction,  dictionary  study,  and  practice  in  finding  and  using 
research  materials  are  included.    First  semester,  freshman  year. 

AND— 

Speech  I  2  cr. 

This  course  includes  the  study  and  application  of  the  fundamental 
principles  of  effective  speaking;  recording  and  analysis  of  voice;  per- 
sonality adjustment  as  related  to  speaking-listening  situations.  First 
semester,  freshman  year. 

Communication  II  5  cr. 

This  course  is  a  continuation  of  Communication  I.  Second  semester, 
freshman  year.     Prerequisite:    Communication  I. 

OR— 

English  II  3  cr. 

This  course,  essentially  a  continuation  of  English  I,  also  relies 
heavily  on  the  individual  conference  method.  Special  emphasis  is  put  on 
the  further  development  of  techniques  in  the  writing  of  investigative 
papers.    Second  semester,  freshman  year.    Prerequisite:    English  I. 

AND— 

Speech  II  2  cr. 

This  course  is  a  continuation  of  Speech  I  with  special  emphasis  on 
group  discussion,  parliamentary  procedure,  speeches  for  special  occasions. 
Second  semester,  freshman  year.     Prerequisite:    Speech  I. 

World  Culture  I  5  cr. 

In  this  course  are  studied  the  relationships  between  historical  move- 
ments and  their  expression  in  literary  form,  with  materials  taken  from 
leading  cultures  and  nations,  ancient,  medieval  and  modern.  First 
semester,  sophomore  year. 

OR— 

Literature  I  2  cr. 

The  materials  of  this  introductory  course  to  literature  will  include 
works  written  in  the  English  la'nguage — American,  British,  Canadian, 
Australian,  South  African,  etc.  Special  emphasis  will  be  put  on  con- 
temporary writing  as  it  reflects  important  problems.  First  semester, 
sophomore  year. 


Indiana  Catalogue  Number  93 

AND— 
History  of  Civilization  I  3  cr. 

First  semester,  sophomore  year. 

World  Culture  II  5  cr. 

This  course  is  a  continuation  of  World  Culture  I.  Second  semester, 
sophomore  year. 

OR— 
Literature  II  2  cr. 

In  this  course  the  literature  studied  will  include  works  in  translation 
from  the  outstanding  cultures  and  nations  of  the  non-English  speaking 
and  writing  world.     Second  semester,  sophomore  year. 

AND— 
History  of  Civilization  II  3  cr. 

Second  semester,  sophomore  year. 

COURSE  REQUIRED  FOR  SPECIALIZATION  IN  ENGLISH 

In  addition  to  the  required  courses  in  general  education,  students 
desiring  to  make  English  their  first  field  of  specialization  (35  hours)  will 
be  asked  to  take  the  course  below.  Students  planning  to  make  English 
a  second  field  are  expected  to  take  this  course,  but  it  will  not  count 
towards  a  minor.  Permission  to  specialize  in  English  will  be  granted 
only  to  those  students  who  have  already  made  a  strong  record  in  the 
required  courses. 

Recent  Trends  in  the  Teaching  of  English  3  cr. 

This  course  introduces  the  student  to  the  professional  requirements 
and  specialized  problems  of  the  teaching  of  English  in  high  school. 
Background  for  student  teaching  is  provided  through  (1)  study  of  pro- 
fessional literature,  (2)  individual  reports,  (3)  lesson  plans,  (4)  observa- 
tion of  teaching,  and  (5)  participation  in  class  demonstrations.  Each 
semester,  each  year. 

ELECTIVES 
(At  least  one  course  should  be  selected  in  each  group) 

Although  offered  primarily  to  meet  the  needs  and  interests  of  stu- 
dents preparing  to  become  teachers  of  English,  the  courses  described 
below  are  open  to  all  other  students  of  the  college  as  free  electives  by 
permission  of  the  Department  head. 

GROUP  I  —  SURVEY  COURSES 
American  Literature  3  cr. 

This  course  is  a  survey  of  American  literature  from  colonial  times 
to  the  present.    First  semester  each  year. 

English  Literature  3  cr. 

This  course  is  a  survey  of  English  literature  from  Anglo-Saxon  times 
to  the  present.    Second  semester  each  year. 


g4  Teachers   College  Bulletin 

American  Poetry  8  cr. 

This  course  will  offer  a  careful  study  of  selected  American  poets. 

American  Prose  3  cr. 

This  course  will  offer  a  careful  study  of  selected  American  writers. 

World  Literature 

Extensive  reading  of  foreign  literature  in  translation,  chosen  mainly 
from  Oriental,  European  and  South  American  countries,  forms  the  basis 
of  this  course. 

Children's  Literature  and  Story  Telling  8  cr. 

See  page  79  for  a  description  of  this  course. 

GROUP  2  —  PERIOD  COURSES 
Pre-Shakespeare  8  cr. 

A  seminar  course  which  includes  a  study  of  the  best  of  the  English 
classics  written  from  1350  to  1590. 

Shakespeare  8  cr. 

In  this  course,  the  major  plays  are  studied,  many  others  are  read 
rapidly,  and  the  Elizabethan  age  is  given  a  brief  historical  survey. 

Eighteenth  Century  Literature  3  cr. 

This  course  comprises  a  consideration  of  English  life  and  letters 
from  1660  to  1800,  with  special  emphasis  on  the  rise  and  decline  of 
neo-classicism  and  the  beginnings  of  romanticism. 

The  Romantic  Movement  8  or. 

This  course  treats  the  main  currents  in  the  literature  of  England 
during  the  first  half  of  the  nineteenth  century. 

Victorian  Literature  8  cr. 

This  course  deals  with  the  literary  treatment  of  the  main  problems 
of  the  second  half  of  the  nineteenth  century  in  England — social,  scien- 
tific, religious,  artistic. 

GROUP  3  —  FORM  COURSES 
Contemporary  Poetry  3  cr. 

This  course  offers  a  study  of  the  poetry  of  England  and  America 
since  1880. 

Modem  Drama  8  cr. 

In  this  course  the  major  study  is  the  reading  of  outstanding  Ameri- 
can, British,  and  Continental  plays  from  Ibsen  to  the  present. 

Novel  to  1870  3  cr. 

Based  on  selected  reading  and  discussion,  this  course  traces  the  rise 
and  development  of  the  English  novel. 

Contemporary  Novel  S  cr. 

Based  on  selected  reading  and  discussion,  this  course  traces  the  rise 
and  development  of  the  American  novel. 


Indiana   Catalooub  NuifBKB  86 

Short  Story  3  cr. 

This  course  offers  for  study  the  works  of  the  best  American,  British, 
and  Continental  writers. 

Criticism  3  cr. 

This  is  a  study  of  notable  critical  works  from  Aristotle  to  the  pre- 
sent. 

Essay  3  cr. 

In  this  course  is  traced  the  development  of  the  essay  from  Montaigne 
to  the  present,  with  special  emphasis  on  the  great  essayists  of  France, 
England,  and  the  United  States. 

Literature  of  Biography  3  cr. 

In  this  course  is  read  and  studied  the  work  of  such  outstanding 
biographers  as  Carlyle,  Macaulay,  Strachey,  and  Sandburg. 

GROUP  4  —  WRITING 
Advanced  Composition  3  cr. 

This  course  seeks  to  develop  creative  ability  and  to  improve  writing 
style.  Much  free  composition  is  attempted  in  such  literary  types  as  the 
short  story,  the  magazine  article,  the  personal  essay,  poetry,  and  the 
one-act  play.    Second  semester,  each  year. 

English  Philology  3  cr. 

In  this  course  the  aim  is  to  give  students  an  understanding  of  the 
technicalities  of  modern  English  grammar  and  usage.  Attention  is  given 
to  the  history  of  the  language,  levels  of  usage,  present-day  syntax,  word 
origins,  and  semantic  changes  in  the  language.  First  semester,  each 
year. 

Creative  Writing  3  cr. 

This  is  a  seminar  course  in  which  the  kinds  of  writing  done  are 
chosen  in  line  with  the  special  interests  and  abilities  of  each  student 
after  consultation  with  the  instructor. 

Journalism  3  cr. 

This  course  includes  the  writing  of  the  news  story,  the  column,  the 
feature,  and  the  editorial.  Special  attention  is  given  to  college  and 
school  publications,  with  special  emphasis  on  make-up  and  editorial 
policy. 

GENERAL  SPEECH 
To  satisfy  a  growing  demand  for  teachers  of  speech  and  dramatics 
in  the  public  schools,  the  college  offers  a  general  speech  curriculum. 
Students  desiring  certification  in  this  area  may  elect  either  as  a  first 
field  of  specialization,  which  requires  24  hours,  or  as  a  second  field  of 
specialization,  which  requires  18  semester  hours  credit,  with  4  hours 
from  required  speech  courses  counting  in  both  cases. 

The  courses  in  speech  are  designed  to  develop  the  student's  powers 
of  oral  expression  and  communication,  to  present  a  rich  cultural  back- 
ground in  the  speech  arts,  and  to  aid  in  vocational  preparation. 

Students  not  interested  in  securing  certification,  but  who  wish 
merely  to  preparae  themselves  more  adequately  for  handling  language 

.  J 


86  Teachers  College  Bxtlletin 

problems  incident  to  all  teaching,  may,  with  the  permission  of  the  depart- 
ment head,  take  certain  courses  as  free  electives. 

COURSES  REQUIRED  FOR  CERTIFICATION  IN  GENERAL  SPEECH 
Speech  I  2  cr. 

Speech  II  2  cr. 

These  courses  are  described  on  page  82. 

Oral  Interpretation  3  cr. 

This  course  emphasizes  the  understanding  and  appreciation  of 
literature  through  developing  skill  in  reading  aloud.  Special  attention 
is  given  to  selecting,  adapting,  and  preparing  material  for  presentation 
in  high  school  classes. 

Phonetics  and  Voice  8  cr. 

This  course  includes  an  analysis  of  speech  sounds  used  in  English 
so  that  students  may  develop  auditory  acuity  and  correct  reproduction 
of  sounds;  transcription  of  spoken  material  using  the  I.  P.  A.  system; 
study  of  structure  and  function  of  speech  organs;  voice  improvement. 

Play  Prodaction  8  cr. 

This  course  affords  each  student  the  opportunity  to  select,  cast, 
rehearse,  and  produce  a  one-act  play.  Included  are  suggestions  on  how 
to  improvise  for  meeting  the  demands  of  small  stages. 

Speech  Program  in  the  Secondary  Schools  2  or. 

In  this  course  the  student  is  introduced  to  the  practical  problems  of 
organizing  and  directing  programs  in  dramatics,  forensics,  radio,  and 
speech  correction  and  improvement.  It  is  designed  primarily  to  meet 
the  needs  of  students  majoring  in  general  si>eech. 

ELECTIVES 
Speech  Problems  3  cr. 

This  course  introduces  the  student  to  the  organization  of,  and  re- 
quirements for  certification  in,  the  field  of  speech  and  hearing.  The 
major  types  of  speech  and  hearing  disorders  are  surveyed.  Emphasis  is 
placed  on  diagnostic  and  therapeutic  considerations  for  the  problems  of 
retarded  speech  development,  articulatory  disorders,  and  voice  disorders. 
Prerequisite:  Phonetics  and  Voice. 

Speech  Development  and  Improvement  3  cr. 

This  course,  designed  for  elementary  students,  includes  the  study 
of  normal  speech  and  language  development,  the  types  of  speech  and 
hearing  disorders  common  to  the  classroom,  and  procedures  for  speech 
improvement. 

Radio  I  3  cr. 

This  course,  combining  lecture  and  workshop,  deals  with  radio  as  a 
resource  for  the  classroom  teacher;  utilizes  live  programs,  transcriptions 


Indiana   Catalooub  Number  87 

and  recordings;  presents  problems  of  equipment,  use,  maintenance,  and 
operation  of  the  school  radio  workshop. 

Radio  II  8  er. 

This  course  offers  additional  practice  in  radio  production,  in  attain- 
ing skill  in  microphone  techniques,  and  in  preparing  scripts  for  routine 
and  special  occasions.      Prerequisite:  Radio  I. 

Creative  Dramatics  and  Story  Telling  3  cr. 

An  advanced  course  in  play  production,  it  deals  with  the  technical 
aspects  of  composition,  picturization,  movement,  rhythm,  and  pantomime. 
Each  student  will  cast,  rehearse,  and  direct  a  one-act  play  as  the  main 
project.    Prerequisite:  Play  Production. 

Costume  and  Make-up  8  cr. 

This  course  deals  with  the  practical  application  of  straight  and 
character  make-up.  Emphasis  on  costuming  to  show  how  mood  and 
illusion  can  be  created  through  proper  selection  of  style,  color,  and 
texture  of  materials. 

Stagecraft  and  Scenic  Design  and  Lighting  3  cr. 

This  course  stresses  all  practical  phases  of  stagecraft.  Work  on 
major  productions  of  the  semester  is  included. 

Community  Dramatics  and  Pageantry  8  er. 

This  course  deals  with  practical  problems  in  stage  movement  and 
business,  lighting,  costume  and  make-up.  Material  is  presented  from 
the  standpoint  of  the  director  responsible  for  pageants  and  dramatic 
activities  on  playgrounds,  in  camps,  and  in  community  projects. 

Debate,  Group  Discussion,  and  Parliamentary  procedure  3  cr. 

In  this  course  the  principles  and  practices  related  to  the  various 
areas  represented  are  studied,  discussed,  and  practiced. 

Choral  Speaking  3  cr. 

Choral  speaking  aims  through  the  communal  voicing  of  poetry  to 
stimulate  appreciation,  interpretation,  and  artistic  expression  of  poetry, 
to  train  choral  leaders  in  the  technique  of  choir  conducting,  and  in  the 
selection  and  treatment  of  materials. 

Psychology  of  Speech  8  cr. 

This  course  aims  to  Investigate  the  several  theories  on  speech  origin; 
study  the  neurological  and  psychological  bases  of  speech;  trace  the 
ontogeny  of  speech  and  language;  study  speech  as  an  aspect  of  personal- 
ity structure;  and  investigate  certain  speaker-audience  phenomena. 
The  psychology  of  stuttering  is  given  special  consideration.  Prere- 
quisites: Phonetics  and  Voice;  Speech  Problems  (Except  by  consent  of 
the  instructor). 

Speech  Pathology  8  er. 

This  course  is  designed  to  provide  more  extensive  background  in  the 


gg  Teachers  College  Bttllktin 

severe  speech  pathologies.  Anatomy  and  physiology  of  3i>eech  structure 
are  considered  as  background  for  the  study  of  cleft  palate,  cerebral 
palsy,  voice  pathologies,  and  hearing  problems.  Prerequisites:  Speech 
Problems. 

Speech  and  Hearing  Clinic  4  cr. 

This  course  offers  the  student  experience  in  diagnosis  and  treatment 
commensurate  with  his  particular  course  background.  Practice  is  given 
in  the  use  of  clinical  instruments,  lesson  planning,  case  reports  and 
histories,  and  treatment  in  both  individual  and  group  situations.  Pre- 
requisites: Speech  Problems;  Psychology  of  Speech;  Speech  Pathology 
(for  Advanced  Practicum). 


Indiana  Catalogue  Number  P* 


FOREIGN  LANGUAGES  DEPARTMENT 

Edward  W.  BieghliEB,  Head  of  Department 

The  Department  of  Foreign  Languages  recognizes  as  its  primary 
duty  the  preparation  of  teachers  in  French  and  Spanish.  It  aims  also 
to  present  these  languages  and  the  cultures  that  lie  behind  them  to 
the  non-specialist  who  wishes  thus  to  broaden  his  general  education. 

Courses  I  to  IV  in  French  and  Spanish  are  designed  primarily  for 
the  general  student.  The  objectives  of  this  unit  are  accurate  pronounci- 
?.tion,  some  ability  in  understanding  the  spoken  word  and  in  self- 
expression,  maximum  ability  in  reading,  and  some  appreciation  of  the 
motives  and  main  currents  of  French  and  Spanish  cultures.  The  for- 
malities of  grammar  are  reduced  to  their  functional  minimum. 

Courses  V  and  above,  conducted  largely  in  the  language  in  question, 
are  designed  particularly  for  the  prospective  teacher.  They  need  not  be 
taken  in  numerical  sequence.  The  language  specialist  is  strongly  urged 
to  have  at  least  the  elementary  work  in  a  related  language. 

A  student  offering  a  language  as  the  first  field  of  specialization  must 
complete  a  minimum  of  24  semester  hours  in  that  language;  as  a  second 
field  of  specialization  18  semester  hours  are  required. 

SPANISH 

Spanish  I  and  II:  Elementary  Spanish  3  cr.  each 

This  elementary  sequence  I-II  is  designed  to  develop  basic  skills  in 
pronunciation,  aural  comprehension,  speaking,  and  reading.  Constant 
oral  drill  serves  to  encourage  automatic  response  to  recurring  basic 
phrase-units.  Reading  material  is  chosen  in  part  on  a  basis  of  social 
and  cultural  content. 

Spanish  III  and  IV:    Intermediate  Spanish  3  cr.  each 

In  this  intermediate  sequence  we  seek  further  development  of  the 
basic  skills,  and  move  progressively  toward  making  Spanish  the  language 
of  the  classroom.  On  completion  of  this  sequence  the  student  should  be 
able  to  read  standard  modern  Spanish  with  little  difficulty,  understand 
what  is  said  to  him,  and  express  himself  in  a  familiar  situation. 

Students  who  present  one  year  of  high-school  Spanish  should  take 
Spanish  II;  those  who  present  two  years  of  high-school  Spanish  should 
take  Spanish  III. 

Spanish  Y:  Advanced  Spanish  Language  3  cr. 

This  course,  which  reviews  and  supplements  the  grammar  of  the 
earlier  sequences,  aims  toward  a  systematic  analysis  of  the  Spanish 
language.  It  includes  illustrative  composition  zl-I  analysi:s  cJ  -••  i^- 
temporary  texts.  - 


90  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

Spanish  VI:   Hispanic  Culture  3  cr. 

In  this  course  the  student  is  introduced  to  the  salient  facts  of  the 
Spanish  and  Latin  American  culture:  ethnic  composition,  geography  and 
its  impact  on  society,  high  points  of  history,  regional  differences  and 
characteristic  cultural  philosophies. 

Spanish  VII:    Spanish  Literature  3cr. 

This  course  presents  a  rapid  survey  of  the  main  currents  of  the 
literary  history  of  S'pain,  with  particular  stress  on  the  nineteenth  and 
twentieth  centuries. 

Spanish  VIII:    Spanish  American  Literature  3  cr. 

After  some  consideration  of  the  basic  trends  of  Spanish  American 
literature,  this  course  concentrates  its  attention  on  the  recent  novel  of 
social  thesis. 

Spanish  IX:   Prose  Fiction  in  Spain  3  cr. 

After  a  brief  survey  of  the  picaresque  novel  of  the  Golden  Age  and 
its  influence  on  European  literature,  this  course  considers  in  particular 
the  realistic  novel  after  1850  and  the  view  it  affords  of  modern  customs 
and  manners. 

Spanish  X:   Special  Projects  3  cr. 

This  course  is  designed  to  satisfy  the  special  needs  of  a  group  as 
they  may  arise.  It  may  be  utilized  for  further  training  in  conversation 
and  composition,  commercial  usage,  study  of  periodical  literature,  recent 
theater,  etc.    It  may  be  repeated  with  credit. 

FRENCH 

French  I  and  II:   Elementary  French  3  cr.  each 

French  III  and  IV:  Intermediate  French  3  cr.  each 

French  V:   Advanced  French  Language  3  cr. 

French  VI:    French  Culture  3  cr. 
The  objectives  and  methods  of  these  sequences  and  courses  parallel 
those  of  Spanish  I- VI. 

French  VII:  French  Literature  through  the  Eighteenth  Century         3  cr. 

After  touching  on  the  characteristic  qualities  and  origins  of  French 
literature,  this  course  will  devote  major  attention  to  the  seventeenth  and 
eighteenth  centuries. 

French  Vlll:  Nineteenth  Cemtury  French  Literature  3  cr. 

This  course  aims  to  present  a  cohei'ent  survey  of  the  literary  history 
of  the  nineteenth  century,  with  due  consideration  of  the  social  factors 
and  events  underlying  it. 

French  IX:   Twentieth  Century  French  Literature  3  cr. 

This  course  will  examine  the  literary  scene  of  the  current  century 
and  its  relationship  with  French  life  of  today. 

French  X:   Special  Projects  3  cr. 

This  course  parallels  Spanish  X. 


Indiana  Catalogue  Number  91 


GEOGRAPHY  DEPARTMENT 

L.  C.  Davis,  Head  of  Department 

NORAH   E.   ZiNK 

The  Geography  Department  serves  two  functions.  Through  its  core 
course,  required  of  all  students,  the  Department  aims  at  the  extension 
of  geographic  learnings  throughout  the  college.  For  a  select  group  of 
students  who  demonstrate  special  interest  and  ability,  the  Department 
provides  specialized  training  for  prospective  teachers  and  supervisory 
specialists  in  geography  in  the  secondary  and  elementary  schools  of  the 
Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania. 

Students  specializing  in  geography  come  largely  from  the  Secondary, 
Elementary,  and  Business  Education  Divisions.  For  Elementary  students, 
geography  is  planned  and  presented  to  give  the  fundamentals  needed  in 
presenting  to  young  students  those  understandings  of  people  so  necessary 
for  the  preservation  of  peace  and  liberty  throughout  the  world.  In  the 
Secondary  field  it  enlarges  the  student's  background  for  teaching  geo- 
graphy; it  also  equips  specialists  in  geography  with  the  knowledge,  skill 
and  ability  to  present  geography  at  the  secondary  level.  Geographic 
offerings  available  for  Business  Education  students  prepare  such  students 
to  teach  geography  successfully  both  in  the  Business  Education  Depart- 
ments of  secondary  schools  and  in  the  Geography  Departments  of  such 
schools. 

Opportunities  for  trained  geographers  are  presently  increasing  due 
to  the  expansion  of  geographic  education  in  the  secondary  schools  and 
to  the  increased  demand  for  geographers  in  the  business  and  in; govern- 
ment service.  If  geography  is  the  first  field  of  specialization  24  semester 
hours  of  geography  are  required.  If  geography  is  the  second  field  of 
specialization  18  semester  hours  of  geography  are  required. 

GENERAL  EDUCATION  COURSE 
(Required  of  all  students) 
World  Geography  3  cr. 

The  purpose  of  this  course  is  to  develop  a  knowledge  and  appreciation 
of  patterns  of  the  natural  environment  throughout  the  world,  such  as 
patterns  of  soil,  climate,  vegetation, — and  of  man's  adjustment  to  them, 
with  special  emphasis  on  man's  economic  and  cultural  responses.  This 
course  is  prerequisite  to  all  other  courses  in  the  department. 

REQUIRED  OF  ALL  GEOGRAPHY  MAJORS 

Teaching  of  Geography  in  Secondary  Schools  3  or. 

This  course  is  an  intensive  study  of  modern  techniques  for  teach- 
ing geography,  of  geographic  materials,  and  of  current  curricula  in 
geography.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  contribution  of  geography  t-o  the 
solution  of  national  and  world  problems. 


92  Teachers  College  Bulletw 


ELECTIVES  FOR  GEOGRAPHY  MAJORS  AND  MINORS 
At  least  two  courses  must  be  choscm  from  each  group  beloMr. 
Group  1 — Earth  Studies 
Climatology  3  cr. 

This  course  is  primarily  concerned  with  the  climatic  regions  of 
the  earth,  and  the  limitations  and  advantages  they  offer  for  man's  oceu- 
pance.    This  course  is  a  valuable  aid  to  students  of  World  Problems. 

Geology  3  cr. 

This  covurse  provides  an  intensive  survey  of  the  past  history  of 
earth  development  as  a  basis  for  its  development  as  a  habitat  for  man 
in  the  present  era. 

Meteorology  3  cr. 

This  course  analyzes  the  laws  and  underlying  principles  of  atmos- 
pheric changes.  An  opportunity  is  given  for  students  to  become  familiar 
with  common  weather  instruments,  to  read  and  interpret  weather  maps, 
to  observe  and  record  weather  data,  and  discuss  problems  arising  from 
the  use  of  the  atmosphere  as  a  medium  of  travel  and  transportation. 

Physiography  3  cr. 

This  course  involves  a  detailed  study  of  land  forms,  soils,  minerals, 
their  origin,  development,  and  relationships  to  man's  distributional  pat- 
terns and  adjustment  problems. 

Cartography  3  cr. 

This  course  is  designed  primarily  to  enable  the  student,  geographer 
to  attain  proficiency  in  the  use  and  interpretation  of  maps,  globes,  carto- 
grams,  and  geographic  diagrams.  The  history  of  maps,  the  develop- 
ment of  signs,  symbols,  map  scales;  the  construction  of  projections, 
graphs,  and  diagrams,  and  the  application  of  each  of  these  to  the  teach- 
ing of  geography  are  stressed. 

Group  2 — Economics 

Economic  Geography  S'cr. 

This  course  develops  an  understanding  of  world  patterns  of  pro- 
ducing and  consuming  regions,  population  distributions,  world  trade 
routes  and  related  natural  factors.  It  also  deals  with  the  applications 
of  these  understandings  to  the  solution  of  national  and  international 
problems. 

Commercial  Air  Transportation  .3  cr. 

This  course  is  concerned  with  questions  of  importance  in  the  devel- 
opment of  commercial  aviation  such  as:  policies  concerning  the  freedom 
of  the  air,  governmental  agreements,  subsidies,  control  and  use  of  air 
bases,  the  importance  of  the  North,  and  world  air  routes.  This  course 
may  be  used  as  an  elective  in  Aeronautics  Education. 


Indiana  Catalogue  Number  W 


Conservation  of  Natural  Resources  3  cr. 

This  course  involves  a  regional  investigation  of  problems  in  the 
conservation  of  land,  water,  plant  and  animal  resources.  The  regional 
approach  to  the  solution  of  these  problems  is  stressed. 

Geographic  Influences  in  History  3  cr. 

This  course  is  a  study  of  the  relationship  of  the  natural  eaviron- 
mental  factors  to  the  settlement,  development  and  progress  of  selected 
countries — with  major  emphasis  on  the  United  States.  Prerequisites: 
World  Geography  and  Geography  of  the  United  States  and  Canada. 

Trade  and  Transportation  3  cr. 

This  course  includes  a  study  of  transportation  routes,  ports,  railroad 
centers,  hinterlands  and  the  trade  relations  between  production  areas 
and  between  countries. 

Group  3 — Regional  Studies 

Geography  of  the  United  States  and  Canada  3  cr. 

This  course  is  a  regional  study  of  the  United  States  and  Canada, 
concerned  with  the  investigation  of  man's  adjustment  to  his  environment 
as  determined  by  the  physical  factors  of  climate,  vegetation,  relief, 
soils  and  natural  resources.  Recognition  of  political  adjustments  to 
the  geographic  environment  and  the  interrelations  between  the  two 
countries  and  the  rest  of  the  world  are  stressed. 

Geography  of  Pennsylvania  3  cr. 

This  course  involves  the  development  of  regional  understandings 
of  the  natural  environmental  background  of  Pennsylvania's  growth  and 
development.  The  i*egional  planning  program  which  the  Commonwealth 
is  developing  is  carefully  investigated.  Field  trips  to  nearby  points  of 
geographic  interest  are  an  integral  part  of  the  work.  Prerequisites: 
World  Geography  and  Geography  of  Pennsylvania  and  the  United  States. 

Geography  of  Asia  3  cr. 

This  course  comprises  a  study  of  the  major  geographic  regions  of 
the  Soviet  Union,  Southwestern  Asia,  and  India.  Special  emphasis  is 
placed  on  the  natural  resources  and  their  use,  the  peoples,  their  num- 
bers and  distribution,  their  culture  and  recent  cultural  changes,  strategic 
areas,  and  related  political  problems. 

Geography  of  Africa  and  Australia  3  cr. 

This  is  a  regional  study  of  Africa,  Australia,  and  the  neighboring 
islands,  presenting  the  economic  and  social  development  of  the  regions 
of  these  lands  and  their  relationship  to  the  physical  environment.  The 
geographic  aspects  of  the  problems  of  land  tenure,  race,  future  land 
use,  and  the  strategic  importance  of  tJtie  areas  are  considered. 

Geography  of  Europe  3  cr. 

The  aim  of  this  regional  course  is  to  help  students  acquire  the 
ability  to  find  and  apply  geographic  relationships  underlying  land  use. 


94  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

dominant  international  problems,  boundary  disputes  and  the  regional 
complexes  of  the  European  continent. 

Geography  of  the  Far  East  3  cr. 

This  course  includes  a  study  of  Japan,  China,  the  Philippines,  South- 
eastern Asia  and  the  East  Indies  and  involves  an  intensive  investigation 
of  the  natural  factors  and  man's  adjustment  to  them  in  the  geographic, 
economic  and  political  regions  of  Eastern  Asia.  The  geographic  back- 
ground needed  in  planning  solutions  for  raising  standards  of  living, 
for  t-he  wise  use  and  restoration  of  natural  resources  and  the  indus- 
trialization of  countries  is  presented. 

Geography  of  Latin  America  3  cr. 

In  this  course  a  regional  study  is  made  of  Middle  and  South  America. 
Special  emphasis  is  given  to  regional  differences  and  similarities.  Latin 
American  relations  with  other  areas,  especially  the  United  States,  are 
stressed. 

Geography  of  Pennsylvania  and  the  United  States  3  cr. 

See  course  description  under  "Required  in  the  Elementary  Cur- 
riculum." 

World  Problems  in  Geography  3  cr. 

This  course  considers  world  problems  and  the  geographic  back- 
grounds necessary  in  understanding  them.  Attention  is  given  to  bound- 
ary questions,  the  values  and  controls  of  colonies,  fishery  agreements, 
problems  concerning  commercial  aviation,  world  trade,  world  food  re- 
sources, control  and  development  of  natural  resources,  the  making  of 
peace  and  similar  topics. 

Field  Courses  in  Geography  3  cr. 

These  courses,  which  involve  the  study  of  a  selected  area  through 
the  agencies  of  travel  and  actual  investigation,  are  arranged  from  time 
to  time  to  suit  the  needs  of  student  groups. 

REQUIRED  IN  THE  ELEMENTARY  CURRICULUM 

Geography  of  the  United  States  and  Pennsylvania  3  cr. 

This  course  gives  a  comprehensive  treatment  of  the  adjustments  of 
the  peoples  of  Pennsylvania  and  the  United  States  to  the  physical  fac- 
tors— structure,  relief,  climate,  soils,  and  natural  resources — which  mold 
their  destiny.  The  interrelationships  between  the  United  States  and 
Pennsylvania  and  the  rest  of  the  world  are  stressed.  Prerequisite: 
World  Geography. 

Teaching  of  Geography  (Social  Living)  1  to  3  cr. 

Geography's  contribution  to  the  course  Social  Living  in  the  Ele- 
mentary School  should  include  such  topics  as;  the  program  for  geo- 
graphy in  the  Elementary  School  as  proposed  in  Bulletin  233B;  pre- 
geography;  studies  in  methods,  content,  skills  and  attitudes  for  ele- 
mentary geography  teaching;  and  techniques  for  correlation  and  integfra- 
tion  of  geographic  learnings  with  other  subject  matter  areas. 


Indiana  Catalogue  Number  9S 

HEALTH  AND  PHYSICAL  EDUCATION 
DEPARTMENT 

George  P.  Miller,  Head  of  Department 

Lena  Ellenberger  Regis  McKnight 

Malinda  Hamblen  Lewis  Shaffer 

Samuel  Smith 

The  Health  and  Physical  Education  Department  provides  required 
Health  and  Physical  Education  courses  for  all  students  in  all  curricula, 
a  number  of  elective  courses  for  those  seeking  certification  in  the  field 
of  Education  for  Safe  Living  and  some  non-credit  activity  courses. 

All  students  are  expected  to  pass  a  college  swimming  test.  Those 
who  are  unable  to  meet  this  requirement  after  considerable  training  and 
practice  will  be  given  the  privilege  of  meeting  a  substitute  requirement. 

The  Health  and  Physical  Education  Department  serves  the  entire 
college  by  means  of: 

1.  Required  courses  in  Health  and  Physical  Education  in  which 
effort  is  made  to  assist  the  individual  student  to  attain  the 
highest  quality  of  vigor  and  skills  of  which  he  is  capable. 

2.  Professionalized  content  for  Elementary  students  preparing 
them  to  conduct  or  assist  in  conducting  a  modern  Health  and 
Physical  Education  Program  in  the  public  schools. 

3.  Provides  opportunities  for  participation  in  worth-while  leisure 
time  activities  and  att^ainment  of  skills  in  those  of  value  for 
adult  use. 

All  students  taking  Health  the  first  semester  will  take  Physical 
Education  I  the  second  semester;  conversely,  students  taking  Physical 
Education  I  the  first  semester  will  take  Health  the  second  semester. 
All  students  will  take  Physical  Education  II  in  the  third  semester,  and 
Physical  Education  III  in  the  fourth  semester. 

GENERAL  EDUCATION  COURSES 
(Required  of  all  students) 

Health  2  cr. 

Health  consists  of  a  study  of  the  individual  and  community  problems 
with  the  chief  emphasis  placed  on  the  improvement  of  the  student's 
own  health. 

Physical  Education  I  1  cr.' 

This  course  provides  a  seasonal  program  of  sports  and  activities 
that  will  have  some  carry-over  value.  The  activities  will  improve  the 
physical  fitness  of  the  student  and  develop  a  number  of  sport  skills. 


96  Trachers  College  Bullkhn 

Physical  Education  II  1  cr. 

A  continuation  of  Physical  Education  I  with  greater  emphasis  on 
participation  in  activities  learned  in  Physical  Education  I. 

Physical  Education  III  1  cr. 

This  course  will  provide  for  greater  specialization  in  selected  activi- 
ties to  bring  personal  performance  ability  to  advanced  levels.  **The 
equivalent  of  the  American  Red  Cross  Standard  First  Aid  Course  will 
be  included  in  this  course." 

REQUIRED  IN  ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION 
Teaching  of  Health  and  Physical  Education  2  cr. 

The  teaching  of  Health  and  Physical  Education  covers  umits  designed 
to  present  the  meaning,  aim,  scope  and  materials  related  to  Healthful 
School  Living,  Health  Service,  Health  Instruction,  Elementary  Grade 
Activities  in  Physical  Education,  Lesson  Planning  and  Practice  Teaching. 

ELECTIVE  COURSE 
First  Aid  2  cr. 

The  college  course  includes  the  Red  Cross  Standard  Course  which 
requires  18  hours  of  work  and  the  Red  Cross  Advanced  Course  which 
requires  12  hours  of  work.  Red  Cross  certificates  will  be  awarded  upon 
the  successful  completion  of  each  course.  The  student  is  eligible  to 
enroll  in  the  Instructor's  Course  after  completing  the  First  Aid  Course. 
The  successful  completion  of  the  Instructor's  Course  permits  the  holder 
of  that  Certificate  to  conduct  classes  in  First  Aid. 

NON-CREDIT  ACTIVITY  COURSES 
Contemporary  Dance 

Dance  is  a  means  of  communication  through  movement.  It  is  an 
art  which  offers  the  development  of  the  physical  and  creative  abilities 
through  the  medium  of  the  body.  The  value  of  the  dance  for  students 
without  experience  lies  in  developing  the  relationship  between  their 
mental,  emotional,  and  imaginative  life  and  its  proje«.^on  in  bodily 
movements. 

Red  Cross  Life  Saving  and  Swimming 

The  college  cooperates  with  the  American  Red  Cross  in  conducting 
life  saving  and  swimming  classes  in  the  college  pool.  Many  students 
earn  their  Senior  and  Instructor's  certificates  in  Life  Saving.  This 
enables  these  students  to  work  in  summer  camps  and  city  pools  as 
life  savers. 

CERTIFICATION  IN  THE  FIELD  OF  EDUCATION  FOR  SAFE  LIVING 

The  State  Council  of  Education  approved  this  new  certification 
January  9,  1948.  The  four  courses  below,  General  Safety  Education, 
Driver  Education,  the  Organization  and  Administration  of  Safety  Educa- 
tion, and  Methods  and  Materials  in  Safety  Education  in  the  Secondary 
Schools  meet  the  requirements  for  certification  with  12  semester  hours. 


Indiana  Catalogue  Number  97 

A  temporary  standard  certificate  is  issued  upon  the  completion  of  these 
courses  and  it  becomes  permanent  after  two  years  of  successful  experi- 
ence in  the  field. 

General  Safety  Education  3  cr. 

The  General  Safety  Education  course  is  one  which  will  be  valuable 
to  teachers  of  all  grade  levels  and  all  departments.  It  deals  with  the 
recognition  of  unsafe  conditions  and  practices,  and  the  methods  by 
which  they  may  be  eliminated  or  minimized,  in  an  accident  prevention 
program.  The  study  includes  home,  school,  occupational,  and  public 
safety. 

Driver  Education  3  cr. 

Driver  Education  is  a  combination  of  class  instruction  in  traffic 
safety  and  driver  training  in  actual  behind-the-wheel  practice  in  a  dual 
control  car.  It  prepares  the  student  to  teach  driver  education  in  a  high 
school.  The  pre-requisites  for  the  course  are:  the  student  should  have 
driving  ability  above  the  average  and  evidence  of  holding  a  driver's 
license,  plus  at  least  two  years  of  driving  experience  without  having 
had  a  major  accident  for  which  the  driver  is  responsible. 

Organization  and  Administration  of  Safety  Education  3  cr. 

The  Organization  and  Administration  of  Safety  Education  deals 
with  the  basic  principles  of  organizing,  administering  and  supervising, 
safety  education  procedures  in  schools.  A  large  part  of  the  course  is 
devoted  to  methods  of  teaching  pupil  safety  activities  in  school  and 
community. 

Methods  and  Materials  in  Safety  Education  in  the 

Secondary  Schools  3  cr. 

Methods  and  Materials  in  Safety  Education  in  the  Secondary  Schools 
is  a  course  that  emphasizes  the  use  of  correlating  and  integrating  safety 
with  many  different  subjects  and  school  activities,  teaching  safety  as 
a  separate  subject  and  centering 'safety  education  around  pupil  organ- 
izations and  special  projects. 


98  Teachers  College  Bulletin 


HOME  ECONOMICS  DEPARTMENT 

Opal  T.  Rhodes,  Direcior  of  Department 

Anna  M.  Gorman  Helen  C.  Merriman 

Leola  T.  Hayes  Mildred  E.  Omwake 

Elizabeth  Hearn  LaVelle         Ethyl  Verna  Oxley 
Helen  Loftis  Dee  Stephenson  Smith 

Rachel  Dale  Moss 

Leading  educators  are  stressing  three  contributions  of  a  home 
economics  department:  (1)  to  prepare  all  women,  for  their  life  work  as 
homemakers,  and  to  prepare  men  for  their  responsibility  as  future  head 
of  a  family  and  fatherhood.  (2)  to  prepare  teachers  to  educate  high  school 
and  elementary  pupils  for  homeliving  and  (8)  to  prepare  professional 
home  economists  for  their  positions.  Indiana's  home  economics  depart- 
ment fulfills  the  first  two  obligations.  It  meets  the  standards  set  up  by 
the  Smith-Hughes  Act  of  1917  and  has  kept  pace  with  improvements 
in  educational  philosophy,  teacher  education  and  each  of  the  many  areas 
of  homemaking.  The  faculty  know  each  student  personally  and  plan  with 
her  for  experiences  that  best  contribute  to  her  development  as  a  person. 
Our  only  lack  is  sufficient  graduates  to  meet  the  professional  and  mat- 
rimonial demands.  The  following  descriptions  tell  why  our  graduates  are 
so  well  qualified  and  so  much  in  demand. 

CLOTHING 
Clothing  I  3  cr. 

Construction  princip.es  are  applied  in  making  garments.  Quality 
and  construction  of  ready  to  wear  garments,  commercial  patterns,  flat- 
pattern  design,  variety  of  fundamental  construction  processes,  and  being 
well  groomed  through  clothing  selection  and  construction  are  emphasized. 
Sewing  machines  used  extensively  but  appropriate  hand  processes  and 
finishes  are  learned.    Cost  of  fabric  is  approximately  $27. 

Clothing  II  2  cr. 

An  intensive  study  of  the  practical  methods  of  solving  fitting  prob- 
lems and  applying  the  principles  of  dress  design  form  the  basis  for  this 
course.  Practical  applications  are  made  by  draping  on  individual  dress 
forms.  Students  demonstrate  the  more  difficult  constructive  processes 
in  sewing.    Cost  of  fabric  is  approximately  $27.   Prerequisite:  Clothing  I. 

Clothing  III  2  cr. 

Coat  or  suit  is  tailored  and  garment  remodeled.  Additional  ability 
is  gained  in  pattern  construction  and  use,  construction  techniques,  se- 
lection and  care  of  clothing.  Constructed  garments  are  compared  with 
ready-to  wears.    Cost  of  fabric  is  approximately  $35. 

Textiles  and  Clothing  Economics  2  cr. 

Selection,  cost,  upkeep,  wearing  quality  and  handling  of  clothing 
and  household  fabrics.  Influence  of  raw  material,  construction  and  finish 


Indiana   Cataloouk  Numbrr  g9 

upon  suitability,  durability,  uses,  cost  and  hyg^ienic  values.  Laws  af- 
fecting manufacture  and  sales  of  fabrics,  articles  and  garments.  Labels. 
Ability  to  identify,  select  and  care  for  fabrics  and  finiahed  products 
demonstrated. 

CONSUMER  EDUCATION 
Consumer  Economics  2  er. 

Understanding  of  economic  problems  of  consumer  buyers  is  sought. 
Problems  of  production,  distribution,  merchandising,  and  buying  are 
studied.  Emphasis  is  placed  upon  helps  available  from  government, 
private  agencies  and  consumers  themselves.  A  program  for  the  educa- 
tion of  intelligent  consumers  is  planned. 

FAMILY  AND  CHILD 
Child  Development  and  Nursery  School  Child  4  er. 

Phases  of  development  from  conception  to  adolescence  are  studied. 
Observation  and  care  of  children  in  many  situations  is  provided.  Em- 
phasis is  placed  on  the  child  as  an  individual  and  on  the  adult's  oppor- 
tunities and  responsibilities  for  assisting  each  child  toward  optimum 
development. 

Family  Relations  2  er. 

Students  have  opportunity  to  gain  knowledge  and  understanding  of 
personality  development  and  the  importance  of  early  influence  in  well 
adjusted  lives  and  family  stability.  Emphasis  is  on  preparation  for 
marriage  and  problems  of  human  relations  within  homes.  Reading, 
discussions,  and  conferences  are  used  in  facing  and  solving  problems. 

FOODS  AND  NUTRITION 
Foods  I 

Scientific  principles  are  applied  to  meal  planning,  food  selection  and 
preparation.  Family  meals  are  emphasized.  Experience  in  marketing 
is  included  in  the  study  of  purchasing  and  food  costs.  Laboratory  work 
provides  opportunities  to  develop  good  work  habits  and  standards  for 
high  quality  products.  3  nurses  uniforms  and  comfortable  white  shoes 
are  needed. 

Foods  II 

More  advanced  problems  in  cookery  and  meal  service  than  those  of 
Foods  I.  Some  of  these  relate  to  food  preservation,  freezing  of  foods, 
meat  selection  and  cookery,  poultry  dressing,  methods  of  making  breads, 
cakes  and  pastry.  Recent  research  and  experimentation  indicating  new 
and  improved  methods  of  cookery  are  considered.  Demonstrations  and 
other  teaching  techniques  serve  as  a  preparation  for  teaching. 

Nutrition  8  cr. 

Positive  relation  of  food  to  health.  Nutritional  requirements  in 
infancy,  childhood,  adult  life,  pregnancy,  lactation,  old  age,  common 
nutritional  deficiencies  and  disorders.    Signs  of  good  and  poor  nutrition. 


100  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

functions  of  nutrients,  interdependence  of  dietary  essentials,  and  nutri- 
tive essentials  of  an  optimum  diet  are  studied.  Adequate  diets  on 
different  economic  levels,  racial  and  nationality  bases  considered. 

Schod  Lunchroom  Management  I  3  cr. 

Students  gain  instruction  and  experience  in  menu  making,  market- 
ing, food  preparation  and  service,  accounting  and  management.  Lunches 
served  are  nutritionally  adequate  and  appealing  in  taste  and  color.  The 
educational  possibilities  and  significance  of  the  school  lunch  are  stressed. 
The  National  School  Lunch  Program  is  studied  and  used. 

HEALTH 

Home  Care  of  the  Sick  1  cr. 

Develop  understanding  of  part  the  home  plays  in  positive  health. 
Health  problems  families  face.  Minimizing  discomforts  and  other  effects 
of  illness,  safety  and  sanitation,  .understanding  emotional  adjustments 
and  mental  health.  Provision  is  made  for  student  practice  of  nursing 
procedures.  Hospitals  and  homes  provide  observation  and  actual 
experience. 

HOME  MANAGEMENT 

Family  Finance  2  cr. 

Underlying  economic  principles  and  personal  and  family  financial 
problems  as  wise  use  of  income,  time,  human  resources;  increasing  real 
and  psychic  income;  accounts,  savings  and  investments;  legal  contacts; 
banking;  installment  buying  and  credit;  home  production  and  optimum 
use  of  social  income  sources.  Understanding  of  what  low  incomes  mean 
in  terms  of  living. 

Home  Management  3  cr. 

All  activities  of  normal  home  living  as  a  group  experience.  Man- 
agerial ability  is  developed  and  human  values  and  relations  emphasized. 
Overall  supervision;  planning,  buying,  preparing  and  serving  meals;  use 
and  care  of  all  household  equipment;  care  and  management  of  the 
home;  entertaining;  child  care  and  guidance;  providing  for  better 
living. 

Household  Care  and  Equipment  2  cr. 

Principles  needed  for  the  wise  selection,  efficient  operation  and 
care  of  kitchen,  laundry,  and  other  household  equipment.  Comparative 
studies  of  operation  and  efficiency  of  various  kinds  of  equipment,  pro- 
cedures and  cleaning  materials.  Good  management  is  emphasized  in 
arrangement,  storage,  working  heights,  procedures  that  will  save  time, 
energy  and  money. 

Housing  2  cr. 

Problems  confronting  families  in  finding  suitable  housing.  Com- 
munity planning,  selection  or  construction  of  homes,  architectural  de- 
signs, materials  and  processes  in  construction  and  finishes,  factors 
affecting  costs  and  quality,  building  economics,  legal  aspects,  heating, 


Indiana  Catalogue  Number  101 

ventilation,  lighting,  plumbing,  floor  plans  for  convenience,  conxfort,  and 
aesthetic  values,  and  housing  maintejriance. 

PROFESSIONAL 

Professional  Orientation  3  cr. 

An  orientation  and  guidance  course  designed  to  acquaint  prospective 
teachers  with  professional  opportunities  and  requirements,  the  relation 
of  school  to  society,  the  oi'ganization  of  the  American  school  system,  the 
pupil  and  the  educative  process.  The  scope,  areas,  school  orientation, 
history,  leaders,  organizations  and  publications  in  home  economics  are 
studied  for  understanding  and  appreciation.  Club  work,  projects  and  the 
advisement  program  are  integrated  and  related  in  solving  personal  and 
school  problems  towai'd  the  best  development  of  students  and  future 
teachers.  Directed  observations  of  various  schools  and  learning  situa- 
tions will  be  required. 

Student  Teaching  (Including  Vocational  Home  Economics  Methods) 

6  cr. 

Helps  students  understand  and  solve  problems  of  the  home  economics 
teacher  in  vocational  or  general  position.  Problems  considered  are  adult 
education,  curriculum,  evaluation,  pupil-teacher  planning,  home  visits  and 
experiences,  teaching  techniques,  boys  and  mixed  classes,  and  home  liv- 
ing in  elementary  grades,  democratic  school  and  home  life.  Study,  ob- 
servations, participation  used. 

Student  Teaching  (Resident)  6  cr. 

During  student  teaching  seniors  students  live  in  typical  commu- 
nities and  teach  in  superior  departments  approved  for  vocational  home 
economics.  Saturday  campus  conferences  provide  for  study,  help  with 
professional  problems  and  an  exchange  of  ideas  and  experiences. 

Professional  Practicum  Including  School  Law  2  cr. 

The  purpose  of  this  course  is  to  broaden  the  concept  of  subject  mat- 
ter and  to  give  the  beginning  teacher  a  sense  of  values  which  can  be  used 
in  the  selection  of  educational  experiences  and  materials.  It  aims  also 
to  teach  him,  through  guidance  in  his  planning  and  teaching,  how  to 
organize,  motivate,  and  use  these  experiences  and  materials  in  child 
learning.  This  course  also  aims  to  provide  an  interpretation  of  school 
law  as  it  directly  pertains  to  the  needs  of  the  teacher.  The  course  Is 
given  concurrently  with  student  teaching. 

RELATED  ART 
Clothing  For  the  Individual  (Costume  Design)  2  cr. 

Opportunity  to  select  clothing  for  herself  and  others  under  super- 
vision. Personality,  coloring  and  figure  variations  are  studied  in  rela- 
tion to  color,  texture  and  pattern  designs.  Costume  accessories  are 
designed  and  made.  Creates  a  consciousness  of  the  value  of  being  well 
groomed  and  provides  techniques  for  accomplishing  this.  Prerequisites: 
Principles  of  Design,  Clothing  I. 


102  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

Home  Furnishing  3  cr. 

Students  develop  ability  to  create  attractive  livable  homes.  Floors, 
\«ralls,  and  windows,  selection  and  arrangement  of  furnishings  and  furni- 
ture and  remedies  for  problem  rooms  and  houses  are  studied.  Impro- 
vising, mending,  remodeling,  and  refinishing  furniture,  making  curtains, 
slip  covers  and  draperies,  etc.,  provide  practical  problems.  Prerequisites: 
Principles  of  Design  and  Clothing  I. 

ELECTIVES 

Clinic  in  Home  Economics  Education  3  cr. 

Further  study  for  teaching  various  areas  needed  for  adequate  living 
in  the  home  and  the  community.  The  philosophy  underlying  learning, 
evaluation,  curriculum  planning  and  effective  teaching  is  studied  and 
applied  to  specific  field  situations. 

Clothing  IV  2  cr. 

An  appreciation  of  what  constitutes  good  design  in  hats  as  part  of 
the  complete  ensemble  is  developed.  Selection,  construction  and  re- 
modeling hats  for  different  seasons  is  included. 

Clothing  V  Special  Problems  in  Clothing  3  cr. 

Clothing  problems  met  by  individual  in  home,  college  and  teaching 
are  solved.    Prerequisites:  Clothing  I  and  the  consent  of  the  instructor. 

Diet  in  Disease  (Diet  Therapy)  3  cr. 

A  study  of  diet  problems  of  infants,  growing  children,  the  aged, 
pregnant  and  lactating  women,  and  diseases  such  as  diabetes,  nephritis, 
gastro-intestinal  disease  anVi  others  needing  special  dietary  treatment. 
Special  diets  are  planned,  calculated,  and  prepared.  Planned  for  students 
desiring  advanced  nutritional  study.  Prerequisites:  Foods  I,  Nutrition, 
Chemistry,  Physiology  or  Biology. 

School  Lunchroom  Management  II 

(Organization  and  Administration)  3  cr. 

Problems  of  administration  in  various  types  of  educational  institu- 
tions; management  of  personnel,  labor,  food,  equipment,  and  supplies; 
record  keeping;  professional  standards  and  ethics;  expQrience  in  super- 
vision of  food  service.  Field  trips  to  cafeterias  and  other  food  service 
units. 

Special  Problems  in  Foods  3  cr. 

Food  problems  which  meet  the  particular  needs  of  the  group  or 
of  individuals  are  solved.  Foods  for  special  occasions,  demonstrations, 
experimental  work,  food  decoration  and  arrangement  of  illustrative  mate- 
rial are  among  the  suggested  units.    Prerequisites:   Foods  I  and  II. 


Indiana  Catalogue  Number  M8 


ELECTIVE  FOR  OUT  OF  DEPARTMENT  STUDENTS  ONLY 
Nutrition  Education  1  cr. 

Fundamentals  of  food  selection,  menu  making  and  principles  of 
nutrition  are  studied.  Application  is  made  to  the  various  age  g^^oups, 
economic  levels  and  social  and  national  background.  Sources  of  illus- 
trative material  for  teaching  are  made  available. 

REQUIRED  IN  GENERAL  EDUCATION 

Home  and  Family  Living  3  cr. 

Meets  the  needs  of  all  men  and  women  as  homemakers  and  parents. 
Units  possible  to  select:  adequate  meals;  food  purchasing,  preparation 
and  service;  child  care  and  development;  clothing  selection  and  care; 
housing;  furnishing  and  or  equipping  the  home;  management  and  wise 
use  of  human  and  material  resources,  etc. 


104  Teachers  College  Bulletin 


MATHEMATICS  DEPARTMENT 

Joy  E.  Mahachek,  Head  of  Department 

Leroy  H.  Schnell 
I.  L.  Stright 

The  Mathematics  Department  provides  courses  primarily  for  the 
Diyisions  of  Secondary  and  Elementary  Education  but  students  from 
any  department  may  elect  courses  in  sequence  either  to  improve  their 
general  education  or  to  prepare  for  technical  work  in  various  fields. 

A  course  in  Fundamentals  of  Mathematics  is  required  of  all  students 
in  the  Secondary  Division  unless  proficiency  is.  shown  by  examination. 
A  course  in  Arithmetic  in  Social  Living  is  required  of  all  students  pre- 
paring to  teach  in  the  elementary  school. 

Students  in  the  Secondary  Division  choosing  mathematics  as  a  first 
field  of  specialization  must  have  a  minimum  of .^24  semester  hours  in 
mathematics;  those  choosing  it  as  a  second  field  of  specialization  must 
have  a  minimum  of  18  hours  in  addition  to  the  required  course,  Teaching 
Mathematics  in  the  Secondary  School.  These  numbers  indicate  only 
the  acceptable  minimum.  Students  specializing  should  plan  to  take  as 
many  additional  electives  as  possible. 

COURSES  REQUIRED  FOR  SPECIALIZATION  IN  MATHEMATICS 

College  Algebra  3  cr. 

This  course  includes  a  brief  review  of  high  school  algebra  and 
development  of  algebra  necessary  for  subsequent  college  mathematics. 
A  study  is  made  of  functions  and  their  graphs,  linear  and  quadratic 
equations,  progressions,  the  binomial  theorem,  theory  of  equations, 
variation,  determinants,  permutations,  combinations,  and  probability. 

Trigonometry  3  cr. 

Plane  trigonometry  is  essential  for  student-s  preparing  to  teach  the 
course  in  secondary  schools  and  is  basic  to  subsequent  courses  in  college 
mathematics  and  science.  It  emphasizes  indirect  measurement  through 
the  solution  of  triangles  and  trigonometrical  analysis. 

Analytic  Geometry  3  cr. 

This  course  provides  a  background  for  the  calculus  and  for  other 
advanced  courses.  It  relates  algebraic  equations  with  geometric  forms 
thro  the  study  of  rectangular  and  polar  coordinates,  the  straight  line,  the 
circle,  conies,  transformation  of  coordinates,  parametric  equations,  and 
higher  plane  curves  in  geometry  of  two  dimensions.  In  the  geometry  of 
three  dimensions  point,  plane,  line  and  quadric  surfaces  are  emphasized. 
Prerequisite:    College  Algebra  and  Trigonometry 


Indiana  Catalogue  Number  105 


OR 


Mathematical  Analysis  I  and  II 

These  two  courses  may  be  substituted  for  College  Algebra,  Trigo- 
nometry, and  Analytic  Geometry.  They  will  cover  the  same  material 
and  carry  the  same  total  credit  hours  but  will  be  taught  as  fused  courses. 

Mathematical  Analysis  I  4  cr. 

An  integrated  organization  of  the  traditional  subject  matter  of 
College  Algebra,  Trigonometry  and  Analytic  Geometry  serves  as  the 
basic  material  for  the  two  courses.  The  central  idea  of  the  organization 
is  the  function  concept.  The  principal  topics  in  this  course  are  linear 
functions  and  graphs,  rational  and  irrational  functions,  logarithms  and 
logarithmic  functions,  trigonometric  functions  and  formulas,  the  solu- 
tion of  triangles,  exponential  functions,  permutations,  combinations,  and 
probability.  This  semester's  work  is  closely  correlat-ed  with,  and  forms 
an  extension  of,  the  senior  high  school  mathematics. 

Mathematical  Analysis  II  5  cr. 

As  a  continuation  of  Mathematical  Analysis  I,  the  chief  topics 
considered  in  this  course  are:  the  properties  of  circular  functions,  the 
straight  line,  loci,  the  conic  sections,  polar  coordinates,  transformation 
of  coordinates,  the  general  equation  of  the  second  degree  in  two  variables, 
parametric  equations,  sequences  and  series,  and  the  determination  of 
equations  representing  given  experimental  data.  Prerequisite:  Mathe- 
matical Analysis  I. 

Calculus  I  3  cr. 

The  elementary  properties  of  differentiation  and  integration  are 
developed  simultaneously.  This  course  aims  to  give  the  student  a  clear 
understanding  of  the  meaning  of  the  derivative  as  well  as  mechanical 
facility  in  the  computation  of  the  derivative  of  algebraic  and  transcen- 
dental functions.  Applications  of  the  derivative  in  solving  problems  of 
maxima  and  minima,  in  finding  roots  of  equations,  and  in  curvature  are 
emphasized.  The  use  of  integration  as  a  process  of  summation  is  applied 
to  elementary  problems  in  finding  areas  enclosed  by  plane  curves,  vol- 
umes of  solids  of  revolution,  the  length  of  a  curve,  and  to  area  of  surfaces 
of  revolution.  Prerequisite:  Mathematical  Analysis  II  or  Analytic 
Geometry. 

Calculus  II  3  cr. 

This  course  is  a  continuation  of  Calculus  I.  Topics  included  are: 
differentials,  the  theorem  of  the  mean  value  and  its  applications,  cen- 
troids,  fluid  pressure,  work,  series,  and  work  in  polar  and  parametric 
equations.  General  facility  in  integration  is  promoted  by  a  study  of 
the  construction  of  tables  of  integrals,  as  well  as  the  various  aids  in  in- 
tegration.   Prerequisite:  Calculus.  I. 


^06  Teachers  College  Bulletin 


Teaching  Mathematics  in  the  Secondary  School  3  cr. 

The  major  objective  of  the  course  is  to  prepare  teachers  of  mathe- 
matics for  the  modern  high  school.  Units  include  content  of  curriculum, 
objectives,  current  literature,  methods  of  instruction,  unit  and  lesson 
planning,  evaluation,  observation  and  participation. 

ELECTIVE  COURSES 
Advanced  College  Algebra  3  cr. 

This  is  a  second  course  in  Algebra  designed  to  develop  a  knowledge 
of  algebraic  theory  and  skill  in  the  processes.  It  includes  a  study  of 
theory  of  equations,  determinants,  partial  fractions,  infinite  series,  com- 
plex numbers,  cubic  and  biquartic  equations,  and  mathematics  of  invest- 
ment. Prerequisites:  College  Algebra,  Trigonometry,  and  Analytic 
Geometry. 

C)*lculus  III  3  cr. 

The  i*im  of  this  course  is  to  complete  the  student's  study  of  elemen- 
tary calculus.  This  course  should  be  a  real  asset  in  the  preparation  for 
teaching  secondary  school  mathematics  as  well  as  give  background  for 
graduate  work,  and  is  therefore  recommended  for  all  students  contem- 
plating advanced  study  in  mathematics.-  Some  of  the  topics  considered 
are:  partial  differentiation,  multiple  integration,  hyperbolic  functions, 
and  a  brief  study  of  elementary  differential  equations.  Prerequisite: 
Calculus  II. 

College  Geometry  3  cr. 

This  course  gives  the  student  a  thorough  preparation  for  teaching 
plane  geometry.  Effective  methods  of  attack  in  solving  problems  are 
carefully  analyzed  and  applied.  Special  effort  is  made  to  correlate  the 
material  studied  with  that  of  the  high  school.  Representative  topics  are: 
geometric  construction  based  on  loci  and  indirect  elements;  similar  and 
homothetic  figures,  properties  of  the  triangle,  Menelaus's  theorem  and 
Ceva's  theorem,  harmonic  properties  of  circles,  inversion  and  recent 
developments  in  geometry.  , 

Field  Work  in  Mathematics  1  to  3  cr. 

The  principal  topics  of  this  course  are:  field  instruments,  their 
mathematical  construction  and  use;  the  slide  rule,  its  construction  and 
use;  and  suggestions  for  teaching  the  simpler  instruments  in  secondary 
school  courses. 

History  of  Mathematics  3  cr. 

A  cultural  background  in  the  field  of  elementary  mathematics  is 
furnished  by  this  course.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  history  of  the 
development  of  the  number  systems  of  elementary  mathematics,  com- 
putational devices,  mathematical  symbolism,  space  concepts,  and  simple 
logical  processes.  Other  topics  treated  are:  methods  of  problem  solving, 
historical  references  in  teaching,  mathematical  recreations,  and  the 
biographies  of  outstanding  mathematicians.  Prerequisite:  Analytic 
Geometry. 


Indtana  Catalogue 'Number  '107 


Mathematics  of  Finance  3  cr. 

The  primary  purpose  of  this  course  is  to  give  the  student  a  back- 
g^round  for  teaching  general  and  consumer  mathematics.  The  course 
introduces  the  student  to  the  elementary  theory  of  simple  and  com- 
pound interest,  and  leads  to  the  solution  of  practical  problems  in  an- 
nuities, sinking  funds,  amortization,  depreciation,  stocks  and  bonds,  in- 
stallment buying,  and  building  and  loan  associations.  It  also  includes 
the  theory  of  probalility  as  related  to  life  insurance,  the  theory  and  cal- 
culation of  mortality  tables,  various  types  of  life  annuities  and  insur- 
ance policies.    Prerequisite:    College  Algebra. 

Spherical  Trigonometry  and  Navigation  3  cr. 

Besides  the  usual  treatment  of  theorems  of  space  the  course  em- 
phasizes alternate  methods  of  proof  and  applications  of  algebra  and 
elementary  analysis  to  solid  mensuration;  spherical  trigonometry;  and 
practical  applications  of  space  concepts  especially  in  the  field  of 
navigation. 

Statistics  3  cr. 

Statistics  covers  the  use  of  graphs,  frequency  distributions,  aver- 
ages, measures  of  central  tendency  and  dispersion,  sampling,  correlation, 
curve-fitting,  the  point  binominal,  and  the  normal  curve.  Emphasis  is 
placed  on  the  mathematical  development  of  formulas,  as  well  as  on  skill 
in  using  them.    Prerequisite:   Analytic  Geometry. 

REQUIRED  OF  ALL  STUDENTS  IN  S-ECONDARY  EDUCATION 
Fondamentals  of  Mathematics  3  cr. 

This  course  is  concerned  with  cultivating  the  students'  general 
understanding  and  appreciation  of  mathematics.  For  students  who  have 
had  little  high  school  mathematics  emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  develop- 
ment of  the  number  system,  arithmetic,  proof  and  reasoning,  methods  of 
equations,  graphs,  simple  statistics  and  the  place  of  mathematics  in 
present  day  living.  For  those  with  adequate  high  school  mathematics 
consideration  will  be  given  to  the  elements  of  more  advanced  mathematics. 

REQUIRED  OF  ALL  STUDENTS  IN  ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION 

Arithmetic  in  Social  Living  3  cr. 

This  course  shows  arithmetic  as  part  of  the  area  of  social  living. 
Emphasis  is  placed  on  arithmetic  concepts  and  processes  suited  to  vari- 
ous maturity  levels  and  techniques  for  developing  them;  on  children's 
need  for  arithmetic;  on  knowledge  of  research  in  the  field  of  arithmetic; 
and  on  books  and  materials  helpful  to  prospective  teachers  in  the 
elementary  school.  Prerequisite:  Students  must  show  by  examination 
a  reasonable  mastery  of  the  fundamental  processes  of  arithmetic. 


108  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

MILITARY  SCIENCE  AND  TACTICS 
DEPARTMENT 

Hubert  E.  Thornber,         Lieutenant  Colonel,  Quartermaster 

Corps,  United  States  Army, 
Professor  of  Military  Science  and 
Tactics 
Eugene  C.  Martin,  Major,  Quartermaster  Corps 

Victor  J.  Hawthorne,        Captain,  Quartermaster  Corps 
William  E.  Winstanley,  Master   Sergeant,    United    States 

Army 
Philip  A.  Champion,  Sergeant  First  Class,  United  States 

Army 

State  Teachers  College,  Indiana,  Pennsylvania,  is  authorized  a  Senior 
Division,  Reserve  Officers  Training  Corps  unit.  The  mission  is  to 
produce  junior  officers  who  have  the  qualities  and  attributes  essential 
to  their  progressive  and  continued  development  as  officers  of  the  Army 
of  the  United  States. 

REQUIREMENTS  FOR  ENROLLMENT 

There  are  certain  requirements  for  enrollment  in  the  Reserve  Ofificers 
Training  Corps.     Students  must  be: 

1.  Citizens  of  the  United  States. 

2.  Physically  qualified  under  standards  prescribed  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  the  Army. 

3.  Accepted   by   State   Teachers   College  as  a   regularly  enrolled 
student. 

4.  Be  not  less  than  fourteen  (14)  years  of  age  and  under  twenty- 
three  (23)  at  the  time  of  enrollment  in  the  Basic  Course. 

WHAT  ROTC  OFFERS 

Uniforms,  equipment,  ROTC  textbooks  and  notebooks  are  issued 
Urithout  cost  to  formally  enrolled  cadets. 

Students  having  successfully  completed  the  Basic  Course,  or  having 
over  one  year  of  active  service  in  the  Armed  Forces,  and  meeting  the 
Advanced  Course  admission  requirements  are  paid  a  subsistence  allow- 
ance in  lieu  of  rations  currently  amounting  to  Twenty-Seven  (27)  Dollars 
per  month  during  the  time  they  are  taking  the  Advanced  Course. 

After  the  student  completes  the  Advanced  Course,  ROTC  and  re- 
ceives his  baccalaureate  degree  from  the  college  he  is  eligible  for  a 
commission  as  a  Second  Lieutenant,  Quartermaster  Corps  in  the  Officers 
Reserve  Corps. 


Indiana  Catalogue  Number  109 


Policies  affecting  enrollment  and  continuance  of  students  in  the 
Senior  Division  of  the  Reserve  Officers  Training  Corps  are  included  in 
the  provisions  of  the  Selective  Service  Act  of  1950.    They  are  as  follows: 

1.  To  be  eligible  for  deferment  until  completion  of  their  academic 
course,  students  enrolled  in  the  ROTC  must  remain  in  good 
standing  in  both  their  academic  and  military  courses. 

2.  They  must  demonstrate  proper  and  sufficient  aptitude  and 
leadership  characteristics  to  ultimately  qualify  them  for  a 
commissioned  appointment. 

3.  They  must  attend  a  summer  training  camp,  when  ordered  by 
competent  authority. 

4.  They  are  required  to  sign  an  agreement  to  accept  a  commission 
in  the  Army,  if  and  when  tendered  and  to  serve  not  less  than 
two  (2)  years  on  active  duty  as  an  officer,  subject  to  call  by  the 
Secretary  of  the  Army. 


CURRICULUM  IN  MILITARY  SCIENCE  AND  TACTICS 

College  credit  is  given  for  this  training  in  lieu  of  credit  for  Physical 
Education. 

Sequence  of  courses  are  subject  to  change  as  directed  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  the  Army. 


BASIC  COURSE 

FIRST   SEMESTER  SECOND  SEMESTER ' 

Hours  Hours 

.,,,,,         e,  .           ,         Clock  Semester  Clock  Semester 

Military  Science  I    2             1  Military  Science  II    2             1 

Leadership  and  Drill  ...      1  Leadership  and  Drill  ...      1 

THIRD  SEMESTER  FOURTH  SEMESTER 

Hours  Hours 

«,.,,.         r,  .          ,^        Clock  Semester  Clock  Semester 

Military  Science  III 2             1  Military   Science   IV    ...      2             1 

Leadership,  Exercise  Leadership,  Exercise 

of  Command  and  Drill     1  of  Command  and  Drill     1 

ADVANCED  COURSE 

FIFTH    SEMESTER  SIXTH  SEMESTER 

Hours  Hours 

,,„,,         „  .           .,       Clock  Semester  Clock  Semester 

Military  Science  V  Military  Science  VI 

QMC    4             3  QMC    4             3 

Leadership,  Exercise  Leadership,  Exercise 

of  Command  and  Drill     1  of  Command  and  Drill     1 

SUMMER  CAMP  for  six   (6)   weeks  at  Quartermaster  Center. 
Fort  Lee,  Virginia 

SEVENTH   SEMESTER  EIGHTH   SEMESTER 

Hours  Hours 

.,.,..         „                        Clock  Semester  Clock  Semestei 

Military  Science  VII  Militarv  Science  VIII 

,  QMC    4              3  QMC" 4              3 

Leadership.  Exercise                      ^  Leadership,  Exercise 

of  Command  and  Drill     1  of  Command  and  Drill     1 


no  Teachers  Colicce  Bulletin 

MUSIC  EDUCATION  DEPARTMENT 

Clel  T.  Silvey,  Director 

Lola  A.  Beelar  Thomas  J.  Hughes 

Aagot  M.  K.  Borge  Jerome  Landsman 

Agnes  M.  Bothne  C.  David  McNaughton 

Robert  W.  Burggraf  Laura  M.  Remsberg 

Catherine  C.  Carl  Lawrence  C.  Stitt 

Charles  A.  Davis  Arvilla  Terrell 

Gladys  Dunkelberger  W.  Wynn  York 


Requirements  For  Admission.  In  addition  to  the  usual  entrance  re« 
quirements  (see  pages  30-32  of  this  catalogue)  unconditional  entrance 
to  a  program  of  study  leading  to  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science  in 
Music  Education  necessitates  the  following  specialized  abilities: 

1.  Possession  of  an  acceptable  singing  voice  which  indicates  no 
serious  defects  that  cannot  be  remedied  by  vocal  study. 

2.  The  ability  to  play  the  piano  or  an  orchestral  or  band  instra- 
ment,  representing  several  years  of  study  and  a  high  degree  of  per- 
formance skill. 

3.  Musical  sensitivity  in  such  matters  as  pitch  discrimination,  tonal 
and  rhythmic  memory. 

4.  The  ability  to  sing  at  sight  with  reasonable  accuracy  and  fluency 
music  of  the  difficulty  of  simple  folk  songs  and  hymns. 

Necessary  limitation  of  enrollment  in  the  department  of  music 
education  assures  a  carefully  selected  group  of  students  each  year. 
Data  on  personal  qualifications,  scholastic  attainment,  and  musical  ex- 
perience are  collected  for  each  applicant;  a  personal  interview  and  music 
aptitude  tests  for  prospective  music  students  are  given  by  the  Director  of 
the  department  and  his  assistants.  There  is  a  sincere  desire  on  the  part 
of  the  music  department  to  offer  necessary  guidance  before  a  student 
undertakes  the  music  program.  Early  application  is  desirable.  It  is 
advisable  for  the  prospective  student  to  make  application  for  admission 
to  the  Registrar  of  the  College.  In  general,  audition  dates  are  planned 
for  March,  April,  May,  June,  July,  and  August,  but  usually  admission  !s 
closed  in  June  or  July. 

Student  Teaching.  Students  in  the  Music  Curriculum  at  Indiana 
gain  their  knowledge  of  and  experience  with  teaching  situations  through 
three  definite  steps  and  procedures: 

1.  By  observation  periods  in  the  Keith  School  on  campus  and  the 
borough  schools  during  their  sophomore  year.    These  observations  are 


Indiana  Catalogue  Number  111 

designed  to  familiarize  students  with  some  teaching  problems  before  they 
take  the  methods  courses. 

2.  In  observation  and  actual  teaching  assignments  in  the  Keith 
School  and  the  borough  schools  during  the  Junior  and  Senior  years  as 
part  of  the  courses  in  Methods  and  Materials.  These  assignments  are 
limited  in  scope  but  definite  as  to  requirements  and  responsibility. 

3.  In  12  semester  hours  of  student  teaching  required  during  the 
first  or  second  semester  of  the  senior  year.  This  work  is  done  in  the 
elementary  and  junior  high  school  in  the  Keith  school,  in  the  borough 
schools  of  Indiana,  or  in  nearby  school  systems  where  music  teaching 
centers  have  been  established. 

All  student  teaching  is  done  under  careful,  personal  supervision 
of  the  music  education  department  staff  who  are  assigned  specifically  to 
direct  student  teaching.  With  the  exception  of  applied  music  require- 
ments, which  may  not  have  been  previously  removed,  the  student  con- 
centrates solely  upon  the  teaching  assignments  (at  various  levels)  during 
the  one  semester- 

GENERAL  EDUCATION  COURSE 

(Required  of  All  Students) 

Introduction  to  Music  2  cr. 

This  course  provides  an  orientation  in  music  experience  from  present 
to  past,  and  is  required  of  all  college  students.  It  aims  (1)  to  enrich  the 
student's  cultural  experience,  as  well  as  (2)  to  eqivip  the  prospective 
teacher  -with  an  understanding  of  music  as  it  relates  to  general  educa- 
tion and  the  art  of  daily  living.  The  possibility  of  correlations  with  other 
subjects  is  explored.  No  prerequisite  courses  or  special  abilities  are 
required. 

REQUIRED  COURSES  FOR  ALL  MUSIC  EDUCATION  STUDENTS 

Applied  Music 
INDIVIDUAL  INSTRUCTION 

The  curriculum  in  music  is  designed  to  give  opportunity  for  inten- 
sive preparation  in  musical  content  and  skills.  Continuous  study  of 
voice,  piano,  orchestral  and  band  instruments  is  required  as  an  integral 
part  of  ?  well-planned  series  of  musical,  cultural,  and  professional 
courses.  Such  study  is  essential  in  the  preparation  of  teachers  who  are 
to  function  as  leaders  in  music  education,  and  this  work  is  offered  to  all 
students  of  the  music  curriculum  without  additional  cost  beyond  the 
regular  contingent  fee  for  the  music  curriculum.  These  courses,  if 
instructors  are  available,  may  be  taken  as  electives  by  students  in  other 
departments  upon  payment  of  an  additional  fee  (See  page  38). 

Private  Voice  Instruction.  The  purpose  of  private  voice  instruction 
is  to  develop  the  whole  self  in  musical  thinking  and  feeling  through  the 
physical,  psychical,  spiritual  and  emotional  media.     Students  are  en- 


112  Teachers  College  Bulletin 


couraged  to  develop  an  effortless  and  beautiful  tone;  to  listen  to  artists' 
recordings;  to  build  a  repertoire  according  to  their  abilities;  and  to  sing 
artistically  from  the  standpoint  of  interpretation  and  musicianship.  The 
students  appear  in  informal  recitals,  church  choirs  and  community 
organizations. 

Private  Piano  Instruction.  The  importance  of  a  practical  knowledge 
of  the  pianoforte  has  long  been  recognized  as  essential  in  the  study  of 
any  branch  of  music;  the  broad  range  of  its  literature,  its  use  as  an 
accompanying  instrument,  the  possibilities  it  offers  in  the  reading  of 
scores,  ensemble  music,  and  the  like,  make  its  study  the  natural  founda- 
tion for  a  thorough  musical  culture.  Six  semesters  of  private  piano 
instruction  are  required  of  each  music  major  unless  the  requirements 
can  be  completed  in  less  time.  On  the  other  hand,  seven  semesters  will 
be  required  of  students  whose  progress  has  been  slow.  The  fourth  year 
requirements  listed  below  will  serve  as  the  final  criterion.  When  a  stu- 
dent feels  he  is  qualified  to  pass  the  piano  requirements  he  applies  for 
an  audition  before  the  members  of  the  piano  faculty.  Throughout  the 
four  years  the  private  piano  instruction  is  correlated  with  all  of  the 
theoretical  aspects  of  the  music  curriculum. 

Minimum   Requirements  in  Piano — by  years: 

I.  At  the  end  of  the  First  Semester  each  student  must  have  com- 
pleted any  good  first  year  adult  beginners  book,  or  its  equivalent;  must 
be  ablr"  to  play  all  the  sharp  major  scales,  at  a  reasonable  tempo,  two 
octaves;  must  play  simple  chord  patterns  in  major  keys;  should  also 
play  a  few  standard  etudes  for  the  first  grade.  Keyboard  harmony  will 
be  begun  in  keeping  with  the  needs  of  the  courses  in  music  theory  for 
subsequent  semesters 

II.  At  the  end  of  the  second  semester  each  student  must  have 
completed  a  standard  second  year  instruction  book,  or  its  equivalent; 
must  be  able  to  play  all  major  and  minor  scales  and  arpeggios  (principal 
triads);  should  have  completed  a  few  supplementary  pieces,  etudes,  or 
sonatinas  of  second  year  level. 

III.  At  the  end  of  the  Sophomore  year  a  student  should  be  able 
to  play  third  grade  material  such  as  the  intermediate  sonatinas,  and 
the  simpler  dances  of  Bach  or  Handel,  Chopin  Preludes,  Schumann  Album 
For  The  Young,  Grieg  Lyrical  Pieces  etc.  Also,  the  student  should  have 
completed  some  of  the  easier  studies  by  Czerny  (or  Kohler)  such  as 
the  Czerny-Liebling  No.  1,  and  be  able  to  read  at  sight  the  first  year 
material. 

IV.  By  the  end  of  the  Junior  year,  or  before  graduation,  students 
must  demonstrate  ability  to  play  a  prepared  solo  representing  at  least 
the  fourth  year  of  study;  play  an  accompaniment  to  a  song,  an  instru- 
mental solo  and  accompaniments  from  the  music  text  series  as  published 
for  junior  high  schools;  harmonize  at  the  piano  a  simple  melody  such 
as  is  published  for  primary  grades;  harmonize  scales  in  any  major  or 
minor  key,  and  transpose  a  simple  folk  song  to  any  |key^ 


Indiana  Catalogue  Number  113 

Private  Pipe  Organ  Instruction.  The  foundation  teaching  in  this 
department  is  based  on  trios,  pedal  studies,  and  Bach.  Much  atten- 
tion is  given  to  clarity  and  precision,  voice  progression,  various  types  of 
legato  and  staccato,  choice  of  registration,  artistic  phrasing,  and  ease  in 
handling  of  the  modern  organ.  The  college  has  a  three-manual  pipe 
organ  in  the  auditorium  which  will  be  used  by  the  more  advanced  organ 
students.  In  addition,  there  are  three  practice  organs  in  the  department. 
Students  may  elect  four  semesters  of  organ  study,  if  they  desire,  to 
satisfy  the  applied  music  requirement.  Prerequisite:  Junior  standing 
in  piano  requirements  which  are  specified  under  the  piano  instruction 
descriptions. 

Private  Violin  Instruction.  Study  in  violin  is  designed  to  prepare 
students  for  public  performance  and  successful  teaching.  The  es.  cntiala 
may  be  listed  as  follows:  thorough  ground- work  in  bowing  and  finger 
technic,  including  scales  of  all  kinds,  exercises  and  etudes,  special 
emphasis  being  placed  on  tone  quality  and  purity  of  intonation.  Oppor- 
tunity is  given  for  participation  in  ensemble  playing.  One  semester  of 
Class  Violin  (2  hours  weekly)  is  required  during  the  third  or  fourth 
semestet.  Additional  violin  study  may  be  elected  during  the  Junior  and 
Senior  years.  Prerequisite:  class  violin  or  an  elementary  knowledge  of 
the  instrument. 

Private  Instruction  in  Orchestral  and  Band  Instruments.  Oppor- 
tunity is  offered  each  student  to  pursue  his  interests  in  any  orchestral 
or  band  instrument;  Violincello,  Clarinet,  French  Horn,  etc.  Unless 
previous  proficiency  on  the  instrument  can  be  established,  private  study 
on  the  various  instruments  must  be  preceded  by  the  class  instrument 
instruction.  Thus  the  private  study  on  these  various  instruments,  other 
than  for  exceptional  cases,  would  be  delayed  until  the  Junior  and  Senior 
years. 

RECORDING  EQUIPMENT 

The  department  owns  its  own  recording  equipment  which  makes  possible 
constant  testing  in  applied  music.  Our  students  make  frequent  record- 
ings during  the  year  to  check  their  individual  growth  in  voice  and  in- 
strumental performance.  Recordings  ^are  also  made  of  the  ensembles 
and  the  larger  musical  organizations.  These  are  purchased  by  the  mem- 
bers of  these  musical  groups  for  reference  use  and  also  as  mementos 
of  many  glorious  experiences  with  choir,  band,  orchestra,  and  chamber 
groups. 

CLASS  INSTRUCTION 

Since  class  instruction  predominates  in  the  teaching  of  public  school 
music,  it  is  imperative  that  prospective  music  teachers  become  familiar 
with  the  technics  of  class  management;  the  psychology  of  class  teaching; 
and  the  materials  available  for  class  teaching  in  voice,  piano,  orchestral, 
and  band  instruments.  Instruction  is  so  arranged  that  adequate  oppor- 
tunity to  participate  in  various  types  of  class  instruction  is  available  to 
students  without  extra  cost.    Individual  instruction  and  class  instruction 


114  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

are  coordinated  in  a  flexible  manner  calculated  best  to  promote  individual 
progress. 

Class  Violin  Instruction.  This  is  a  required,  one  semester  course, 
for  all  second  year  students.  It  concerns  itself  with  elementary  violin 
playing  as  a  practical  introduction  to  the  technical  problems  involved  in 
the  playing  of  stringed  instruments.  It  includes  instruction  in  the 
selection  and  care  of  the  instrument,  tuning,  string,  and  elementary 
ensemble  playing.  The  class  meets  twice  each  week.  The  work  is  avail- 
able  as  an  observation  and  practice  laboratory  to  students  assigned  for 
student  teaching. 

Class  Piano  Instruction.  Piano  classes  are  organized  and  conducted 
in  the  elementary  grades  of  the  Keith  school.  The  work  is  directed  by 
members  of  the  piano  staff  and  is  available  as  an  observation  and  prac- 
tice laboratory  to  students  assigned  for  student  teaching. 

Voice  Class  Instruction.  This  is  a  required  two  semester  course 
(2  meetings  weekly)  for  all  Freshmen.  The  course  includes: — a  study  of 
the  vocal  instrument;  posture;  release  of  bodily  tensions;  breath  con- 
trol; vowel  formations,  color  and  projections;  consonant  formation  and 
rapid  articulation;  poise;  vocal  terminology;  intelligent  listening  and  the 
provision  of  a  performer-audience  situation  in  the  classroom.  Finally, 
the  simple  folk  and  art  songs  which  embody  all  the  fundamental  prin- 
ciples of  singing. 

Clarinet  Class  Instruction.  This  class  is  designed  to  give  the  student 
competency  on  the  clarinet  which  will  enable  him  to  deal  successfully 
with  the  instrument  in  the  public  schools.  Through  actual  playing  ex- 
perience the  student  learns  the  principles  of  tone  production,  care  and 
preparation  of  reeds  and  the  principles  involved  in  developing  a  success- 
ful technic. 

Percussion  Instruments  Class.    This  one  semester  course  is  reqiiired 

of  all  students  during  their  second  year.  It  is  devoted  to  a  study  of  the 
theory  and  applied  technic  in  playing  the  more  commonly  used  percussion 
instruments.  In  the  group  instruction  each  student  will  be  given 
individual  attention  in  the  major  percussion  instruments. 

Trumpet  and  Trombone  Class.  This  one  semester  course  is  required 
of  all  students  during  their  third  year.  It  is  concerned  with  individual 
and  group  study  of  the  Trombone  for  half  of  the  semester,  and  Trumpet 
or  Coronet  for  the  remainder  of  the  semester.  The  course  is  a  prere- 
quisite to  the  brass  class. 

String  Instrument  Class.  This  one  semester  course  is  required  of  all 
students.  It  is  concerned  with  the  theory  and  applied  foundational 
technique  of  playing  the  Viola,  Violincello,  and  Bass.  Attention  is 
directed  to  the  selection  and  care  of  these  instruments.  The  course  cul- 
minates in  the  study  of  and  participation  in  elementary  string  quartet 
playing. 


Indiana   Catalogue  Number  115 

Woodwind  Instrument  Class.  This  one  semester  course  is  required 
of  all  students  during  their  third  year.  It  is  devoted  to  a  study  of  th« 
theory  and  applied  foundational  technique  in  the  playing  of  the  wood- 
wind instruments.  During  the  course  of  ensemble  playing  each  student 
will  have  brief  periods  in  the  playing  of  each  of  the  instruments.  Much 
consideration  is  given  to  the  selection,  care,  and  repair  of  the  woodwind 
instruments. 

Brass  Instruments  Class.  This  one  semester  course  is  required  of 
all  students  during  their  sixth  or  seventh  semester.  It  is  devoted  to  a 
study  of  the  theory  and  applied  technique  of  the  brass  instruments. 

ENSEMBLE 

Ensemble  singing  and  playing  is  a  highly  important  factor  in  the 
training  of  a  well  equipped  musician  and  teacher.  The  program  in 
music  activities  is  sufficiently  varied  in  order  to  provide  a  place  for 
everyone  according  to  respective  stages  of  advancement.  Concerts  by 
the  ensembles  are  prepared  and  presented  each  semester  to  the  college 
community.  Concert  trips  to  nearby  communities  are  taken  each  semes- 
ter. 

First  year  students  are  required  to  be  in  either  the  Women's  or 
Men's  Glee  Clubs.  They  are  not  permitted  membership  in  the  College 
Choir  or  Mixed  Chorus.  A  small  number  of  first  year  students,  who  can 
qualify,  are  permitted  in  the  College  Band  and  Orchestra.  Beyond  the 
first  year,  all  music  majors  are  required  to  be  active  at  all  times  in  at 
least  one  instrumental  group  (Band,  Beginning  Band,  Orchestra,  Be- 
ginning Orchestra,  String  Orchestra).  Second  year  students  are  re- 
quired to  be  in  a  Mixed  Voice  ensemble,  and  those  who  cannot  qualify 
for  the  Choir  will  be  in  Mixed  Chorus.  Third  and  fourth  year  students 
are  required  to  be  active  in  at  least  one  of  the  four  vocal  groups. 

Symphonic  Band.  This  organization  is  devoted  to  the  study  of  band 
music  as  a  serious  and  distinctive  medium  of  musical  expression.  Its 
membership  represents  a  select  group  of  instrumentalists  and  is  open 
to  music  majors  and  general  college  students  who  can  satisfy  the  require- 
ments. The  symphonic  band  appears  in  concerts  at  the  college  and  in 
nearby  communities.    Three  rehearsals  are  held  each  week. 

Marching  Band.  This  organization  serves  the  college  and  the  com- 
munity by  appearing  in  distinctive  uniform  at  all  local  football  games 
and  community  parades.  Two  trips  are  made  to  games  away  each 
year.  Membership  is  open  to  all  music  majors  or  general  college  stu- 
dents who  can  satisfy  the  entrance  requirements.  Members  of  the  band 
study  marching  tactics  and  field  maneuvers.  Three  rehearsals  are  held 
each  week. 

College  Choir.  This  organization  is  devoted  to  the  serious  study  of 
choral  music,  accompanied  as  well  as  unaccompanied.  Its  membership 
represents  a  select  group  of  vocalists.     General  college  students  who 


IIQ  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

have  the  ability  to  meet  the  specific  entrance  requirements  are  invited. 
Third  and  fourth  semester  students  must  be  in  either  choir  or  mixed 
chorus.    Prerequisite:  class  voice.    Three  rehearsals  each  week  are  held. 

Symphony  Orchestra.  This  organization  devotes  its  time  to  the 
serious  study  of  symphonic  music.  Its  membership  represents  a  select 
group  of  instrumentalists.  General  college  students  who  have  the  ability 
to  meet  the  specific  requirements  are  invited.  Three  hours  rehearsal 
each  week. 

Indiana  Glee  Club  (Men).  This  organization  aims  to  afford  personal 
enjoyment  to  its  members  through  participation  in  ensemble  singing, 
and  contributes  to  college  life  by  appearing  publicly  on  the  campus  at 
concerts  and  assemblies.  This  organization  rehearses  two  hours  each 
week  and  exists  primarily  for  the  men  of  the  general  college.  Music 
major  Freshmen  men  are  required  to  belong. 

Women's  Glee  Club.  This  organization  rehearses  two  hours  each 
week  and  exists  chiefly  for  the  benefit  of  the  general  college  women 
who  are  interested  in  choral  music  activity.  Freshmen  women  of  the 
music  curriculum  are  required  to  be  in  this  ensemble.  This  organization 
will  appear  in  concert  separately  or  with  the  male  chorus  at  least  once 
each  semester. 

Mixed  Chorus.  This  organization  exists  chiefly  as  a  workshop  in 
choral  music  to  offer  needed  experience  for  music  majors — and  especially 
to  those  who  have  not  been  able  to  qualify  for  College  Choir.  The  Mixed 
Chorus  does  not  prepare  or  present  concerts.  Prerequisite:  Class  Voice. 
Two  rehearsals  are  held  each  week. 

Beginning  Band  and  Orchestra.  Opportunity  to  play  band  and 
orchestral  instruments  will  be  extended  to  any  college  student.  Each 
of  these  groups  meet  weekly  under  the  direction  of  a  music  staff  mem- 
ber. Instruments  are  furnished  to  students  who  do  not  own  their  own 
instruments.  Music  major  students  who  wish  to  practice  instruments  in 
addition  to  their  major  instruments  may  utilize  such  laboratory  periods 
to  advantage.  These  groups  serve  as  a  means  of  extending  the  class 
instruction  offered  during  the  second  and  third  years. 

Small  Ensembles.  Students  of  special  ability  from  the  large  en- 
sembles have  an  opportunity  to  engage  in  small  ensembles  such  as  string 
quartet,  trios,  woodwind  quintet,  brass  quartet,  girls'  sextette,  male 
quartet,  etc.  These  small  ensembles  will  each  be  under  the  direction 
of  staff  members. 

SEQUENCE   in   APPLIED   MUSIC 

(17   Semester  Hours) 

FRESHMAN  YEAR 

1st   Semester    (2    S.H.)  2nd  Semester  (2  S.H.) 

Private    Piano    Instruction  Private  Piano  Instruction 

Class    Voice    Instruction  Class   Voice   Instruction 

Gle«    Club— Men    or    Women  Glee  Club — Men  or  Women 


Indiana   Catalogite  Number  117 

SOPHOMORE  YEAR 
Srd    Semeatcr    (S    S.H.)  4th  Semeitcr  (3  S.H.) 

Private    Piano    Instruction  Private   Piano    Instruction 

Private     Voice     InHtruction  Private  Voice  InHtruction 

Class  Violin  or  Clarinet-PercuBsion  Class  Class  Violin  or  Clarinet-Percussion  CUh 

College    Choir   or    Mixed    Chorus  College  Choir  or  Mixed  Chorus 

One    Instrumental    Group  One  Instrumental  Group 

JUNIOR  YEAR 

6th    Semester    (3    S.H.)  6th  Semester   (S  S.H.) 

Private    Piano    Instruction  Private  Piano   Instruction 

Class    Strings   or   Woodwrinds  Class  Strings  or  Woodwinds 

Class    Trombone    and    Trumpet  Trombone-Trumpet  or  Brass  Class 

One  elective:    (Voice,    Piano,   Organ,   Band  One   elective:    (Voice,    Piano.    Organ    Band 

and    Orchestra    Instruments)  and   Orchestra   Instruments) 

Membership  in  at  least  one  Vocal  and   one  Membership  in  at  least  one  Voc*l  and  on* 

Instrumental  Group  Instrumental    Group 

SENIOR  YEAR    (1   S.H.) 

All  remaining  Applied  Music  credits  will  be  completed  during  the  one  semester 
when   not  engaged   in   student  teaching,   unless  some  deficiency   needs  to  be  removed. 

7th  or  8th  semester  (S.H.  1)  :  Brass  Class,  electives  and  ensembles  (As  listed  under 
the  Junior  year). 

Extra-Curricular  Activities 

(1)  MUSIC  EDUCATORS  CLUB  ACTIVITIES 
All  students  of  the  Music  Education  Department  are  automatically 
members  of  the  Music  Educators  Club.  This  organization  sponsors  trips 
to  Johnstown  and  Pittsburgh  to  hear  the  major  symphony  orchestras 
and  world-renowned  concert  artists  and  ensembles.  Each  class  within 
the  club  sponsors  student  recital-teas  periodically.  Such  activities  pro- 
vide opportunities  for  a  desirable  type  of  social  intercourse  and  educate 
students  in  accepting  responsibility  and  acquiring  social  grace  so  essen- 
tial to  the  music  educator.  Student  representatives  elected  by  the 
Club  sit  in  as  part  of  the  Music  Education  Council  of  Faculty  and 
Students,  which  determines  the  polices  of  the  department  within  the 
framework  of  the  College. 

(2)  Small  Modern  Orchestra.  This  activity  is  under  the  super- 
vision of  a  member  of  the  music  staff.  It  is  used  as  a  laboratory  for 
the  playing,  arranging,  and  conducting  of  contemporary  popular  music. 
Practical  study  is  made  of  the  arrangement  of  music  in  the  idiom  of 
popular  music  as  used  in  radio  and  the  dance  orchestra. 

Festival-Concerts,  Recitals,  and  Broadcasts 

(1.)  Faculty  and  student  recitals  are  presented  in  the  weekly  con- 
vocation (Wednesdays:  4-5  p.m.) — required  of  all  music  majors. 

(2.)  A  SYMPOSIUM  IN  MUSIC  EDUCATION  is  held  annually 
in  connection  with  PSEA  Central  Western  section  meeting.  It  is  a 
two-day  conference  (lectures  by  nationally  known  authorities  in  music 
and  demonstrations  of  up-to-date  teaching  procedures)  offered  for  the 
benefit  of  the  in-service  music  teachers  of  Western  Pennsylvania. 

(3.)  Spring  Festivals:  The  annual  High  School  Band,  Orchestra, 
and  Choir  days  are  offered  as  service  features  to  the  area. 

(4.)  National  Music  Week  is  observed  the  first  week  beginning 
with  the  first  Sunday  in  May.     During  the  week  at  least  one  concert 


118  Teachers  College  Bulletin 


or  recital  is  given  each  day.  It  begins  with  a  combined  Church  Choirs 
service  on  Sunday  and  ends  with  a  joint  school  children's  concert  on 
Saturday  morning.  The  remainder  of  the  concerts  and  recitals  are 
furnished  by  the  college  students  and  groups. 

(5.)  Each  of  the  music  ensembles  (large  and  small)  are  presented 
to  the  weekly  all-college  convocations  one  or  two  times  during  the 
school  year. 

(6.)  The  Music  Education  Department  provides  talent  (solo  or 
group)  for  one  half  hour  broadcast  over  Radio  Station  WD  AD,  Indiana, 
each  month. 

COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
THEORY  OF  MUSIC 

The  theory  courses  aim  to  develop  the  techniques  required  for  a  com- 
prehensive understanding  of  music  literature  through  analysis  and  the 
creative  approach.  Constant  emphasis  is  made  upon  the  practical  appli- 
cation of  skills.  Facility  at  the  keyboard  is  one  of  the  most  important 
general  functional  aims  throughout  all  theory  courses.  The  teachers  of 
private  piano  are  expected  to  assist  with  the  keyboard  drill. 

Solfeggio  I  3  hours — 2  credits 

This  course  aims  to  develop  the  student's  ability  to  learn  to  read  at 
sight  with  sol  fa  syllables;  also  to  begin  the  harmonization  of  melody 
at  the  keyboard  with  use  of  the  primary  chords.  Problems  studied  in- 
clude: all  major  and  minor  scales;  treble,  alto,  tenor,  and  bass  clef;  all 
diatonic  intervals;  duple  and  triple  meter  with  rhythmic  dictation  drills; 
phrase-wise  thinking,  and  elementary  form  analysis.  A  majority  of  the 
music  reading  material  is  chosen  from  the  newest  public  school  music 
basal  song  readers. 

Solfeggio  II  3  hours — 2  credits 

This  course  aims  to  increase  the  sensitivity  of  the  student  to  correct 
intonation.  In  addition  to  a  continuation  of  the  materials  begun  in  Sol- 
feggio I,  the  following  additional  problems  are  begun:  part  singing,  com- 
pound meters,  written  melodic  and  rhythmic  notation.  Prerequisite:  Sol- 
feggio I. 

Solfeggio  III  3  hours — 2  credits 

This  course  aims  to  develop  greater  facility  in  the  tonal  and  rhythmic 
techniques  already  presented  and  additional  mastery  of  the  problems  of 
part  singing.  Advanced  problems  include  more  difficult  modulation, 
chromatic  alterations,  modal  tonality,  and  more  complicated  rhythms. 
Continued  emphasis  on  individual  reading  ability,  which  began  with 
Solfeggio  I,  is  made.    All  problems  are  studied  both  aurally  and  visually. 

Theory  I  5  hours — 4  credits 

Theory  I  includes  the  hearing,  plashing  and  writing  of  the  primary 

harmonies  in  all  inversions  using  the  chorale  style  of  harmonization;  the 

dictation  of  melodies  and  notation  of  concomitant  harmonies;  the  study 


Indiana   Catalootte  Number  119 

of  the  phrase  and  period  through  the  melodies  harmonized.    Prerequisite: 
Solfeggio  II 

Theory  II  5  hours — 4  credits 

The  work  done  in  Theory  I  is  broadened  to  include  secondary  triads 
and  seventh  chords,  mastery  of  the  circle  of  fifths,  modulation  to  related 
keys.  Harmonization  of  melodies  in  the  piano  style  is  begun.  Writing  of 
original  melodies  is  introduced.  The  double-period  and  phrase  group 
serve  as  the  units  for  analysis.    Prerequisites:  Theory  I. 

Theory   III  3  hours— 3  credits 

This  course  includes  the  study  of  chromatic  harmonies  and  modula- 
tion to  remote  keys,  as  well  as  writing  for  Men's  and  Women's  Choruses; 
the  study  of  the  song-forms  and  simple  rondo  forms;  harmonic  dictation. 
Prerequisite:  Theory  II. 

Theory  IV  3  hours — 3  credits 

Theory  IV  requires  continued  harmonization  at  the  keyboard,  in- 
cluding transportation;  further  work  with  chromatic  harmonies;  study  of 
the  higher  rondo,  sonatina  and  sonato-allegro  forms;  original  writing. 
Prerequisite:  Theory  III. 

Survey  of  Music  Literature  2  hours — 1  credit 

This  course  lias  a  two-fold  purpose:  (1)  to  present  a  rapid  review 
of  the  chief  epochs  of  music  history  and  (2)  to  stress  methods  for  the 
teaching  of  listening  lessons  in  the  public  elementary  and  high  school 
grades. 

History  of  Music  I  3  hours — 3  credits 

This  course  traces  the  earliest  beginnings  of  music  and  its  important 
place  in  the  history  of  civilization,  and  the  social  and  political  back- 
ground. Thus  the  course  aims  to  extend  and  clarify  the  student's  under- 
standing of  modern  music  by  an  appreciation  of  the  past. 

History  of  Music  II  3  hours — 3  credits 

This  course  begins  with  Beethoven  and  the  development  of  the 
Romantic  movement.  It  deals  with  the  great  masters  of  the  nineteenth 
century  and  with  the  development  of  such  art  forms  as  the  art  song, 
the  piano  solo,  the  symphonic  poem,  the  latter  nineteenth  century  opera; 
and  modern  trends  of  the  twentieth  century. 

Orchestration  3  hours — %  credits 

In  this  course  a  study  is  made  of  the  essential  characteristics  of 
each  instrument  of  the  symphony  and  symphonic  band  with  particular 
stress  upon  the  limitations  of  each  instrument,  together  with  the  trans- 
position and  range  problems  of  each  instrument. 

Conducting  I  (choral)  3  hours— 1  credit 

In  this  course  emphasis  is  placed  on  the  application  of  the  tech- 
niques of  conducting  to  the  development  of  expressive  singing  through 
bodily  gesture  and  facial  expression.  Included  are:  a  survey  of  suitable 
marterials,  organization  of  groups,  testing  of  voices,  rehearsal  techniques, 


120  Teachers  College  Bulletin 


program  building,  interpretation,  vocal  techniques,  English  and  Latin 
diction. 

Conducting  II  (instrumental)  3  hours — 1  credit 

This  course  offers  the  student  the  opportunity  of  developing  in- 
creased competency  in  conducting  school  orchestras  and  bands.  Atten- 
tion is  directed  to  the  organization,  rehearsal  technics,  and  materials 
for  the  public  school  instrumental  needs. 

MUSIC  EDUCATION  AND  SUPERVISION  OF  STUDENT  TEACHING 

Methods  I  (Elementary)  4  hours — 3  credits 

This  course  offers  analytical  study  of  texts,  recordings  and  other 
materials  together  with  teaching  methods  suitable  to  desirable  musical 
development  of  Elementary  'School  pupils.  Experience  is  given  in 
proper  treatment  of  the  child  voice;  selection,  use,  and  t-eaching  of  rote 
songs;  rhythmic  development,  including  rhythm  band;  music  reading; 
part  singing;  planning  and  organization.  Guided  observations  in  the 
grades  is  required. 

Methods  II  (High  School)  3  hours— 2  credits 

This  study  involves  an  analysis  of  the  changing  adolescent  voice, 
its  special  problems;  a  survey  of  materials  and  methods  for  this  area; 
the  correlation  of  music  with  other  subjects;  the  problems  involved  in 
supervision  and  in  organizing  the  music  curriculum.  Observation  and 
an  increasing  amount  of  participation  in  teaching  are  required.  Pre- 
requisite:   Methods  I. 

Methods  III  (Instrumental)  3  hours — 2  credits 

This  course  is  designed  to  give  the  student  the  necessary  under- 
standing, technics  and  materials  to  develop  an  effective  instrumental  pro- 
gram in  the  public  schools.  Demonstrations  and  laboratory  work  are 
designed  to  give  the  student  the  competency  needed  to  meet  successfully 
the  various  teaching  situations  in  instrumental  music  from  the  grades 
through  high  school. 

Student  Teaching  and  Conferences  30  hours — 12  credits 

All  student  teaching  is  done  under  the  careful  personal  supervision 
of  critic  teachers.  Further,  all  teaching  is  done  with  elementary  grades 
or  high  school  students. 

Physical  Education  I  (Eurythmics  I)  2  hours — 1  credit 

This  course  attempts  to  develop  musical  perception  and  apprecia- 
tion through  physical  response;  to  stimulate  creative  imagination  through 
group  and  individual  interpretations;  and  to  promote  bodily  coordination, 
poise  and  precision.  Having  gained  sufficient  skill  and  alertness  in 
rhythmic  response,  the  student  is  required  to  direct  others;  to  master 
and  to  teach  a  repertory  of  representative  folk  dances;  and,  to  organize 
the  work  to  fit  the  needs  and  capacities  of  elementary  pupils. 

Physical  Education  II  (Eurythmics  II)  2  hours — 1  credit 

This  course  is  a  continuation  of  Physical  Education  I  (Eurythmics  I). 
Prerequisite:    Physical  Education  I. 


Indiana  Catalogue  Numblr  121 


ELECTIVES  FOR  MUSIC  STUDENTS 

Counterpoint  3  hours — 2  credits 

This  course  consists  of  study  and  analysis  of  representative  works 
of  the  great  polyphonic  writers  from  the  IGth  to  the  18th  centuries. 
Original  work  in  these  styles  and  forms  is  also  required.  Prerequisite: 
Theory  IV. 

Composition  3  hours — 2  credits 

In  this  elementary  course  each  student  is  offered  guidance  and  aid 
in  writing  pieces  in  the  forms,  styles,  and  mediums  best  suited  to  his 
own  special  capabilities  and  needs.     Prerequisite:    Theory  IV. 

Advanced  Harmony  3  hours — 2  credits 

This  course  is  designed  to  give  the  student  advanced  study  in  har- 
mony which  will  lead  to  a  better  understanding  of  the  idiom  of  present 
day  music.    Prerequisite:   Theory  IV. 

American  Music  3  hours — 2  credits 

This  course  provides  a  study  of  the  history  of  American  Music  from 
the  17th  Century  to  the  present.  Early  American  Musical  heritages  are 
traced  from  pre-revolutionary  America.  Prerequisites:  Music  History 
I  and  II. 

Class  Piano  Methods  3  hours — 2  credits 

This  course  makes  a  sui^vey  of  all  present  and  past  developments  in 
the  teaching  of  class  piano.  The  various  class  piano  methods  are  com- 
pared and  criticized.    Prerequisite:   Junior  Standing  in  Piano. 

All  students  are  required  to  take  part,  without  credit,  in  one  physical- 
education  activity  each  semester  in  which  no  physical  education  courses 
or  student  teaching  are  required.  In  addition  to  this,  all  students  must 
take  one  extra-curricular  activity  one  semester  each  year.  Attendance  at 
weekly  convocation  is  required. 

ELECTIVES  IN  OTHER  FIELDS  FOR  MUSIC  STUDENTS 

Electives  from  any  of  the  other  college  fields  may  be  chosen  by  those 
students  who  establish  a  high  record  of  achievement  in  their  major  field 
leading  tovv'ard  the  completion  of  requirements  for  certification  in  these 
respective  fields. 

REQUIRED  COURSES  IN  MUSIC  FOR  ELEMENTARY 
EDUCATION  STUDENTS 

Fundamentals  of  Music  2  hours — no  credit 

This  course  is  given  to  all  students  of  the  Elementary  Curriculum 
who  do  not  meet  the  prescribed  i-equirements  of  a  Standard  Achieve- 
ment Test  in  music  and/or  who  are  unable  to  sing  a  simple  melody 
in  tune.  Fundamentals  of  Music  includes  the  study  of  intervals,  scales, 
measure  and  key  signatures,  simple  and  compound  rhythms,  notation 
and  terminology,  and  the  application  of  this  knowledge  to  the  reading 


122  Teachers  College  Bulletin 


of  simple  music.  Prerequisite  to:  The  Teaching  of  Music  in  the  Primary 
Grades. 

Music  for  the  Elementary  Grades — Music  I  2  hours — 2  credits 

This  course  is  required  of  all  students  of  the  Elementary  Curriculum. 
It  is  designed  to  equip  graduates  of  the  Elementary  Curriculum  to  teach 
music  in  the  primary  grades.  Fundamentals  are  reviewed,  keyboard 
facility  and  the  child's  and  teacher's  voice  are  studied,  music  reading  is 
developed,  together  with  the  study  of  the  five-fold  music  program  of 
kindergarten  through  the  third  grade.  Prerequisite:  Fundamentals  of 
Music. 

Tttiching  of  Music  in  the  Elementary  Grades — Music  II  4  hours — 3  credits 
This  course  continues  the  five-fold  music  program  in  grades  four 
through  six.  Additional  ability  in  song  reading  and  part  singing  is 
attained.  Type  lessons  are  taught  by  the  students  and  constructively 
evaluated  by  class  and  teacher.  Prerequisite:  Teaching  of  Music  in 
the  Primary  Grades. 

ELECTIVES  IN  MUSIC  FOR  NON-MUSIC  STUDENTS? 

Any  of  the  courses  in  the  Music  Curriculum  are  available  to  students 
in  other  departments.  There  are  no  fees  for  the  larger  musical  organiza- 
tions, which  are  considered  extra-curricular  for  non-music  majors. 


Indiana  Catalogue  Numblh  123 

SCIENCE  DEPARTMENT 

DwiGHT  E.  SOLLBERGER,  Head  of  Department 

Willis  H.  Bell  Daniel  G.  Reiber 

Donald  E.  Hoffmaster  Adrian  W.  Ruland 

Merrill  B.  Iams  Paul  M.  Waddell 

Vernon  A.  Zeitler 

Biology,  Chemistry,  and  Physics  are  combined  into  one  department 
designated  as  the  Science  Department.  The  activities  of  the  Science 
Department  are  designed  to  fulfill  three  purposes:  First,  to  teach  the 
facts,  skills,  attitudes  and  appreciations  of  Science  through  the  basic 
courses  to  those  students  specializing  in  some  field  other  than  Science 
to  the  end  that  they  may  better  understand  the  world  in  which  they  live 
and  the  impact  of  the  scientific  method  on  society;  Second,  to  provide 
specialization  in  the  various  fields  of  Science  for  those  who  wish  to 
prepare  to  teach  these  sciences  in  the  secondary  school;  Third,  to  offer 
a  program  to  the  prospective  elementary  teacher  which  will  enable  her 
to  teach  Science  in  the  first  six  grades. 

GENERAL  EDUCATION   COURSES 
(Required  of  all  students) 

Basic  Biology  3  cr. 

This  course  deals  with  the  principles  of  Biology.  Topics  include 
cellular  structure  and  physiology,  growth  and  repair,  reproduction  and 
development,  control,  sources  of  food  energy,  inheritance,  and  man's 
interrelationship  with  his  biological  environment.  The  classification  of 
plants  and  animals  is  reviewed  briefly.  Two  hours  lecture  and  two  hours 
laboratory. 

Basic  Physical  Science  3  cr. 

This  course  utilizes  the  fields  of  earth  science  and  astronomy  to 
provide  a  broadened  background  of  science.  The  nature  and  uses  of 
energy  is  the  central  theme  for  the  study  of  heat,  light,  chemical,  elec- 
trical, and  atomic  energy.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  methods  and  the 
thinking  of  scientists  in  recognizing  and  solving  problems.  Two  hours 
lecture  and  two  hours  laboratory. 

SPECIALIZATION  IN  THE  VARIOUS  FIELDS  OF  SCIENCE 

The  increasing  complexity  and  specialization  within  the  field  of 
Science  has  made  many  problems  for  those  preparing  to  teach  Science 
in  the  secondary  schools  of  Pennsylvania.  One  of  the  problems  is  that 
of  securing  sufficient  breadth  as  well  as  depth  in  preparation  for  teaching- 
Science. 


124 


Teachers  College  Bulletin 


Indiana  has  attempted  to  meet  the  needs  of  prospective  science 
teachers  by  offering  a  wide  variety  of  courses  and  fields  in  which  to 
specialize.     These  are  as  follows: 

Major  Minor 

Biology  Specialization 30  sem.  hrs.  18  sem.  hrs. 

Chemistry   Specialization  _ -    30  sem.  hrs.  18  sem.  hrs. 

Physics    Specialization    _ 30  sem.  hrs.  18  sem.  hrs. 

Physical  Science  Specialization 30  sem.  hrs.  18  sem.  hrs. 

Science  Specialization  ___ 38  sem.  hrs.  no  minor 

COURSES  REQUIRED  OF  MAJORS 
IN  THE  VARIOUS  FIELDS  OF  SCIENCE 

Teaching  Science  in  the  Secondary  School  3  cr. 

This  course  is  planned  to  give  the  prospective  science  major  a 
thorough  background  in  the  problems  of  teaching  Science,  The  objectives 
of  the  science  program  in  the  secondary  school,  selection  of  textbooks, 
sources  of  suitable  literature,  how  to  secure  materials  for  instruction, 
the  preparation  of  units,  and  special  techniques  are  studied.  Prerequisites: 
12  hours  of  work  in  major  field.    Three  hours  lecture. 

Biological  Science  Specialization 

Requirements  for  Major  in  Requirements  for  Minor  in 

Biological   Science  Biological  Science 

30  credit  hours 

Botany  I  and  II 8  credits 

Zoology  I  and  II 8  credits  18  credit  hours  in 

Teaching  Science  in  the  Biology 

Secondary   School-.  3  credits 
Electives   11  credits 

Students  specializing  in  Biological  Science  will  not  be  required  to 
take  Basic  Biology. 


Chemistry  Specialization 


Re'qnirements  for  Major  in 

Chemistry 

30  credit  hours 

Inorganic  Chemistry 

I  and  II 8  credits 

Qualitative  Analysis  _3  credits 
Quantitative    Analysis  3  credits 

Physics  I  and  II 8  credits 

Teaching  Science  in  the 

Secondary   School 3  credits 

Electives  (Chemistry)  5  credits 

Students  specializing  in   Chemistry  will  not  be  required  to  take 
Basic  Physical  Science. 


Requirements  for  Minor  in 
Chemistry 


18  credit  hours  in 
Chemistry 


Indiana  Catalogue  Number 


125 


Physical  Science  Specialization 

Requirements  for  Major  in  Requirfments  for  Minor  in 

Physical  Science  Physical  Science 

30  credit  hours 
Inorganic  Chemistry- _  8  credits 

Physics  I  and  II 8  credits  18  credit  hours  in 

Teaching  Science  in  the  Physics  and  Chemistry 

Secondary   School--  3  credits 
Electives   11  credits 

Students  specializing  in  Physical  Science  will  not  be  required  to 
take  Basic  Physical  Science. 

Physics  Specialization 

Requirements  for  Major  in  Requirements  for  Minor  in 

Physics  Physics 

30  credit  hours 

Physics  I  and  II 8  credit* 

Inorganic  Chemistry 

I  and  II 8  credits  18  credit  hours  in 

Teaching  Science  in  the  Physics 

Secondary   School.-  3  credits 
Electives     11  credits 

Students  specializing  in  Physics  will  not  be  required  to  take  Basic 
Physical  Science.  College  Algebra  and  Trigonometry  are  pre-requisites 
for  specializing  in  Physics  as  a  first  field. 

ReYjuirements  for  Major  in  Minor 

General  Field  of  Science 

Botany  I  and  II 8  credits 

Zoology  I  and  II 8  credits  No   minor   is   provided 

Inorganic  Chemistry  for    the    general    field 

I  and  II 8  credits  of  "Science." 

Physics  I  and  II 8  credits 

Teaching  Science  in  the 

Secondary   School 3  credits 

Earth  Science 3  credits 

38  credit  hours 


REQUIRED  COURSES  FOR  SPECIALIZATION 
IN  BIOLOGICAL  SCIENCE 

Botany  I  4  cr. 

Botany  I  is  primarily  a  study  of  the  flowering  plants.  Topics  include 
the  anatomy  and  life  processes  of  plant  cells,  leaves,  stem,  roots,  flowers, 
seeds,  and  fruits.  The  economic  importance  of  plants  used  by  man  and 
the  recognition  and  classification  of  the  seed  plants  in  the  immediate 
environment  of  the  college  are  included.  Three  hours  lecture  and  three 
hours  laboratory  per  week. 


126  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

: ( 

BoUny  II  4  cr. 

Botany  II  is  concerned  primarily  with  the  non-flowering  plants.  It 
considers  both  the  anatomy  and  life  processes  of  selected  algae,  bacteria, 
fungi,  mosses,  ferns,  and  their  allies.  The  economic  importance  and 
health  implications  of  certain  of  these  groups  are  emphasized.  The  recog- 
nition and  classification  of  the  non-flowering  plants  of  the  immediate 
surroundings  are  stressed.  Prerequisite:  Botany  I.  Three  hours  lecture 
and  three  hours  laboratory  per  week. 

Zoology  I  4  cr. 

This  is  a  study  of  the  life  history,  habits,  origin,  development,  physi- 
ology and  anatomy  of  each  phylum  of  the  invertebrates.  Emphasis  is 
given  to  the  study  of  those  forms  of  economic  importance  to  man  or 
with  health  implications.  The  student  becomes  acquainted  with  the  many 
invertebrate  species  found  locally.  Three  hours  lecture  and  three  hours 
laboratory  per  week. 

Zoology  II  4  cr. 

This  course  is  a  study  of  the  Chordata  in  general,  and  more  par- 
ticularly the  classes  of  Vertebrates.  Topics  studied  include  the  anatomy, 
physiology,  origin,  development,  and  life  history  of  representative  mem- 
bers of  each  class.  Special  attention  is  given  to  the  vertebrates  found  in 
the  vicinity  of  the  college.  Prerequisite:  Zoology  I.  Three  hours  lecture 
and  three  hours  laboratory  per  week. 

ELECTIVES  FOR  SPECIALIZATION  IN 
BIOLOGICAL  SCIENCE 

Conservation  of  Plant  and  Animal  Resources  3  or. 

In  this  course  special  attention  is  devoted  to  a  study  of  accepted 
practices  in  soil,  water,  forest,  and  game  conservation.  Numerous  local 
and  state  conservation  specialists  are  called  in  to  assist  in  the  discussions 
of  the  specialized  fields  of  conservation.  Field  work  is  an  essential  part 
of  the  course.  Prerequisite:  Biological  Scien<5e  or  equivalent.  Two  hours 
lecture  and  three  hours  laboratory  per  week.  Two  all-day  Saturday  field 
trips  are  scheduled. 

Ecology  3  cr. 

This  is  a  study  of  the  interrelations  and  adaptations  of  plants  and 
animals  and  includes  consideration  of  physical  as  well  as  biotic  environ- 
mental factors.  Field  trips  are  taken  to  study  various  types  of  ecologic 
situations.    Two  hours  lecture  and  three  hours  laboratory  per  week. 

Field  Botany  3  cr. 

This  is  an  advanced  course  in  the  taxonomy  of  the  vascular  plants 
of  the  region.  It  includes  the  ferns,  fern  allies,  shrubs,  trees  and  herb- 
aceous plants.  The  use  of  the  standard  manuals  for  the  identification  of 
plant  materials  is  stressed.  Students  are  required  to  make  collections 
for  their  future  use  in  teaching  situations.  Two  hours  lecture  and  three 
hours  laboratory  per  week. 


Indiana  Catalogue  Number  127 


Field  Zoology  3  cr. 

Field  Zoology  is  a  course  in  the  study  of  animals  in  the  field;  the 
collection  of  such  forms,  and  the  preparation  and  utilization  of  them 
for  class  instruction.  Students  are  required  to  make  collections  for  their 
future  use  in  teaching  situations.  Two  hours  lecture  and  three  hours 
laboratory  per  week.    Field  trips  are  required. 

Entomology  3  cr. 

This  is  an  introduction  to  the  orders  of  insects,  considering  their 
characteristics,  habits,  economic  relations,  together  with  the  collecting 
and  identifying  of  representative  forms  from  western  Pennsylvania.  Two 
hours  lecture  and  three  hours  laboratory  per  week. 

Genetics  3  cr. 

The  purpose  of  this  course  is  to  give  the  student  an  understanding 
of  the  laws  of  inheritance  as  they  operate  in  plants,  animals,  and  humans. 
Cell  structure,  Mendelian  inheritance,  eugenics,  linkage,  probability,  cross- 
ing over,  and  random  assortment  are  all  considered.  Prerequisite:  6  hours 
Biology.     Two  hours  lecture  and  three  hours  laboratory  per  week. 

Microbiology  3  cr. 

This  course  is  a  study  of  microscopic  forms  of  life,  both  plant  and 
animal,  which  are  commonly  encountered  in  biological  work.  Some 
emphasis  is  placed  on  the  study  of  disease  producing  species  of  man  and 
his  domesticated  animals.  Methods  of  culturing  forms  used  in  high  school 
teaching  are  studied.  Prerequisites:  Botany  I  and  II,  Zoology  I  and  II. 
Two  hours  lecture  and  three  .lours  laboratory  per  week. 

Ornithology  3  cr. 

Ornithology  is  a  careful  study  of  the  birds  of  the  region  supplemented 
by  a  review  of  the  major  orders  of  birds  of  the  western  hemisphere. 
Indoor  studies  of  skins  are  made  during  the  early  part  of  the  course, 
while  the  latter  part  of  the  course  is  largely  field  work.  Early  morning 
field  trips  are  required.  Two  hours  lecture  and  three  hours  laboratory 
per  week. 

Physiology  3  cr. 

The  purpose  of  this  course  is  to  give  the  student  a  general  background 
of  how  animals  carry  on  bodily  processes  and  a  more  detailed  knowledge 
of  human  physiology.  Related  anatomy  is  taught  as  needed.  Prerequisites: 
Zoology  I  and  II.    Two  hours  lecture  and  three  hours  laboratory  per  week. 

REQUIRED  COURSES  FOR  SPECIALIZATION  IN  CHEiMISTRY 

Inorganic  Chemistry  I  and  II  8  cr. 

Chemistry  I  includes  the  study  of  non-metals,  gas  laws,  valence, 
grammolecular  volume,  ionization,  solutions,  oxidation,  and  reduction. 
Chemistry  II  includes  atomic  structure  and  periodic  classification  of 
elements,  the  metals,  and  simple  qualitative  tests  for  cations  and  anions. 
Three  hours  lecture  and  three  hours  laboratory  per  week. 


128  Teachers  College  Bulletin 


I 


Qualitative  Analysis  3  cr. 

This  is  a  study  of  the  theoretical  principles  and  practices  underlying 
analytical  chemistry.  These  principles  are  exemplified  in  practice  by 
developing  the  preliminary  and  systematic  procedures  for  the  qualita- 
tive detection  and  identification  of  the  common  cations  and  anions. 
Mastery  is  inculcated  by  solving  typical  problems  and  identifying  un- 
knowns of  increasing  complexity.  One  hour  lecture  and  six  hours  lab- 
oratory per  week.  First  semester,  odd  years  r*rerequisite:  Inorganic 
Chemistry. 

Quantitative  Analysis  3  cr. 

This  course  gives  introductory  training  in  the  theory  and  practice  of 
gravimetric,  volumetric,  colorimetric,  and  elect)  jlytic  separations  and 
calculations  on  a  quantitative  basis.  Students  will  visit  commercial  and 
control  laboratories  employing  quantitative  techni^-cs.  One  hour  lecture 
and  six  hours  laboratory  per  week.  Second  semester,  odd  years.  Pre- 
requisite: Qualitative  Analysis. 

Physics  I  and  II— See  Page  130  8  cr. 

ELECTIVES  FOR  SPECIALIZATION  IN   CHEMISTRY 

Biological  Chemistry  3  cr. 

This  course  includes  the  chemistry  of  proteins,  fats,  carbohydrates, 
minerals,  and  vitamins,  and  biological  functions  of  each;  studies  the 
digestive  and  metabolic  reactions  by  test  meals  and  urine  analyses. 
Animal  feeding  tests  will  supplement  laboratory  and  lecture  work.  Two 
hours  lecture  and  three  hours  laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Or- 
ganic Chemistry. 

Colloidal  Chemistry  3  cr. 

This  course  consists  of  discussion  and  laboratory  work  dealing  with 
the  theory  of  colloidal  behavior.  Stress  will  be  placed  upon  proteins 
and  other  materials  encountered  in  the  colloidal  state  which  are  import- 
ant in  nature  or  industry.  Two  hours  lecture  and  three  hours  laboratory 
per  week.     Prerequisites:     Inorganic  and  Organic  Chemistry. 

Industrial  Chemistry  3  cr. 

This  course  is  a  study  of  the  applications  of  chemistry  and  science 
to  the  industries  of  Western  Pennsylvania  for  the  science  teacher.  Field 
trips  to  representative  industries  will  constitute  the  laboratory  work  and 
serve  as  a  basis  for  discussion.  Two  hours  lecture  and  three  hours 
laboratory  per  week.    Prerequisite:  Inorganic  Chemistry  I  and  II. 

Organic  Chemistry  I  4  cr. 

A  study  of  the  aliphatic  series  of  organic  compounds  with  brief 
introduction  to  the  aromatic  series.  Both  micro-  and  semi-micro  tech- 
niques are  employed  to  stress  the  properties  and  type  reactions  of  the 
usual  classes  of  organic  compounds.  Three  hours  lecture  with  three 
hours  laboratory  per  week.  First  semester,  even  years.  Prerequisite 
Inorganic  Chemistry. 


Indiana    Catalogue    Xumukr  129 

Organic  Chemistry  II  3  cr. 

This  course  is  a  continuation  of  Organic  Chemistry  I.  It  deals 
primarily  with  the  amines  and  proteins  and  those  compounds  belonging 
to  the  aromatic  series.  Both  micro-  and  semi-micro  techniques  are  era- 
ployed  to  stress  the  properties  and  type  reactions  of  the  usual  classes 
of  organic  compounds.  Two  hours  lecture  with  three  hours  laboratory. 
Prerequisite:  Organic  Chemistry  I. 

Physical  Chemistry  3  cr. 

This  course  considers  the  phase  rule;  properties  of  solutions,  liquids, 
solids,  and  gases;  surface  tenion;  vapor  pressures;  osmotic  pressure, 
chemical  cells,  buffers,  indicators;  oxidation-reduction  potentials;  phys- 
ical conditions  affecting  chemical  equilibria.  Laboratory  work  applying 
these  principles.  Two  hours  lecture  and  three  hours  laboratory  per  week. 
Prerequisites:  Inorganic  Chemistry  I  and  II,  Physics  I  and  11. 

REQUIRED   COURSES   FOR   SPECIALIZATION   IN   PHYSICS 
Physics  I  and  II  8  or. 

A  two-semester  course  constituting  the  usual  first  year's  work  in 
general  college  physics.  In  Physics  I  mechanics,  heat  and  sound  are 
studied;  in  Physics  II  electricity  and  magnetism,  and  light.  A  working 
knowledge  of  elementary  algebra  is  essential.  Three  hours  lectures 
and  three  hours  laboratory  per  week. 

Inorganic  Chemistry  I  and  II — See  Page  128  8  cr. 

ELECTIVES  FOR  SPECIALIZATION  IN  PHYSICS 

For  a  specialization  in  Physics,  the  two-semester  course,  Physics  I 
and  II  must  be  taken  first.  It  is  recommended  that  this  be  taken  in 
the  first  year  of  college.  The  advanced  courses  being  given  each  year 
will  be  announced.  Required  advanced  courses  for  the  Physics  specializa- 
tion must  include  Mechanics  and  Electricity  and  Magnetism. 

Electricity  and  Magnetism  4  or. 

This  is  an  advanced  course  in  general  electricity  and  magnetism 
required  of  all  physics  majors  and  minors.  The  electric  and  magnetic 
fields  of  D.  C.  and  A.  C.  circuits,  capacitance,  inductance,  electromotive 
force,  electrical  instruments  are  among  the  topics  developed.  Three 
hours  lecture  and  three  hours  laboratory  per  week.  Physics  I  and  II 
are  prerequisites. 

Heat  4  cr. 

This  is  an  advanced  course  in  general  heat.  Temperature  and  ex- 
pansion, heat  transfer,  properties  of  gases  and  thermodynamics  are  some 
of  the  topics  developed.  Three  hours  lecture  and  three  hours  laboratory 
per  week.    Physics  I  and  II  are  prerequisites. 

Mechanics  4  cr^ 

This  is  an  advanced  course  in  general  mechanics  required  of  physics- 
majors  and  minors  and  of  special  value  to  students  majoring  in  mathe- 


130  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

matics.  Statics,  linear  motion,  circular  motion  and  simple  harmonic 
motion  are  among  the  topics  developed.  Three  hours  lecture  and  three 
hours  laboratory  per  week.    Physics  I  and  II  are  prerequisites. 

Modem  Physics  3  or. 

This  is  a  course  in  twentieth  century  physics.  The  topics  include 
thermionics,  spectra,  X-rays,  and  radioactivity.  Considerable  time  is 
devoted  to  atomic  structure  and  the  newer  developments  in  the  field  of 
atomic  energy.  Two  1-hour  lectures  and  one  3-hour  laboratory  per 
week.    Physics  I  and  II  are  prerequisites. 

Optica  3  cr. 

This  course  deals  with  such  topics  as  reflection  and  refraction  at 
surfaces,  optical  instruments,  polarization,  interference  and  diffraction 
of  light.  Two  1-hour  lectures  and  one  3-hour  laboratory  per  week. 
Physics  I  and  II  are  prerequisites. 

Electronics  8  cr. 

This  is  a  course  dealing  with  the  electron,  including  the  charge, 
emission,  and  velocity  of  the  electron.  The  fundamentals  of  vacuum 
tubes  and  their  circuits  and  the  use  of  tubes  in  communications  and  in- 
dustry are  studied.    Prerequisites:  Physics  I  and  II. 

ELECTIVES  FOR  SPECIALIZATION  IN  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE 

These  electives  are  to  be  selected  from  the  regular  electives  in 
Biology,  Chemistry,  and  Physics. 

ELECTIVES    FOR   SPECIALIZATION    IN   THE    GENERAL   FIELD 

OF  SCIENCE 
Thse  electives  are  to  be   selected  from  the  regular  electives   in 
Biology,  Chemistry  and  Physics. 

Earth  Science  3  cr. 

This  course  is  designed  to  provide  the  background  of  knowledge 
of  the  sky,  geological  forms,  and  weather  phenomena  necessary  to  the 
teacher  of  General  Science  in  the  ninth  grade.  Field  trips  at  night  for 
star  study,  visits  to  interesting  geological  formations  and  a  weather 
station  are  some  of  the  activities  included.  Two  lectxire  periods  and 
one  two-hour  laboratory  period. 

REQUIRED  COURSES  FOR  STUDENTS  IN  SECONDARY 
EDUCATION 

Science  in  Modem  Civilization  3  cr. 

This  course  is  designed  to  acquaint  the  secondary  student  with  some 
of  the  major  discoveries  of  science  in  all  fields  and  the  effects  of  dis- 
coveries upon  man's  way  of  life.  Emphasis  is  placed  upon  developing 
an  understanding  of  science  and  its  implications.  Discoveries  leading  to 
more  abundant  supplies  of  energy,  discoveries  contributing  to  better 


Indiana   Catalog ub  Number 131 

health  and  longer  life,  more  rapid  transportation,  to  a  more  abundant 
and  better  food  supply,  better  housing,  better  clothing  and  to  greater 
destructive  potential  are  some  of  the  topics  developed. 

REQUIRED  COURSES  FOR  STUDENTS  IN  ELEMENTARY 
EDUCATION 

Science  for  the  Elementary  Grades  3  cr. 

This  course,  following  the  year  of  basic  science,  is  designed  to  pro- 
vide the  elementary  teacher  with  a  more  adeqiiate  background  for  teach- 
ing science  in  the  elementary  school.  Units  or  problems  are  selected 
to  achieve  this  purpose  which  cut  across  various  fields  of  science.  Em- 
phasis is  placed  upon  developing  resourcefulness  in  gathering  data  and 
using  the  scientific  method  in  the  solution  of  such  problems. 

Teaching  of  Elementary  Science  3  cr. 

Based  on  the  previous  work  in  science,  this  course  takes  up  the  plan- 
ning and  presentation  of  material  suitable  to  the  elementary  field.  Stu- 
dents are  required  to  perform  demonstrations  and  take  part  in  science 
activities  which  illustrate  facts  or  principles  taught  in  the  elementary 
science  program.  Considerable  attention  is  given  to  the  literature  of  the 
elementary  science  program  as  well  as  other  aids  such  as  community 
resources  and  simple  equipment  that  can  be  secured  for  experimentation 
and  other  activities. 

REQUIRED  COURSES  FOR  STUDENTS  IN  HOME  ECONOMICS 
Bacteriology  2  cr. 

This  course  is  designed  specifically  for  students  of  Home  Economics. 
It  is  a  general  one-semester  course  dealing  with  bacteria  in  their  various 
relations  to  man.  Applications  to  food  preservation  and  other  problems 
of  the  home  are  stressed.    One  hour  lecture;  three  hours  laboratory. 

Inorganic  Chemistry  3  cr. 

This  course  includes  an  introductory  study  of  the  non-metals,  the 
gas  laws,  atomic  structure,  valence,  ionization,  solutions,  oxidation  and 
reduction,  and  the  periodic  classification  of  the  elements.  Two  hours 
lecture  and  three  hours  laboratory. 

Organic  and  Biochemistry  3  cr. 

This  course  is  designed  to  include  those  topics  from  the  fields  of 
Organic  Chemistry  and  Biochemistry  that  are  most  important  for  the 
student  of  Home  Economics.  Among  the  topics  included  are  the  aliphatic 
organic  compounds,  the  physiological  functions  of  materials,  proteins, 
carbohydrates,  fats,  minerals,  digestion,  absorption,  and  metabolism.  Two 
hours  lecture  and  three  hours  laboratory. 


132  Teachers  College  Bulletin 

SOCIAL  STUDIES  DEPARTMENT 

W.  M.  Whitmyre,  Head  of  Department 

Ralph  W.  Cordier  John  R.  Sahli 

C.  M.  Johnson  Albert  J.  Wahl 

Florence  Wallace 

A  student  specializing  in  Social  Studies,  History,  or  Social  Science 
must  have  a  minimum  of  thirty  (30)  semester  hours  in  the  respective 
field. 

A  student  offering  either  of  the  three  fields  above  as  a  second  area 
of  specialization  must  have  as  a  minimum  18  hours  of  required  work. 
Every  candidate  for  certification  in  social  studies  must  have  at  least  nine 
hours  in  the  social  sciences. 

GENERAL  EDUCATION  COURSES 

(Required  of  all  students) 

World  Culture  I  &  II  10  cr. 

An  integrated  survey  course  presenting  the  significant  movements 
in  the  origin  and  development  of  governmental  and  social  organization, 
economic  activity,  religious  belief  and  practice,  literature  and  fine  arts 
in  our  modern  culture  pattern.  It  deals  with  broad  sweeping  move- 
ments rather  than  details  of  the  individual  state  or  nation.  Emphasis 
is  placed  on  the  conflict  between  ideas  and  systems  of  thought  and  prac- 
tice through  which  these  various  aspects  of  modern  life  developed.  The 
first  semester  covers  the  period  from  the  early  civilizations  to  approxi- 
mately 1800.    The  second  semester  is  concerned  with  the  modern  period. 

or  History  of  Civilization  I  &  II  (with  Literature  I  &  II)  6  cr. 

A  survey  of  the  development  of  institutions  and  culture  in  the 
Western  World  is  presented  in  this  course.  The  creation  and  transmis- 
sion of  the  cultural  heritage  is  discussed  with  special  emphasis  placed 
upon  the  contribution  to  contemporary  life  of  the  so-called  prehistoric 
period,  the  Ancient  Orient,  Greece,  Rome,  Medieval  Europe,  the  Renais- 
sance, and  Modern  Times. 

History  of  United  States  and  Pennsylvania  3  cr. 

A  survey  course  in  the  history  of  the  United  States  and  Pennsyl- 
vania from  the  beginning  of  the  colonial  period.  Einphasis  is  placed  on 
the  social,  economic  and  political  development  of  our  nation  in  general 
and  of  our  Commonwealth  in  particular.  Problems  in  conjunction  with  the 
acquisition  of  our  independence,  the  organization  of  our  nation,  the 
questions  in  regard  to  slavery,  the  expansion  of  our  national  bound- 
aries and  economy  and  the  settlement  of  the  question  of  states  rights 
versus  national  rights  will  be  discussed. 


*0n  leave  1951-1952,  Ford  Foundation  Fellowship 
** Substituting  for  Ralph  Cordier  1951-1952 


Indiana  Catalogue  Numbek  133 


American  Citizenship  6  cr. 

A  course  which  deals  with  the  qualities  which  make  a  good  citizen 
and  the  practices  necessary  to  train  the  student  to  become  a  good  citizen 
in  his  school  and  community.  It  combines  knowledge  about  citizenship 
with  the  attitudes  necessary  for  developing  it,  and  gives  an  opportunity 
for  working  them  out  in  school  and  community  activities, 

or  American  Government  (with  Home  and  Family  Living 

or  Introduction  to  Philosophy)  3  cr. 

This  course  includes  a  study  of  the  basic  principles  of  American 
government,  the  Constitution  of  the  United  States,  the  machinery  through 
which  it  works,  and  some  of  its  major  problems.  In  the  study  of  fed- 
eral, state,  and  local  government,  attention  is  given  to  current  problems. 

REQUIRED  OF  ALL  MAJORS 

Teaching  of  the  Social  Studies  3  cr. 

This  course  is  intended  to  familiarize  prospective  teachers  with 
desirable  methods  which  may  be  used  in  teaching  the  social  studies,  with 
current  trends  and  developments  in  the  field  of  social  education,  and 
to  develop  a  professional  interest  in  social  education.  Emphasis  is 
placed  on  the  philosophy,  objectives,  courses  of  study,  organisation  of 
subject  matter  for  teaching  purposes,  curriculum  materials,  procediires, 
and  evaluation. 

ELECTIVES— HISrrORY 

History  of  United  States  and  Pennsylvania  II  3  cr, 

A  survey  course  in  the  history  of  the  United  States  and  Pennsylvania 
from  1865  to  the  present.  Stress  is  placed  on  the  impact  of  the  Indus- 
trial Revolution  on  our  society,  the  growth  of  labor,  the  development  of 
the  United  States,  world  power,  our  part  in  World  Wars  I  and  II  and  the 
activities  of  our  nation  on  behalf  of  international  organization.  The 
problem  approach  w^ill  be  stressed  including  the  problems  of  minority 
groups,  of  civil  rights,  of  the  relations  between  labor  and  industry,  of 
foreign  relations,  etc. 

History  of  Pennsylvania  3  cr. 

A  study  of  the  founding  and  development  of  Pennsylvania  from  its 
colonial  beginnings  to  the  present  time.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the 
social,  economic  and  political  developments  in  the  different  periods  of 
its  history.  Special  attention  is  given  to  the  diversity  of  the  people, 
their  institutions  and  problems  and  the  growth  of  Pennsylvania  to  a 
leading  position  in  our  modern  industrial  world. 

History  of  Europe  to  1815  3  cr. 

This  course  deals  with  important  political,  economic  and  cultural 
achievements  from  the  16th  century  to  the  beginning  of  the  19th.  It 
treats  of  the  Renaissance,  the  spirit  of  reform  and  religious  revolt, 
the  expansion  of  Europe,  monarchy  by  divine  right  and  other  aspect*  of 
the  "Old  Regime"  the  French  Revolution,  and  the  era  of  Napoleon. 


134  Teachers  College  Bulletin 


History  of  Europe  Sincer  1815  3  cr. 

A  comprehensive  study  of  the  factors  contributed  by  the  European 
people  in  their  national  organization  through  their  political,  social 
and  economic  activities.  The  understanding  of  the  causal  and  inter- 
group 'relationships  are  essentially  basic  to  analysis  and  interpretations 
of  the  difficulties  facing  the  European  world  today. 

History  of  Latin  America  3  cr. 

The  course  surveys  the  development  of  the  Latin  American  countries 
from  the  period  of  discovery  to  the  present.  The  economic,  social,  political 
and  cultural  areas  receive  special  attention  first  as  domestic  problems 
then  as  they  are  related  to  the  various  political  units  involved.  The 
influence  of  European  and  American  relations  as  they  are  reflected  in 
local  changes  are  given  consideration. 

History  of  England  8  cr. 

This  course  traces  the  growth  of  the  people  and  institutions  of 
England  from  the  conquest  by  the  Anglo-Saxons  to  the  present.  The  em- 
phasis is  placed  on  the  development  of  these  factors  that  gave  rise  to 
the  struggle  and  events  that  culminated  in  the  establishment  of  demo- 
cratic principles  and  organizations  in  our  modern  world. 

History  of  the  Far  East  3  cr. 

A  survey  of  the  development  of  the  people  of  Eastern  Asia  and  the 
adjacent  islands  with  special  emphasis  on  China,  Japan  and  Korea.  The 
course  will  present  a  background  for  understanding  better  the  current 
problems  of  the  Far  East.  Special  emphasis  is  placed  on  the  import- 
ance of  the  impact  of  the  West  as  a  conditioning  factor  in  the  develop- 
ment of  the  Far  East  in  modern  times. 

ELECTIVES— SOCIAL  SCIENCES 

Principles  of  Economics  3  cr. 

A  study  of  basic  fundamentals  underlying  the  major  areas  in  the 
field  of  economics,  production,  exchange,  distribution  and  consumption. 
Wages,  interest,  rent,  profits,  price  determination,  money  and  banking, 
and  foreign  trade  will  receive  specific  consideration.  Some  attention  is 
given  to  national  income  approach. 

Principles  of  Sociology  3  cr. 

This  is  an  introductory  course  dealing  with  the  relationship  of 
people  with  each  other  and  their  environment.  There  is  discussion  of 
the  meaning  and  functions  of  culture,  of  the  meaning  and  place  of 
social  institutions,  such  as  the  family,  religion,  education,  etc.,  and  of 
social  problems  with  emphasis  on  the  means  of  social  control. 

Comparative  Government  3  cr. 

In  this  course  major  attention  is  given  to  Great  Britain  and  Soviet 
Russia  as  best  representing,  among  foreign  governments,  the  democratic 
and  authoritarian  systems.    Consideration  is  given  to  the  governments 


Induna  Catalogue  Number  135 


of  France,  Italy,  Germany,  and  Japan.  Comparisons  and  contrasts  are 
drawn  between  these  governments  and  government  in  the  United  States 
and  other  nations  of  our  world. 

Municipal  Govei'nment  3  cr. 

This  course  deals  with  the  history,  organization,  structure  and  func- 
tions of  the  major  types  of  city  government  in  the  United  States.  Con- 
sideration is  given  to  the  development  of  modern  administrative  tech- 
niques and  methods  as  they  apply  to  municipalities.  The  prevailing 
forms  of  government  and  administration  used  by  boroughs  and  townships 
in  Pennsylvania  are  surveyed. 

Industrial  Relations  3  cr. 

A  study  of  the  problems  involved  in  the  relations  between  the 
workers  and  management  in  dynamic  industrial  society,  and  the  economic 
aspects  of  the  solutions  of  these  problems  proposed  or  attempted  by 
labor,  management,  and  the  government. 


136 


Teachers   College  Bulletin 


COLLEGE  ENROLMENT  BY  CURRICULA 
1952-1953 
Male 


Elementary  Curriculum: 

1st    year    11 

2nd    year    12 

Srd    year    2 

4th    year    17 

Secondary  Curriculum: 

1st    year    112 

2'nd    year    75 

Srd    year    35 

4th    year    86 

Art  Curriculum: 

1st    year    10 

2nd    year    16 

3rd    year    11 

4th    year    13 

Business  Curriculum: 

1st    year    62 

2nd    year    39 

Srd    year    13 

4th    year    40 

Home  Economics  Curriculum: 

1st    year    0 

2nd    year    0 

3rd    year    1 

4th    year    0 

Music  Curriculum: 

1st    year    32 

2nd    year    33 

3rd    year    8 

4th    y«ar    34 

Total    662 


;male 

Total 

Total  by 
Curricula 

80 

91 

96 

108 

74 

76 

S3 

100 

375 

44 

156 

25 

100 

14 

49 

23 

109 

414 

18 

28 

13 

29 

17 

28 

18 

31 

24 

86 

27 

66 

10 

23 

24 

64 

78 

78 

66 

66 

33 

34 

51 

51 

30 

62 

31 

64 

15 

23 

24 

58 

918 


1580 


116 


23^ 


229 


207 


1580 


Indiana  Catalogue  Numbbh 


187 


COLLEGE  ENROLMENT  BY  COUNTIBS 


County  Total 

Adams 2 

Allegheny 278 

Armstrong  68 

Beaver    56 

Bedford 8 

Berks 8 

Blair    50 

Butler    45 

Cambria    175 

Cameron 2 

Carbon    2 

Center  7 

Cheater  2 

Clarion    16 

Clearfield   36 

Clinton    2 

Columbia    6 

Crawford    12 

Cumberland   6 

Dauphin    0 

I>eraware    4 

Elk 19 

Erie   19 

Fayette 42 

Franklin  6 

Fulton  1 

Greene    5 

Huntingdon   3 

Indiana   240 


County  Total 

Jefferson    42 

Lackawanna 2 

Lancaster 4 

Lawrence    26 

Lebanon    6 

Lehigh    2 

Luzerne    8 

McKean 20 

Mercer    13 

Montgomery    2 

Northampton    1 

Northumberland 4 

Perry l 

Pike 1 

Potter    3 

Snyder    1 

Somerset 61 

Tioga 1 

Venango 16 

Warren .. 6 

Washington 85 

Westmoreland   194 

York 9 

Totel  Pa.  Students 1674 

Out-of-state 6 

Total 1680 


1952-1953 

College  Enrolment-full-time  students 1580 

Student  Nursea-full-time  students  23 

Part-Time  Students: 

Saturday  Campus  Classes 116 

Greensburg  Extension  Classes 25 

Johnstown  Extension  Classes 63 

Kittanning  Extension  Classes 88 


Total  College  Enrolment 1835 

Enrolment  in  Keith  (Laboratory)  School 362 

Enrolment  Summer  Sessions  1952 

Pre  Session 340 

{Regular  Session  428 

Post  Session  , 219 


138 


Teachers  College  Bulletin 


INDEX 


A 

AecounU,  Delinquent ^2 

Accrediting   Agencies  — ■ 16 

Activities,    Student    24 

Administrative    Organization    4 

Admiaeion,   Requirement*   for 83 

Advanced  Registration  Deposits 42 

Advanced  Standing S6 

Advisory   System 22 

Alumni    24 

Association — 24 

Day    28 

Annual  Cooperative  Art  Exhibition  _.  66 

Art    Awards    - — 66 

Art    Department    46,  66 

Admission    -—  66 

Curriculum    47 

Elective    Course*    67,  70 

Fees 46 

Required    Course* 66,  70 

Art  Exhibition,  Annual  Cooperative  —  66 
Associations 

Student    Cooperative    26 

Awards _— 66 

B 

Baggage ~ — — — - __—.——    20 

Bills,   How  to  Pay 43 

Biological    Science    Specialization    126 

Board    of   Trustees    8 

Boarding   Students    20 

Buildings    16 

Bureau     of     Teacher     Education     and 

Certification    3 

Business  Education  Department  —     48,  71 

Curriculum — -     49 

■  Explanation    of    —    71 

Elective    Courses    73,  76 

Fees   48 

Practical  Experience  Requirements  -     72 

Required   Courses 78,  76 

.  Standards     71 

C 

Cafeteria    1| 

Calendar     2 

Campus     16 

Campus   Classes 32 

Certificates 

Education   for  Safe  Living   97 

Elementary — Temporary  Standard  —     39 

Provisional    College    39 

Stete    Standard    Limited    39 

Certification,   Requirements  for 39 

Art     66 

Business  Education 71 

Dental    Hygiene    50 

Education   for   Safe  Living 97 

Elementary     „ 61 

English     82 

Foreign    Language    90 

Geography    92 

Home  Economics 99 

Mathematics    106 

Military    Science    109 

Music     111 

Public    School   Nursing   58 

Science    124 

Social    Studies    133 

Speech     S7 

Chemistry    Specialization   ——,.-..—    Ui 

ChQst   X-Rays 81 

Class   Organization   «..-- .     29 


Clinics,     Special     4 

Psycho-Educational   Bureau 23 

Reading     23 

Speech 28,  89 

Commencement    28 

College,    The   12 

College,   Lodge   17 

Co-operating   Schools, 

Supervisors    in 10 

Cooperative  Art  Exhibition,  Annual  __     66 

Cooperative   Association,    Student 26 

Correspondence    Work    (See 
Advanced  Standing) 

Courses    (See   each    division    and 
department   for   courses   and 
requirements) 

Cultural   Life   Committee   25 

Curricula  (See  also  each 

department)     46 

D 
Day    Students   28 

Degree   Curriculum   for  Dental 

Hygienists    BO 

Degree   Curriculum   for   Public 

School     Nursing     68 

Degree    Fee    42 

Delinquent    Accounts    — . 42 

Dental    Hygiene    60 

Departmental    Groups,    Student 

Organizations    _ 26 

Departments 

Dental    Hygiene    60 

Education     77 

English    and    Speech    82 

Foreign  Languages 90 

Geography    92 

Health  and   Physical  Education 96 

Mathematics    106 

Military   Science  and   Tactics 109 

Public    School   Nursing    68 

Science     124 

Social    Studies    183 

Speech     82 

Departments,  Heads  of 4 

Departments,  Special  Art 46,  65 

Business   Education 48,  71 

Home   Economics   64,  99 

Music - — 66,  111 

Deposits 

Advanced    Registration    42 

Private    42 

Directors    of    Divisions    4 

Directors  of  Special   Departments 4 

Divisions,    Directors   of   4 

Elementary    61 

Secondary     69 

Dormitory  Life 21 

Dramatics 88 

Driver    Education    98 

E 

Education,    Courses    in    77 

Driver    98 

General   Safety 98 

Educational    Fraternities    29 

Elective  Courses 

Art    67.  70 

Business   Eklucation   78,  76 

Elementary    Education    68 

Home    Economics    99,  104 

Music    111,  123 

Secondary 61 

Elementary  Education, 

Division    of    61 


Indiana   Catalogue  Numbeh 


139 


INDEX— (Continued) 


Certification    89 

Curricuium     bZ 

Directory   of   Course   Ueacriptions 68 

Elective    Courses    58,  70,  80 

Fees   40 

Keauired  couriies  —     70,  79,  96.  117,  182 
Elementary — Temporary 

Stundard    Certificate    89 

English  and  Speech,  Courses  in H'i 

Certification     8C,  86 

Enrollment 

By    counties    137 

By   curricula   188 

Ensemble    Singins _- 116 

Entrance  TcsU 88 

Extension   Classes   32 

r 

Faculty   5 

Fees  40 

Activity    41 

Contingent   (all  curricula)   40 

Out-of-state  students 41 

Regular    session    . -  40 

Summer  Sessions 40 

Special  Curricula  .. 40 

Housing 41 

Late    Registration . . 41 

Special 

Damage     42 

Degree     42 

Infirmary 42 

Private  Instruction   in  Music 41 

Transcript    42 

Summary  of 

Non-resident 44 

Resident   - . 44 

Festivals     118 

Fire  Precautions 20 

First  Aid   87 

Fraternities     29 

Honorary 29 

Men's   and   Women's 29 

Inter-fraternity    Council    29 

Foreign   Languages,  Courses  in 90 

Certification    90 

French,    Course    in   91 

Certification    91 

Freshman   Dormitory   19 

Fulfilling  the   Purposes  of 

the  College 12,  14 

G 

General    Information    19 

General    Science    124 

Geography,   Courses  in   92 

Government     (See    Student    Participa- 
tion    in     College    Administration) 

Grades     85 

Grades     Reports     23 

Graduation,    Requirements    for    88 

Greenhouse,    The   18 

Guest   Charges    29 

Gymnasium,  David  J.  Waller 17 

H 

Handbook     20 

Heads   of   Departments 4 

Health    and    Physical    Education 

Courses  in   96 

Health  Requirements   34 

History  of   the  College  15 

Home  Economics  Department 54 

Currieulum    65 


Elective    Courses    99,  104 

Fees    64 

Home   Jiiconomics   Cafeteria 18 

Home   Munagement   Houses 18 

Home  and  Employment  Exi>erience  -     64 

Nursery     School     54 

Placement    24 

Required    Courhes    100,  104,   132 

Home  Mnna);ement  Houses   18 

Home  and  Employment  Experiences  —     54 
Honorary    Fraternities     29 

I 

Individual  Instruction  in  Music 112 

Infirmary 21 

Fee     21.  41 

Inter-fraternity     Council     29 

J 

John   A.   H.   Keith   School,  The 17 

Junior    St^inding    86 


Keith  School,  John  A.  H.  — 


17 


H. 


Laboratory    School    (See    John    A. 

Keith  School) 

Laundry 20 

Library,  Wilson  Hall 16 

Hours    20 

Life    Saving    and    Swinuning, 

Red   Cross    29 

Loan    Fund     81 

Location  of  College 15 


66, 


Mathematics,   Courses   in   

Certification    

Men   Student  League ..___. 

Men's   Varsity   "I"   Loan   Fund   . 

Military   Science  and  Tactics 

Music  Education  Department 

Admission,   Requirements  for 

Broadcasts 

Curriculum     

Elective    Courses    

Ensemble    — 

Extra-Curricular   Activities   

Fees   

Festivals 

Individual    Instruction    

National  Music  Week 

Recording    Equipment    _.-. . 

Required  Courses 

Sequence  in  Applied  Music  . 

Student    Teaching    

Symposium  in  Music  Education 


106 
105 

26 

81 
109 
111 
111 
119 

57 
122 
116 
118 

66 
118 
112 
118 
114 
112 
117 
111 
118 


N 

New    Students    19 

Non-Resident  Student  League 26 

Nursery    School    64 

O 

Office  Hours 20 

Organizations,   Student  24 

Class    29 

Departmental    Groups    26 

FVaternities 29 

Home  Economics 54 

Music     118 


140 


Teachers  Coujbok  Bullrtin 


INDEX— (Continued) 


Professional    29 

Religious     26 

Student    Participation    in    ColleKe 

Administration 25 

Varsity    Clubs    28 

P 

Pay  Bills.  How   to 43 

Payment,   Time  of   43 

Personal   Interview 34 

Physics    Specialization    180 

Placement    Service    24 

Professional    Organizations   29 

Private  Account* 42 

Provisional    College    Certificate   39 

Psychology    (See   under   £ducation)    —  Ti 

Psycho- Educational   Bureau 23 

Public   School  (Nursing    68 

Purposes  of  the  College,  Fulfilling  .     12.14 

Q 

Quality  Points   36 

B 

Recitals     118 

Repayments 48 

Registration    Days    2 

Registration    Deposit,    Advance    42 

Religious  Life  Committee 26 

Religious    Organizations    26 

Requirements,  Practical  Szperienee  ..  72 

Reuuirements    33 

Admission    33 

General    Scholarship    33 

Health     34 

Personal  Interview 34 

Personality    34 

Advanced     Standing     86 

Certification    89 

Graduation     88 

Junior   Standing    86 

Scholastic     86 

Student    Teaching    88 

Required  Courses 

Art    47 

Business  Education 49 

Elementary    Education    61 

Home  Eoonomics 66 

Music 67 

Secondary     69 

Reserve    Officers'    Training 

Corps    22,  109 

Room   Assignments 19,  21 

8 

Safe    Living,    Education    for. 

Certification    in    98 

Safety,   General,   Education   98 

Saturday  Campus  Classes 82 

Scholarships    30 

Scholastic    Requirements    36 


Science,  Course  in 124 

Certification — — _-  124 

Secoudai-y  Certification — — ._    69 

Secondary  Education,  Division  of 69 

Curriculum 60 

Elective    Courses    M,  »1,  «3 

Required  Courses 60,  61 

Social   Studies,    Courses   in   188 

Certification    188 

Spanisti,    Courses    in    90 

Certification    90 

Speech,  Courses  in 86 

Certification    86 

Speech    Clinic    89 

cjports   M 

c<tate  Council  of  Education 8 

State   Scholarships    SO 

State  Standard   Limited   Certificate  —  89 

Student  Cooperative  Association 25 

£>tudent    Council    -.__ 26 

Student    Organizations    __ — 24 

Departmental  Groups 26 

Student    Participation    in    College 

Administration     .___.-—__-__ 26 

Student  Supplies 19 

Student  leaching.   Eligibility   for 38 

Summer  Sessions 82 

Supervising   Teachers   in 

co-operating   Schools  „-.- 10 

Supplies,     Student    19 

Swimming,    Red    Cross    -_. 29 

Symposium  in  Music  Education 118 


Tennis   Courts    18 

Transcript  h'ee 42 

Transfer  of  Credit 86 

Transportation   Facilities   16 

Trustees,   Board  of  — 3 

U 

Uupperclass    Room    Assignments    21 

V 

Vacation    Charges    20 

Varsity  Athletics 28 

Varsity    Clubs    28 

W 

Wilson  Hall  Library  16 

Women's  Collegiate  Association 26 

X 

X-Rays,    Chest   21 

Y 

Y.  M.  C.  A.  26 

Y.  W.  C.  A.  20